JVC Car Video System LVT1627 001A User Manual
HDD NAVIGATION/DVD RECEIVER  
NAVEGACIÓN HDD/RECEPTOR DVD  
SYSTÈME DE NAVIGATION À DISQUE DUR/RÉCEPTEUR DVD  
KD-NX5000  
For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.  
Para la instalación y las conexiones, refiérase al manual separado.  
Pour l’installation et les raccordements, se référer au manuel séparé.  
For customer Use:  
Enter below the Model  
No. and Serial No. which  
are located on the top or  
bottom of the cabinet.  
Retain this information  
for future reference.  
INSTRUCTIONS  
Model No.  
Serial No.  
MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES  
MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS  
LVT1627-001A  
[J]  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Hard Disk Drive (HDD)  
WARNINGS:  
To prevent accidents and damage  
Installation  
• DO NOT install any unit in locations  
where:  
This unit has a built-in HDD, which is a device  
to read minute magnetic changes. The inside of  
the device is precision components, requiring  
you to notice the following when installing the  
unit:  
Install the unit at a place where the following  
conditions are satisfied:  
– it may obstruct the steering wheel and  
gearshift lever operations.  
– it may obstruct the operation of safety  
devices such as air bags.  
– it may obstruct visibility.  
• Dry and neither too hot nor too cold—  
between 5°C (41°F) and 35°C (95°F).  
If the temperature is too low, the HDD will  
not work. Wait until the temperature in the  
car becomes normal before operating the  
unit.  
• At an altitude between –300 m (–980 ft) below  
sea level and +3000 m (9800 ft) above sea  
level.  
• DO NOT operate the unit while driving. If  
you need to operate the unit while driving,  
be sure to look ahead carefully.  
• The driver must not watch the monitor  
while driving.  
• If the parking brake is not engaged,  
“
Parking Brake” flashes on the monitor,  
and no playback picture will be shown.  
– This warning appears only when the  
parking brake wire is connected to the  
parking brake system built in the car  
(refer to the Installation/Connection  
Manual).  
• With adequate ventilation to prevent internal  
heat buildup in the unit.  
Before using HDD  
While the unit is turned on, the hard disk  
is constantly rotating at a high speed. This  
requires you to notice the following:  
• DO NOT impart vibration or shock.  
• DO NOT allow anything having strong  
magnetism or emitting strong electromagnetic  
waves (cellular phones, etc.) near the unit.  
• DO NOT disconnect the power cords from  
the car battery when the unit is turned on.  
Failure in following the above cautions may  
damage the HDD (the stored data will be lost  
and be never restored).  
When the temperature is low, the HDD may  
take some time to start up, or may reboot  
automatically.  
It should be noted that it may be unlawful to  
re-record pre-recorded tapes, records, or discs  
without the consent of the owner of copyright  
in the sound or video recording, broadcast or  
cable programme and in any literary, dramatic,  
musical, or artistic work embodied therein.  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
How to reset your unit  
How to forcibly eject a disc  
If a disc cannot be recognized by the unit or  
cannot be ejected, eject the disc as follows.  
• Your preset adjustments  
will also be erased.  
[Hold]  
Emergency Eject and No Eject (or Eject  
OK) appear on the monitor.  
Press 5 / ∞ repeatedly to select Emergency  
Eject, then press ENT.  
• If this does not work, reset your unit.  
• Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.  
How to detach/attach the control panel  
Detaching  
Attaching  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INFORMATION (For U.S.A.)  
Cautions on the monitor:  
This equipment has been tested and found  
to comply with the limits for a Class B digital  
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.  
These limits are designed to provide reasonable  
protection against harmful interference in  
a residential installation. This equipment  
generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency  
energy and, if not installed and used in  
accordance with the instructions, may cause  
harmful interference to radio communications.  
However, there is no guarantee that interference  
will not occur in a particular installation. If this  
equipment does cause harmful interference  
to radio or television reception, which can be  
determined by turning the equipment off and  
on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the  
interference by one or more of the following  
measures:  
• The monitor built in this unit has been  
produced with high precision, but it may  
have some ineffective dots. This is inevitable  
and is not malfunction.  
• Do not expose the monitor to direct  
sunlight.  
For safety...  
• Do not raise the volume level too much, as  
this will block outside sounds, making driving  
dangerous.  
• Stop the car before performing any  
complicated operations.  
Temperature inside the car...  
– Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
– Increase the separation between the  
equipment and receiver.  
– Connect the equipment into an outlet on  
a circuit different from that to which the  
receiver is connected.  
If you have parked the car for a long time in hot  
or cold weather, wait until the temperature in  
the car becomes normal before operating the  
unit.  
– Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/  
TV technician for help.  
Caution on volume setting:  
Discs produce very little noise compared with  
other sources. Lower the volume before playing  
a disc to avoid damaging the speakers by the  
sudden increase of the output level.  
This product incorporates copyright  
protection technology that is protected  
by U.S. patents and other intellectual  
property rights. Use of this copyright  
protection technology must be authorized  
by Macrovision, and is intended for home  
and other limited viewing uses only unless  
otherwise authorized by Macrovision.  
Reverse engineering or disassembly is  
prohibited.  
[European Union only]  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
8 Introduction  
Initial settings  
Basic operations  
Parts index  
Remote controller—RM-RK250  
18 Navigation system  
Basic operations  
Registering your home  
Starting guidance  
Searching for a place  
How you are guided  
Arranging your route  
Registering favorite points  
Traffic information on map  
Navigation menu items  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
51 Radio  
Listening to the radio  
Listening to the satellite radio  
59 Discs and HDD  
Disc operations  
Music server operations  
CD changer operations  
79 Other functions  
iPod/D. player operations  
Playing other external components  
Using Bluetooth devices  
AV Menu items  
Sound equalization  
109 Troubleshooting  
117 Specifications  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Initial settings  
When you turn on the unit for the first time, the initial setup screen appears. Follow the procedure  
below and make necessary settings.  
Turn on the power.  
Language  
English US  
Español  
Français  
Adjust the following settings.  
5
6
DST  
Select an item  
Select Auto if your residential area is  
subject to DST (Daylight Saving Time).  
Proceed to the next setting  
Reverse Polarization  
Engage the parking brake, step on the  
brake pedal, then switch the gear lever.  
If Forward and Reverse alternates  
on the display, connection is correct.  
Select one of the alternatives (GND or  
Battery) that shows the gear position  
correctly.  
Back to the previous setting  
1
2
Language  
Select the language you want for the  
display and the voice guidance.  
Store Display Mode  
Select Off  
.
• If you select On, the System starts in  
the navigation demonstration mode  
for shops. (☞ [47])  
Finish the procedure.  
3
4
Installation Angle  
Select which angle your unit is installed  
at. This setting is necessary for the  
precise functioning of the Navigation  
System.  
• See “Measuring the installation  
angle” on the Installation/Connection  
Manual.  
You can also change these settings (except  
Store Display Mode) through Setup  
Menu and AV Menu when necessary.  
•
•
•
•
•
Language ☞ [46]  
Installation Angle ☞ [46]  
Time Zone ☞ [91]  
DST ☞ [91]  
Reverse Polarization ☞ [94]  
Time Zone  
Select your residential area for clock  
adjustment.  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Calibration  
Before using the Navigation System first time, it is required to calibrate the Navigation System.  
• After deleting the calibration data (☞ [46] Reset Calibration) or changing the installation  
angle (☞ [46] Installation Angle), calibration is also required.  
1 Display the map screen.  
2 Display the detail screen and check the  
connections.  
[Hold]  
Calibrating...  
Detail  
GPS Antenna  
Sensor Status  
Learning Lv.  
GPS Antenna  
Speed Signal  
Parking Brake :On  
Direction  
:0  
:OK [5]  
:12.0  
•
OK ] Connection is OK. ([5]: number of the GPS  
satellites whose signal is detected.)  
•
NG ] Antenna is disconnected or short-circuited.  
:Forward  
Speed Signal  
Calibrating...  
Drive the car for a while.  
• If the number increases as you speed up the car,  
connection is OK.  
: Calibration not in  
progress.  
Parking Brake  
Step on the brake pedal, then disengage and engage the  
parking brake repeatedly.  
: Calibration in progress.  
• If Off appears when disengaged and On appears when engaged, connection is OK.  
If the result is not good, check the connection.  
• You can see detailed information on the items of Sensor Status in Information  
Connection. (☞ [43])  
]
3 After confirming all the above connections, drive the car to start  
calibration.  
• This process can take five minutes or more depending on the average speed driven.  
• A certain speed (greater than 25 mi/h (40 km/h)) is required for calibration.  
• Calibration time differs among the cars.  
• During calibrating, you can use the AV functions of the unit (you can listen to the music,  
etc.)  
• If you turn off the ignition switch, calibration is temporarily stopped. When it is turned  
on, calibration will restart.  
Once calibration is finished, the arrowhead icon turns red and the current position information  
appears instead of Calibrating...  
calibration finished.  
.
Learning Lv. (maximum level is  
4
) reaches  
1
after  
Navigation (functions such as guidance or route simulation) cannot be used until calibration  
is complete.  
Initial settings  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic operations  
Reset the unit.  
• Use only when the internal  
system malfunctions.  
To turn on the power  
To change the source  
TUNER  
EXT-IN/iPod/D. PLAYER*  
= (Back to the beginning)  
* You cannot select these sources if they are not  
ready.  
=
SAT*  
=
DISC*  
=
HDD  
Bluetooth Audio*  
=
CD-CH/  
=
To turn off the power  
[Hold]  
To turn off the AV function  
To drop the volume in a moment (ATT)  
[Hold]  
The display switches to the map screen.  
• To activate the AV function, press the  
button briefly.  
ATT indicator flashes.  
To restore the sound, press the same  
button again.  
To adjust the volume  
For navigation operations, ☞ [18]  
For radio operations, ☞ [51]  
For disc/HDD operations, ☞ [59]  
For Bluetooth operations, ☞ [83]  
For other sources, ☞ [79]  
.
.
.
.
.
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To switch between the map screen and AV  
screen  
AV screen  
FM1  
AV screen  
Map screen  
Station name  
92.5 MHz  
You can always switch between the AV  
screen and the map screen.  
This switching does not affect the playback  
sound of the unit (except while recording an  
Audio CD) or the guidance function of the  
Navigation System.  
Distance to the next turn/Turn  
icon  
(While not guided: Speed/  
Direction)  
(
☞ [35])  
Current time  
The built-in clock is automatically adjusted by  
receiving the GPS signals.  
To change the display of AV screens  
Vehicle information  
Video input  
AV screen 1  
AV screen 2  
(☞ [82])  
*
The number and contents of AV screens depend on the source.  
** Appears only when you have selected Videoor Camerafor Video Inputsetting (☞ [93]).  
How to change the control panel angle  
[Hold]  
Tilt 1  
Tilt 2  
Tilt 3  
Tilt 4  
Caution: Do not insert your finger behind the control panel.  
Basic operations 11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu operations  
To call up a menu  
Navigation Menus  
AV Menu  
Map screen  
AV screen  
FM1  
Station name  
92.5 MHz  
Destination Menu ☞ [42]  
AV Menu ☞ [90]  
Destination  
Home  
1/2  
AV Menu  
Setup  
EQ  
1/2  
Return  
Address  
Vicinity  
Previous  
Sound  
Screen Control  
Aspect  
Information Menu ☞ [42]  
Information  
Current Position  
1/2  
To navigate through menus  
Press: Select a menu item  
Traffic  
Turns List  
Trip  
Hold: Skip to the first menu  
item on the next page  
Proceed to the next menu  
Destination  
Back to the previous menu  
Setup Menu ☞ [43]  
Setup  
1/2  
Guidance Voice  
Guidance Options  
Route Options  
Map Color  
To go back to the previous screen  
and adjust other items:  
Map Options  
To cancel menu operations and  
return to the map screen or the AV  
screen:  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu screen  
Current menu title  
Current page number/  
Total page number  
Remaining time until the  
menu screen goes off.  
(Appears only on AV Menu.)  
Display  
1/2  
Language  
Demonstration  
Wall Paper  
Scroll  
Selected menu item  
Button icons indicate the  
available operations in  
each screen.  
Tag Display  
[Off]  
Current setting of the  
selected item.  
On some screens, special operations are indicated  
here with the button to use.  
Menu items  
Ex.:  
Delete  
: Button to press  
•
If items are displayed in gray, you  
cannot use them now.  
: Button to press and hold  
When no icon is displayed here, ENT button  
functions the same as button.  
•
¢
In this manual, operation of selecting a menu item is instructed as in the example below.  
Ex.:  
AV Menu  
]
EQ  
]
Pop  
1 Call up AV Menu  
.
3 Change the setting as you like.  
2 Select EQ in AV Menu  
.
EQ  
1/3  
Flat  
Hard Rock  
R&B  
Pop  
Jazz  
AV Menu  
Setup  
EQ  
1/2  
Sound  
Screen Control  
Aspect  
Exit  
[Flat]  
Now the setting is changed. Press DISP to exit  
from the menu, or BACK to go back to the  
previous menu.  
EQ  
1/3  
Flat  
Hard Rock  
R&B  
Pop  
Jazz  
Exit  
Basic operations 13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Parts index  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
p
q
w e  
On the map screen  
• Turn on the unit.  
On the AV screens  
On menu screens  
• Turn off the unit if pressed and held.  
• Attenuate/restore the sound.  
1
2
/ATT  
In Navigation Menus:  
Switch to the AV  
screen.  
In AV Menu: Change  
the source and switch  
to the AV screen.  
Switch to the AV screen. • Change the source.  
AV/SRC  
Turn off the AV function if pressed and held.  
• Change the map view.  
• Display your current  
Switch to the map screen.  
position after scrolling  
the map.  
3
4
MAP/POS  
+/–  
Adjust the volume.  
In Navigation Menus:  
Switch to other  
menus.  
Call up Destination  
Call up AV Menu. ☞ [90]  
Menu. ☞ [42]  
In AV Menu: Go back  
to the top screen of AV  
Menu or switch to the  
AV screen.  
5
MENU  
Call up Phone Menu if pressed and held. ☞ [83]  
Enter the scaling mode. Change the display. ☞ [11]  
Exit from the menu.  
6
7
/DISP  
Display the Traffic List.  
(Not used)  
TRAFFIC  
☞ [40]  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
On the map screen  
On the AV screens  
On menu screens  
FM/AM: Select preset stations.  
Satellite radio: Select categories.  
DVD: Select titles/groups.  
Files: Select folders.  
5 ∞  
Music server: Select albums.  
iPod/D. player:  
5
Enter the main menu.  
8
/
• Operate the current  
source. ☞ [50]  
• Change the map scale.  
☞ [22]  
• Scroll the map. ☞ [22]  
Select an item.  
∞
Pause/resume playback.  
Bluetooth Audio: Select a device.  
FM/AM: Search for stations.  
Satellite radio: Search for channels.  
Disc, Music server, iPod/D. player,  
Bluetooth Audio: Select tracks/  
chapters.  
9
p
/
• Open/close the control panel.  
• Change the control panel angle if pressed and held.  
• Enter the manual  
scrolling mode.  
☞ [22]  
/BACK  
7/BAND  
Tuner: Select the bands.  
• Repeat the last voice  
Disc: Stop playing.  
guidance if pressed  
Go back to the  
previous screen.  
q
and held during  
guidance. ☞ [33]  
Call up Shortcut Menu.  
Disc: Start playing.  
☞ [25]  
3
Confirm the selection.  
w
e
ENT/  
/
Detach the control panel.  
Remote controller—RM-RK250  
Installing the batteries  
Caution:  
R03(UM-4)/  
AAA(24F)  
• If the range or effectiveness of the remote  
control decreases, replace both batteries.  
• Do not expose batteries to heat or flame.  
The unit is equipped with the steering wheel  
remote control function.  
• See the Installation/Connection Manual  
Before using the remote controller:  
• Aim the remote controller directly at the  
remote sensor on the unit.  
(separate volume) for connection.  
• DO NOT expose the remote sensor to bright  
light (direct sunlight or artificial lighting).  
Remote sensor  
Parts index / Remote controller—RM-RK250 15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operations from the remote controller  
On the map screen  
On the AV screens  
On menu screens  
In Navigation Menus:  
Switch to the AV screen.  
In AV Menu: Change the  
source and switch to the  
AV screen.  
Switch to the AV screen. • Change the source.  
1
AV/OFF  
Turn off the AV function if pressed and held.  
• Change the map view.  
• Display your current  
Switch to the map screen.  
position after scrolling  
the map.  
2
3
MAP/POS  
MENU  
In Navigation Menus:  
Switch to other menus.  
In AV Menu: Go back to the  
top screen of AV Menu or  
switch to the AV screen.  
Call up Destination Menu.  
Call up AV Menu. ☞ [90]  
☞ [42]  
Display the Traffic List.  
(Not used)  
4
5
TRAFFIC  
☞ [40]  
Call up Shortcut Menu.  
Disc: Start playing/pause.  
☞ [25]  
Confirm the selection.  
ENT 6  
FM/AM: Select preset stations.  
Satellite radio: Select categories.  
DVD: Select titles/groups.  
Files: Select folders.  
5 ∞  
Music server: Select albums.  
iPod/D. player:  
5
Enter the main menu.  
6
/
Scroll the map (in eight  
directions).  
Select an item.  
∞
Pause/resume playback.  
Bluetooth Audio: Select a device.  
FM/AM: Search for stations.  
Satellite radio: Search for channels.  
Disc, Music server, iPod/D. player,  
Bluetooth Audio: Select tracks/  
chapters.  
7
/
Call up Dial Menu when a Bluetooth phone is connected. ☞ [86]  
8
9
PHONE  
Repeat the last voice  
Tuner: Select the bands.  
guidance if pressed and  
Disc: Stop playing.  
BACK/BAND  
/7/  
VOL +/–  
Go back to the previous  
screen.  
held during guidance.  
Adjust the volume.  
p
q
Scale the map.  
(Not used)  
(Not used)  
+/–  
Start guidance to a home.  
☞ [24]  
Start guidance to a home.  
☞ [24]  
w
HOME  
Attenuate/restore the sound.  
e
r
ATT  
DISP  
Enter the scaling mode. Change the display. ☞ [11]  
Exit from the menu.  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Only on the AV screens  
• Make selections in disc menus.  
• DISC +/– buttons: Change discs for a CD changer.  
Disc: Confirm the selection.  
t
y
u
i
o
;
ENT  
TOP M  
DVD MENU  
OSD  
RETURN  
DIRECT/  
CLEAR  
DVD/DivX 6: Show the disc menu. ☞ [67]  
VCD with PBC: Resume PBC playback. ☞ [67]  
Display the on-screen bar. ☞ [68]  
VCD with PBC: Return to the previous menu. ☞ [67]  
Disc: To select a chapter/title/group/folder/track directly. ☞ [66]  
a
s
Disc: Change the aspect ratio of the playback pictures.  
ASPECT  
Disc: To select a chapter/title/group/folder/track directly. ☞ [66]  
Tuner: Select a preset station.  
Satellite radio: Input a channel number directly or select a preset channel.  
CD changer: Select a disc.  
Bluetooth phone: Input telephone number. ☞ [87]  
Number  
keys  
d
Disc: Reverse search/forward search. Slow playback if pressed while paused.  
Disc: Select audio languages/audio channels.  
Disc: Select subtitles.  
f
g
h
j
1/¡  
Disc: Select a view angle.  
1
3
2
4
67  
5
8
9
a
d
s
p
e
q
f
w
r
ghj  
These buttons do  
not function at this  
position.  
u
t
o
i
y
;
Remote controller—RM-RK250 17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Navigation System  
20 Safety instructions for  
Navigation System  
22 Basic operations  
24 Registering your home  
To register your home  
To go home  
24  
24  
26 Starting guidance  
Setting a destination using Shortcut Menu  
Setting a destination using Destination Menu  
To go back to where you started  
26  
27  
27  
28 Searching for a place  
By address  
28  
29  
30  
30  
31  
31  
31  
POI near a place/route  
From last destinations  
From the list of POI  
From your favorites  
By telephone number  
By coordinates  
32 How you are guided  
Getting information on your route and places  
Customizing how you are guided  
34  
35  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
36 Arranging your route  
Setting places to stop by  
Saving and loading routes  
Avoiding a congestion ahead  
36  
37  
37  
38 Registering favorite points  
Marking your favorite points  
Editing your favorite points  
38  
38  
40 Traffic information on map  
What is TMC?  
40  
40  
Checking the traffic information  
How traffic information is reflected in navigation 41  
Subscribing to traffic service  
41  
42 Navigation menu items  
Destination Menu  
Information Menu  
Setup Menu  
42  
42  
43  
46 Remote operations  
47 Additional information  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Safety instructions for Navigation System  
• Traffic signs should be observed carefully  
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS  
while driving using the Navigation System.  
Navigation System is only an aid. Driver must  
always decide whether or not to heed the  
information provided. JVC does not accept  
liability for erroneous data provided by the  
Navigation System.  
Use of the Navigation System is only permitted  
if the traffic conditions are suitable and you  
are absolutely sure that no risk, obstruction  
or inconvenience will be incurred to you,  
your passengers or other road users. The  
requirements of the Road Traffic Regulations  
must always be followed. The destination must  
not be entered while driving the car.  
The Navigation System serves solely as an aid  
to navigation. It never releases the drivers from  
their duties to drive carefully and to make  
own judgement in road traffic. Inaccurate  
or incorrect instructions may happen to be  
given due to changing traffic conditions. The  
actual road signs and traffic regulations must  
therefore always be observed. In particular, the  
Navigation System cannot be used as an aid to  
orientation when visibility is poor.  
• Traffic guidance is restricted to  
passenger vehicles only. Special driving  
recommendations and regulations for other  
vehicles (e.g. commercial vehicles) are not  
included.  
• Do not operate the unit while driving.  
Terms of licence  
You are granted a non-exclusive licence to use  
the database for your personal purposes. The  
present licence does not authorise the granting  
of sublicenses.  
Use of the data is only permitted in this  
specific JVC system. It is forbidden to extract  
or make further use of significant parts of  
the database content, or to duplicate, modify,  
adapt, translate, analyse, decompile or reverse-  
engineer any part thereof.  
This Navigation System must only be used for  
its intended purpose. The volume of the car  
radio/Navigation System must be adjusted so  
that external noise is still audible.  
Navigation guidance is performed, based on  
the database, therefore, it may not be applicable  
to the current situation because of changes in  
traffic conditions (e.g. changes in tollroads,  
principal roads, one-way traffic, or other traffic  
regulations). In this case, observe the current  
traffic signs or regulations.  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WARNING:  
When replacing/rotating the tires:  
It is required to clear all the accumulated  
learning data which is important for accurate  
navigation. To clear the data, perform Reset  
Calibration on page 46.  
Road traffic regulations always take priority  
when a vehicle is being driven in traffic.  
Navigation System is only an aid. Errors may  
occur in individual data items/entries. At all  
times, the driver must decide whether or not to  
heed the information provided.  
JVC does not accept liability for erroneous data  
provided by the Navigation System.  
On map updating  
If “Your map data is more than one year old  
and updates may be available.” appears on the  
monitor, visit <http://www.jvc-exad.com>.  
For details about updating your unit, visit  
<http://www.jvc-exad.com>.  
© 2006 NAVTEQ All rights reserved.  
Safety instructions for Navigation System 21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic operations  
Current position mode  
—The map scrolls automatically so that your position is always at the center of the map.  
Scale  
Show traffic information. (☞ [40]  
)
Scale the map.  
Switch to the AV screen.  
Adjust the volume.  
Your position  
Call up a menu screen.  
Current time  
Current street name  
Call up Shortcut Menu.  
Change the map view. (  
next page)/Display your  
current position.  
☞
Scroll the map.  
Operate the current AV source. (☞ [50]  
)
To scroll the map  
To change the map scale  
1
1
2
Scale bar  
Zoom in  
2
Zoom in rapidly  
Zoom out  
Zoom out rapidly  
The map scrolls in eight directions.  
• Press and hold the button to keep  
scrolling the map.  
To display your current position  
Direction and  
distance from your  
current position  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To change the map view  
To call up menus  
Navigation Menus  
The map view changes as follows:  
Each time you press the button, the menu  
switches as follows:  
Heading Up  
=
3D Map  
=
North Up  
(Map screen)  
Heading Up  
The map rotates so that you are always  
displayed heading “upwards.” The direction  
is displayed with a compass icon  
=
=
=
=
Destination Menu  
Information Menu  
Setup Menu  
.
(Back to the map screen)  
Menu operations ☞ [13]  
Menu items ☞ [42 – 46]  
Shortcut Menu  
3D Map  
The map is displayed in “heading up” and in  
Shortcut Menu appears. ☞ [25]  
a three-dimensional view. The direction is  
displayed with a compass icon  
.
Icons on the map  
Favorite points (☞ [38 – 39]  
)
POI (Point Of Interest) (☞ [30, 49]  
)
North Up  
The map view is oriented with north  
Traffic (☞ [40, 50]  
)
“upwards,” like usual paper maps. The  
direction you are heading to is displayed at  
the upper right corner of the screen with an  
• Favorite icons are displayed on the map when  
a group is selected in the Favorite Icon  
setting (☞ [45]) and the map scale is between  
100 ft (30 m) and 1.2 mile (2.0 km).  
icon such as  
.
• POI icons are displayed on the map when a  
group is selected in the POI Icon setting (☞  
[45]) and the map scale is 100 ft (30 m) or  
160 ft (50 m).  
• Traffic icons are displayed on the map when  
the Traffic Display setting is activated  
(☞ [45]) and the map scale is between 100 ft  
(30 m) and 1.2 mile (2.0 km).  
You can also change the map view through  
Setup Menu ] Map Options  
]
Map  
View (☞ [45]).  
Basic operations 23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Registering your home  
To register your home  
To go home (Home)  
Register your home or your office, wherever  
you go often, as Home, so that you can easily set  
that place as destination.  
When you have registered your home, you can  
easily get guided to home.  
• You can register homes only after calibration  
is finished. (☞ [9])  
While not guided...  
1 Call up Shortcut Menu.  
1 If you are at home now, check  
that your home is displayed at  
the center of the map.  
• Adjust the position by scrolling the map if  
necessary.  
2 Call up Shortcut Menu.  
2 Select [Go Home]  
to start  
guidance.  
• If you have registered several homes,  
select the one you want to go to from a  
list.  
On the remote:  
3 Select [Add to Favorite]  
.
The home is marked with  
icon.  
You can also be guided to home through  
Destination Menu ] Home  
.
To cancel guidance  
4 Select [Set Home]  
.
1 Call up Shortcut Menu.  
2 Select [Cancel Guidance]  
The home is marked with  
icon.  
• The icon may not appear depending on  
the map scale and your Favorite Icon  
setting. (☞ [45])  
.
• You can register several places as Home by  
registering the places as favorite points and  
setting their group to Home. (☞ [38, 39])  
You can also cancel guidance through  
Destination Menu ] Cancel Guide  
.
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
What is Shortcut Menu?  
On the map screen, you can call up Shortcut Menu by pressing ENT. Shortcut Menu is a gateway  
to various operations.  
Shortcut Menu  
While not guided  
Map screen  
While guided  
To select an icon, press ENT or one of the four  
keys on the right circle button corresponding  
to the icon.  
Icon  
Name  
View  
Function  
Button  
Show information on this place. ☞ [35]  
Information  
Start guidance to a home. ☞ [24] (Not  
Go Home  
Set Home  
selectable if no home is registered.)  
Register this place as home. ☞ [24] (Appears  
when no home is registered and a favorite  
icon is selected.)  
Cancel  
Guidance  
Cancel the guidance. ☞ [24]  
Add to Favorite Add this place to your favorite points. ☞ [38]  
Edit this favorite point. ☞ [39] (Appears  
Edit Favorite  
only when a favorite icon is selected. Not  
selectable while driving.)  
Vicinity  
Go Here  
Search for POI around this place. ☞ [29]  
Start guidance to this place. ☞ [26]  
Recalculate the route to stop by this place. ☞  
[36] (Appears only while guided.)  
Add to Via  
Point  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals SearcRheAgnidstDeorwinngloyaod.ur home 25  
Starting guidance  
• You can set destinations only after calibration is finished. (☞ [9])  
Setting a destination using Shortcut Menu  
Scroll the map to display the destination at the center of the  
map.  
Call up Shortcut Menu.  
Select [Go Here]  
to start guidance.  
The System starts calculating the route to the selected destination, and guidance starts.  
To cancel guidance  
You can also cancel guidance through  
Destination Menu ] Cancel Guide  
.
1 Call up Shortcut Menu.  
2 Select [Cancel Guidance]  
.
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting a destination using Destination Menu  
Call up Destination Menu.  
Select one of the methods to search for your destination.  
Destination  
Home*  
1/2  
Destination  
POI  
2/2  
☞ [24]  
☞ [30]  
☞ [31]  
☞ [31]  
☞ [31]  
☞ [below]  
☞ [28]  
Return**  
Address  
Vicinity  
Favorite  
Telephone  
Coordinates  
Route Edit  
☞ [29]  
☞ [30]  
Previous  
*
During guidance, Cancel Guideappears.  
** During guidance, Avoid Sectionappears.  
• You cannot select the items when they are gray.  
To see the search result on  
map  
The information on the search result appears.  
0.7 mi  
Direction and distance from  
your current position  
Select [Go Here]  
to start guidance.  
The System starts calculating the route to the selected destination, and guidance starts.  
To go back to where you started (Return  
)
You can go back to the start point of the last guidance.  
1 Call up Destination Menu.  
2
Destination  
Return  
]
Starting guidance 27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Searching for a place  
To input names, addresses, or numbers  
3 Select the item you want from the  
list.  
Ex. Input screen for a city name  
BS  
More  
By address (Address)  
Enter a space Display other  
1 Call up Destination Menu.  
keyboards*  
Delete the last character  
Display the list of  
matches  
You can also change the keyboard by pressing  
DISP. For available charactears, ☞ [105].  
2
Destination  
Address  
*
]
Address  
New York  
** Buttons vary depending on the input item.  
City  
Street  
1 Enter characters.  
Move the cursor on the  
keyboard  
3 Input the state name.  
• Input the city name if a state is already  
selected.  
Enter the selected character  
- Input State Name -  
• Available characters are automatically  
narrowed down as the System searches its  
database for matches.  
2 Display the list of matches.  
BS  
All  
Displays the list of all the states.  
• This button is available when the matches  
are narrowed down to 100 or less.  
• You can also display the list of matches by  
pressing and holding ENT.  
4 Input the city name.  
- Input City Name -  
• When the matches are narrowed down to  
5 or less, the list appears automatically.  
BS  
More Street  
Select this to search by street  
name.  
• Inputting characters ☞ [left column]  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
While guided, select the area to search if  
necessary.  
5 Input the street name.  
• You can also select the center of the city.  
(The list of city centers may appear.) You  
do not have to input the house number in  
this case.  
[Hold]  
• Select the area to search from the list if  
Select Area  
Select Area is displayed.  
Local Area  
Near Destination  
Along Route  
6 Input the house number.  
• You can also select the entire street or an  
intersection on the street.  
• If no data of house number for the  
selected street is available in the database,  
this step is skipped.  
Local Area: within 1.2 mi (2 km) of  
your current position. If no POI is  
found in this area, the System expands  
the area to search.  
Near Destination: within 1.2 mi (2 km)  
of the destination. If no POI is found in  
this area, the System expands the area  
to search.  
Along Route: 30 mi (50 km) along the  
route you are taking.  
POI near a place/route (Vicinity  
)
You can search for a POI around the place  
where you are now. While guided, you can also  
search for a POI near the destination or along  
the route.  
3 Select a category (then a sub  
1 Call up Destination Menu.  
category if any) of the POI.  
Select Category  
All Categories  
Gas station  
Hotel  
1/3  
2
Destination  
Vicinity  
]
Parking  
Select Category  
All Categories  
Gas station  
Hotel  
1/3  
Restaurant  
Area: Local  
Change  
The result is listed in the order of distance  
from the place where you are.  
Parking  
Restaurant  
Area: Local  
Change  
4 Select a POI from the list.  
You can search for a POI around a place  
on the map through Shortcut Menu ]  
[Vicinity]  
above after selecting [Vicinity]  
. Follow steps 3 and 4  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search SAenadrDcohwinngloafod.r a place 29  
From last destinations (Previous  
)
From the list of POI (POI)  
You can select a place from the last 50  
destinations and via points.  
The System has a huge database of POI (Point  
Of Interest), such as restaurants, gas stations,  
hospitals, etc.  
1 Call up Destination Menu.  
1 Call up Destination Menu.  
2
Destination  
2
Destination  
POI  
]Previous  
The list of previous destinations/via points  
is displayed.  
]
POI  
New York  
City  
Category  
Name  
3 Select a place from the list.  
To delete items in the list of previous  
destinations/via points  
3 Input the state name.  
1 After step 2 above...  
• Input the city name if a state is already  
selected.  
[Hold]  
4 Input the city name.  
2 Check the boxes of the items you  
• Inputting characters ☞ [28]  
want to delete.  
5 Select a method to search for a  
POI with.  
You can search for a POI in two ways:  
By category and name  
Directly by name  
• Checkbox operations ☞ [105]  
POI  
New York  
New York(New York)  
Category  
Name  
3
[Hold]  
A confirmation message appears. Press  
ENT to confirm the operation. Press BACK  
to cancel.  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
By category and name  
By telephone number (Telephone  
)
1 Select a category (then a sub  
1 Call up Destination Menu.  
category if any) of the POI.  
2 Input the name of the POI you are  
looking for.  
2
Destination  
Telephone  
]
• Inputting characters ☞ [28]  
3 Select a POI from the list.  
3 Select a state.  
• Input the telephone number if a state is  
already selected.  
Directly by name  
1 Input the name of the POI you are  
4 Input the telephone number.  
looking for.  
- Input Phone Number -  
• Inputting characters ☞ [28]  
2 Select a POI from the list.  
Delete the last  
BS  
character  
Display the list of matches  
• Inputting characters ☞ [28]  
From your favorites (Favorite  
)
5 Select a POI from the list.  
• Registering your favorite points ☞ [38].  
1 Call up Destination Menu.  
By coordinates (Coordinate  
)
2
Destination  
Favorite  
]
1 Call up Destination Menu.  
Select Group  
Home  
1/2  
3
12  
6
26  
15  
Friend  
2
Destination  
Coordinates  
Relative  
Business  
Visit  
]
3 Input the latitude and the  
Delete  
longitude.  
3 Select a group.  
4 Select a favorite point from the  
Moves the cursor.  
To correct a  
list.  
misentry, move  
the cursor and  
enter the number  
South  
Detail  
again.  
Switches South and North  
for latitude.  
4 Select Detail when finished.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search SAenadrDcohwinngloafod.r a place 31  
How you are guided  
Destination found  
Route calculation  
Calculating...  
To cancel calculation, press BACK.  
0.7 mi  
Screen while guided  
Estimated time of  
arrival and distance  
to the destination/  
next via point  
Route to take  
Current time  
Next turn/  
Distance to the  
next turn  
Name of the next street  
To cancel guidance  
You can also cancel guidance through  
Destination Menu ] Cancel Guide  
.
1 Call up Shortcut Menu.  
To adjust the volume of the voice guidance  
☞ [43] Volume  
2 Select [Cancel Guidance]  
.
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Guidance at turns  
When you approach a turn, the System guides you with voice guidance and indications on the  
screen.  
• Guidance voice comes out only through the front speakers (and the front line out on the rear).  
Guidance point  
“In  
1
0.2 mile, make  
a right turn.”  
When you do not  
have to make a  
turn, the System  
gives no guidance.  
Following turn (if any)  
“In  
2
0.1 mile, make  
a right turn.”  
Indicate the distance to the next turn  
3
“Make a right  
turn.”  
• While the progress bar to the turn is  
displayed, following operations are not  
available:  
– to call up Shortcut Menu.  
– to call up the Traffic List by pressing  
TRAFFIC button.  
– to see the trip screen and turns list by  
pressing TRAFFIC button.  
You can remove the progress bar by  
pressing MAP.  
What if I miss a turn?  
Don’t worry. The System  
calculates a new route  
quickly and guides you  
to the destination.  
To repeat the last voice guidance  
[Hold]  
How you are guided 33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting information on your route and places  
• You can also view the trip through  
To see the itinerary and the turns list  
Information Menu ] Trip  
.
Map screen  
• You can also view the turns list through  
Information Menu ] Turns List  
.
[Hold]  
Trip information  
Trip  
Trip  
Distance Driven  
8.1mi  
0:12  
Time Driven  
Average speed  
40mph  
Trip  
Info  
Turn on map  
Turns list  
Turns List  
500 ft A124  
2 mi A2120  
1/5  
2.5mi xx street  
6 mi Z square  
7 mi B12  
Prev.  
Next  
Press  
∞
/
5
to see the next/previous turn.  
To get information on the destination and via points  
1 Call up Information Menu.  
[twice]  
2
Information  
Destination  
]
3 Select the destination or a via point.  
Remaining 0.7mi  
Arrival 1:54PM  
1:54 PM 0.7 mi  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To check the estimated arrival time and  
distance to the next via point  
To see how your trip will go  
Information Menu ] Simulation  
appears on the display.  
[Hold]  
To cancel simulation and resume guidance,  
press MENU, then DISP.  
disappears.  
Each time you press and hold the button,  
the information on the upper left corner  
alternates between that of the next via point  
and of the final destination.  
Customizing how you are guided  
To customize the guidance and display on the  
map screen  
☞ [43] Guidance View  
To see information on a place  
• This operation is always possible regardless of  
whether you are guided or not.  
To customize how the map scale changes  
1 Display where you want to  
know of at the center of the  
map.  
☞ [45] Auto Zoom  
To customize the voice guidance on an AV  
screen  
☞ [44] Interruption  
2 Call up Shortcut Menu.  
To customize the mixing of audio sound and  
voice guidance  
☞ [43] Audio Mixing  
The guidance continues even when you  
switch the display to an AV screen. Guidance  
information is displayed on the lower-right  
corner of the AV screen.  
3 Select [View Information]  
.
FM1  
0.7 mi  
Station name  
92.5 MHz  
If a telephone number is available, you can  
call to the number through JVC’s Bluetooth  
adapter. ☞ [86]  
Distance to the next turn/Turn icon  
(While not guided: Speed/Direction)  
You can also get information on your current  
position through Information Menu ]  
Current Position  
.
How you are guided 35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Arranging your route  
Setting places to stop by  
3 Select the via point you want to  
move.  
After selecting your destination, you can select  
up to nine places (“via points”) to stop by.  
Select Point  
1/2  
1
Station  
Forest Inn  
Intr’l Airport  
Car Dealer  
2
To add via points  
After guidance has started...  
3
4
5
Michael  
1 Select a place you want to stop  
by.  
Select  
4 Move the selected via point in  
• Searching for a place ☞ [27]  
the list.  
Move Point  
1/2  
1
Station  
Forest Inn  
Car Dealer  
Michael  
2
4
5
3
Intr’l Airport  
0.7 mi  
Set  
Delete  
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to move  
2 Select [Add to Via Point]  
.
other via points.  
6 Finish the rearrangement.  
The System starts calculating the new route,  
and guidance starts.  
• You can also use MENU, DISP,  
MAP, or  
.
You can also set via points on the map  
through Shortcut Menu ] [Add to Via  
A confirmation message appears. Press ENT  
to confirm the operation. Press BACK to  
cancel.  
Point]  
.
The System starts calculating the new route,  
and guidance starts.  
• No confirmation message appears if the  
via points are not changed.  
To delete a via point  
Press and hold ENT in step 4.  
A confirmation message appears. Press ENT  
to confirm the operation. Press BACK to  
cancel.  
To rearrange the sequence of via points  
1 Call up Destination Menu.  
2
Destination  
Route Edit  
Edit  
]
For other options for routing ☞ [44] Route  
Options  
]
The list of via points appears.  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To delete saved routes  
Saving and loading routes  
1 Call up Destination Menu.  
You can save up to 50 combinations of  
destination and via points. You can easily call  
up your usual route without the trouble of  
setting destinations.  
2
Destination  
Route Edit  
Delete  
• Each route can contain up to nine via points.  
]
To save a route  
]
1 Select your destination (and via  
points if necessary), and start  
guidance.  
3 Check the boxes at the head of  
the routes you want to delete.  
• Checkbox operations ☞ [105]  
2 Call up Destination Menu.  
3
Destination  
Route Edit  
Save  
]
4 Delete the selected routes.  
]
4 Name the route you are saving.  
[Hold]  
• Inputting characters ☞ [105]  
A confirmation message appears. Press ENT  
to confirm the operation. Press BACK to  
cancel.  
5 Select Store  
.
A confirmation message appears. Press ENT  
to confirm the operation. Press BACK to  
cancel.  
Avoiding a congestion ahead  
To load a saved route  
If you realize a congestion exists ahead...  
1 Call up Destination Menu.  
While being guided...  
1 Call up Destination Menu.  
2
Destination  
Route Edit  
Load  
]
2
Destination  
Avoid Section  
]
]
3 Select the route you want to  
3 Select the distance to avoid.  
take.  
Select Distance  
Load  
1mi  
3mi  
5mi  
Route A  
Route B  
Route C  
Route D  
10mi  
15mi  
Start  
A confirmation message appears. Press ENT  
to confirm the operation. Press BACK to  
cancel.  
A confirmation message appears. Press ENT  
to confirm the operation. Press BACK to  
cancel.  
The route is calculated, and guidance starts.  
A detour is calculated, and guidance starts.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals SearchAArnrdaDnogwinnlgoaydo.ur route 37  
Registering favorite points  
Just like you mark your friend’s house or a nice  
Chinese restaurant on your map book, you can  
register your favorite points in the system.  
To proceed to edit the registered favorite  
point, select [Edit Favorite]  
step 4.  
after  
Marking your favorite points  
You can open the edit screen in step 3 of  
• You can register 300 favorite points.  
• You can register favorite points only when  
the map scale is 1.2 mile (2.0 km) or more  
detailed.  
“Editing your favorite points.”  
Editing your favorite points  
1 Display the place you want to  
save as favorite at the center of  
the map.  
1 Call up Destination Menu.  
• Searching for a place ☞ [27]  
2 Call up Shortcut Menu.  
2
Destination  
Favorite  
]
Select Group  
Home  
1/2  
2
12  
Friend  
Relative  
Business  
Visit  
5
17  
24  
Delete  
3 Select [Add to Favorite]  
.
3 Select a group, then a favorite  
point to edit.  
The favorite point is registered in the group  
of Other and marked with icon.  
• The icon may not appear depending on  
the map scale and your Favorite Icon  
setting. (☞ [45])  
[Hold]  
Edit Favorite  
Input Name  
Other  
• To be guided to a favorite point ☞ [31]  
Input Address  
Input Phone Number  
Sound Off  
Delete  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To delete a favorite point  
Press and hold ENT after step 3 of “Editing  
your favorite points.”  
4 Select the item you want to edit.  
A confirmation message appears. Press ENT  
to confirm the operation. Press BACK to  
cancel.  
The name of the favorite point.  
See the table on the right for the  
available ten groups.  
Categorize the favorite points so  
that you can find them easily.  
The address of the favorite  
point.  
If you have connected  
KS-BTA200, you can call to this  
number. ☞ [86]  
Sound Off, Alarm, Bell,  
Siren  
To delete all the favorite points in a group  
Name  
Group  
1 Press and hold ENT after step 2 of  
“Editing your favorite points.”  
2 Select the groups to delete.  
Address  
Select Group  
Home  
1/2  
2
12  
5
17  
24  
Friend  
Telephone  
number  
Relative  
Business  
Visit  
Check  
Delete  
Sound  
• Checkbox operations ☞ [105]  
You can assign a sound to  
each favorite point. You hear  
the assigned sound when you  
come close (about within 660 ft  
(200 m)) to the favorite point.  
3 Delete the selected groups.  
[Hold]  
A confirmation message appears. Press ENT  
to confirm the operation. Press BACK to  
cancel.  
5 Edit the item.  
• Inputting characters ☞ [105]  
Icons and groups for favorite points  
Home  
Shopping  
Friend  
Relative  
Business  
Visit  
Food  
Caution  
Sightseeing  
Other  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals SReaergcihstAenrdinDgowfanvlooardit.e points 39  
Traffic information on map  
What is TMC?  
Checking the traffic information  
Traffic Message Channel (TMC) is a technology  
for delivering real-time traffic information to  
drivers. The traffic information sent by an FM  
radio station are received and analyzed by the  
System. The System can inform you of where  
congestion exists, and how you can detour it.  
• You do not have to tune in to a special radio  
station to receive the traffic information.  
• When you subscribe to the traffic service or  
giving it a tryout, the antenna of your car  
automatically extends when you turn on the  
ignition switch.  
Traffic  
1/2  
Eastbound  
Eastbound  
Northbound  
Southbound  
Southbound  
While guided, select the area to see the  
information of.  
Along Route or All Information  
.
How to get traffic information  
Traffic information is supplied from NAVTEQ  
Traffic RDS. You need to subscribe to the  
service. (☞ next page)  
To see detailed information  
Select an item on the list and press ¢.  
As the traffic announcements are transmitted  
by FM radio stations, JVC cannot assume  
responsibility for the completeness or  
accuracy of the announcements.  
Traffic  
Traffic information on the map  
Congestion  
Traffic icon  
You can also call up the Traffic List through  
Information Menu ] Traffic  
.
You can also see detailed information of a  
traffic icon on the map in the following way:  
Display a traffic icon at the center of the map  
] Shortcut Menu ] [View Information]  
• List of traffic icons ☞ [50]  
• Traffic icons and congestion lines are  
displayed on the map when the Traffic  
Display setting is activated (☞ [45]).  
• Traffic icons are displayed on the map  
when its scale is between 100 ft (30 m)  
and 1.2 mile (2.0 km).  
• Congestion lines are displayed on the map  
when its scale is between 100 ft (30 m)  
and 3.0 mile (5.0 km).  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
How traffic information is reflected in  
navigation  
3
If Bypass Traffic is set to Manual Reroute  
(☞ [44]), [Reroute] appears on the screen when  
the traffic service informs the System of traffic  
accidents or congestion ahead on your route.  
To subscribe to the service  
• Start a free trial before subscribing to the  
service.  
1 Call up Setup Menu.  
[Three times]  
2
Setup  
System Setting  
Reroute  
]
]
Traffic Subscription  
To check the information and decide whether  
to calculate a detour  
Traffic Subscription  
Serial No.:  
Write down the  
serial number.  
1234567890  
Expiration date:  
10/04/2008 [Free]  
[Hold]  
Subscribe  
If Bypass Traffic is set to Auto Reroute  
,
3 Activate your subscription.  
the System automatically calculates a new route  
when the traffic service informs of an obstacle  
on your route.  
Access <http://www.jvc-exad.com> on the  
Internet and get your PIN code.  
• The serial number written down in step 2  
If Bypass Traffic is set to Off, the System  
does not take traffic information into account in  
calculating a route.  
is required to get the PIN code.  
• Keep your PIN code for future reference.  
PIN code:  
Subscribing to traffic service  
4
Setup  
System Setting  
Traffic Subscription  
]
To start a free trial  
This unit includes a three-month free trial of  
the traffic service.  
]
5 Call up the registration screen.  
1 Call up Setup Menu.  
[Three times]  
6 Input the PIN code.  
2
Setup  
System Setting  
]
7 Select Finish.  
]
Traffic Subscription  
•
PIN code error. appears if you enter a  
wrong PIN code. Check your PIN code  
and input correct one.  
Traffic Subscription  
Start free trial for 3 months.  
Press ENT to start.  
Traffic information on map 41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
☞ [12] for the detailed Menu operations.  
Navigation menu items  
Destination Menu  
Menu items  
Start guidance to a home. (Appears only while not guided.) ☞ [24]  
Cancels the guidance. (Appears only while guided.) ☞ [24, 26, 32]  
Home  
Cancel Guide  
Starts guidance to the place where you have started your last guidance.  
(Appears only while not guided.) ☞ [27]  
Return  
Calculate a new route avoiding the selected distance ahead. (Appears only  
while guided.) ☞ [37]  
Avoid Section  
1mi  
,
3mi  
,
5mi  
,
10mi  
,
15mi (or 1km  
,
3km  
,
5km  
,
10km  
,
15km *1  
)
Address  
Vicinity  
Previous  
POI  
Search for a place using the database in the System. ☞ [27]  
Favorite  
Telephone  
Coordinates  
• Arrange the order of via points.  
Route Edit  
• Save, load or delete routes. ☞ [36]  
Edit Save, Load, Delete  
,
*1 Depends on your setting of Measuring Units(☞ [46]).  
Information Menu  
Menu items  
You can see the information on your current position.  
State, City, Street, Latitude, Longitude  
Current Position  
You can check the traffic information. ☞ [40]  
Traffic  
Along Route*1, All Information  
Turns List*1  
Trip*1  
Destination*1  
You can see the list of turns on your route. ☞ [34]  
You can see the information on your route. ☞ [34]  
You can see the list of via points and the destination. ☞ [34]  
You can see the status of GPS reception.  
GPS  
*1 Selectable only while guided.  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Information Menu (continued)  
Menu items  
You can check the connection status.  
Learning Lv., Angle, GPS Antenna, Gyro, Speed Signal,  
Parking Brake, Reverse Signal, Illumination, Tel. Muting  
Connection  
You can check the model name, the version of the unit, and the version of  
the map database.  
Version  
Once the route is determined, you can simulate it on the map. ☞ [35]  
Simulation  
Setup Menu  
Menu items  
Selectable settings  
(Initial setting)  
Gender  
Volume  
Female, Male  
Adjust the volume of the voice guidance.  
Off  
,
01 to 50 (25)  
• Press ENT to listen to a sample voice at the selected volume.  
Select the guidance output channel.  
Output Channel  
Audio Mixing  
L-ch Only, R-ch Only, L-ch & R-ch  
You can turn down the volume of the AV source while voice  
guidance is produced.  
Muting: The AV source sound does not come out.  
Attenuation: The AV source sound is lowered.  
Normal: The AV source sound is not changed.  
Select the items to be displayed at turns.  
Guidance View  
• Next turn icon: Big  
Auto Magnification  
:
• Following turn icon: On  
• Progress bar to the turn: On  
• Next turn icon: Big  
Symbolic View  
:
• Following turn icon: Off  
• Progress bar to the turn: Off  
• Next turn icon: Small  
Simple View  
:
• Following turn icon: Off  
• Progress bar to the turn: Off  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals SearNchaAvnigdaDtoiownnlmoaedn. u items 43  
Setup Menu (continued)  
Menu items  
Selectable settings  
(Initial setting)  
Select the voice guidance output on an AV screen.  
• A small icon of the next turn is always displayed at the lower-  
right corner of the AV screen while guided, regardless of this  
setting. If you want to see the turn on map, press MAP to switch  
to the map screen.  
Interruption  
Off  
,
On  
Bypass Traffic  
Voice Cruise  
Off  
,
Auto Reroute Manual Reroute ☞ [41]  
,
When this function is activated, the System automatically increases  
the guidance volume level as the car speeds up.  
To obtain stronger effect, set the level to higher numbers.  
Off  
,
01 to 10 (05)  
Select the type of attention tone, which comes out before voice  
guidance.  
Attention Tone  
Priority  
Off, Attention 1, Attention 2, Attention 3  
Fastest: The System calculates the shortest journey time.  
Shortest: The System calculates the shortest route to the  
destination.  
• This setting is effective next time the System calculates a route.  
Check the boxes at the head of the options you want to be effective.  
• This setting is effective next time the System calculates a route.  
Avoid Highway  
Avoid Ferry  
Avoid Toll Road  
Day Color  
Select the color for the day screen.  
Type 1, Type 2, Type 3  
Select the color for the route.  
Route Color  
Night Mode  
Color 1, Color 2, Color 3  
Select the condition to switch the display to the night screen.  
Off: Cancels.  
Auto: Switches to the night screen when you turn on the  
headlights.  
Time: Switches to the day/night screen at set times.  
• When you choose Time, set when to switch the display color on  
the following screen.  
Brightness*1  
Set the brightness of the screen.  
–15 to +15 (00)  
*1 This setting is shared with the Screen Controlsetting in AV Menu. (☞ [96]  
)
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup Menu (continued)  
Menu items  
Map View  
Auto Zoom  
Selectable settings  
North Up Heading Up  
(Initial setting)  
,
,
3D Map ☞ [23]  
Select how the zoom scale changes.  
Off: (Effective only while guided) Zoom into 100 ft (30 m) scale  
at turns if Guidance View is set to Auto Magnification. If  
else, the scale does not change at turns.  
Fit For Guidance: (Effective only while guided) When you  
approach turns, the scale changes gradually so that your current  
position and the turn is always displayed on the map at the same  
time.  
Fit For Speed: The scale changes gradually in accordance with  
the speed of your car; as you slow down, the map is zoomed in.  
Check the box at the head of each POI category to display its icons  
on the map.  
POI Icon  
Check the box at the head of each favorite group to display its icons  
on the map.  
Favorite Icon  
Car Tracks*2  
Display: Check the box to display the tracks of your car on the  
map.  
Record*3: Check the box to record the track of your car.  
Delete: Deletes the recorded tracks.  
Check the box to display the current/next street name on the  
monitor.  
Street Name  
Check the box to display the one-way icon on the map.  
Check the box to display the traffic icons on the map.  
One-Way  
Traffic Display  
*2 When you want the track of the current drive displayed, you need to check both Displayand Record.  
*3 The recorded tracks are deleted from old ones when the internal memory gets full.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals SearNchaAvnigdaDtoiownnlmoaedn. u items 45  
Setup Menu (continued)  
Menu items  
Selectable settings  
(Initial setting)  
Select the angle of the unit measured by the supplied gauge. (See  
also the Installation/Connection Manual.)  
Installation  
Angle  
1
2
3
4
: –5.0° to 1.0°  
: 1.0° to 6.0°  
: 6.0° to 14.0°  
: 14.0° to 32.0°  
• It is not recommended to install the main unit at an angle of  
more than 30˚; otherwise, the malfunction may result.  
Select whether to use WAAS and EGNOS to increase the accuracy  
WAAS/EGNOS  
of positioning.  
Off: Cancels.  
On: Activates.  
Language*4  
Select the language used for on-screen information and voice  
guidance.  
English US, Español, Français  
Reset the calibration data in the following cases:  
• When you reinstall the unit to another car.  
• When you change Installation Angle.(☞ above)  
• When you replace or rotate the tires.  
Reset Calibration  
Once this is carried out, the learning data is cleared. Calibration  
starts when you exit from the menu. (☞ [9])  
Subscribe to traffic services. ☞ [41]  
Traffic  
Subscription  
Select the measuring units for distance.  
Measuring Units  
Coordinates  
km / m mi / ft  
,
Select the measuring units for coordinate degrees.  
Deg / Min / Sec Deg / Milli / Micro  
,
If you find your current position displayed on a wrong place on the  
map, use this setting to correct your position.  
Adjust the position with 4¢5∞, then the direction with 5∞.  
Car Position  
*4 This setting is shared with the Languagesetting in AV Menu (☞ [90]).  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
• POI search in Along Route is canceled if the  
guidance finishes or if rerouting starts before  
the search completes.  
Initial settings  
• If you select On for Store Display Mode  
the system starts up in demonstration mode  
for shops, and the initial setup screen appears  
every time you turn on the unit after turning  
off and on the ignition switch. Select Off to  
obtain the full performance from the unit.  
,
By coordinates  
• If the entered position is out of the database,  
Out of the map coverage. appears on the  
display. Enter again.  
Basic navigation procedure  
Basic operations  
• When you reach the area approximately  
within 100 ft (30 m) around the destination/  
via point, the Navigation System considers  
that you have reached your destination/via  
point.  
• In a small scale, the map scrolling may stop  
when the map view approaches the border  
of the map coverage. Scrolling resumes in a  
larger scale when you keep scrolling the map.  
Searching for a place  
How you are guided  
• While driving at a speed greater than  
6 mi/h (10 km/h), following operations are  
prohibited:  
• If GPS signal reception is poor, navigation  
guidance may not be correct.  
• The System may not receive GPS signals in  
the following places...  
– To enter a destination.  
– To operate items in Setup Menu except  
for the ones in Guidance Voice  
– in a tunnel or parking lot in the building  
– under an overhead road  
– in a place surrounded by high buildings or  
by closely standing trees.  
(
Gender  
and Audio Mixing).  
,
Volume, Output Channel,  
If you try to do these operations, the following  
screen appears, and you cannot continue the  
operation.  
• The position of your car may not be detected  
correctly in the following cases...  
– when running on a road close to the other  
one (e.g. a highway and ordinary road  
running in parallel)  
You cannot operate while  
driving. Operate again  
after stopping.  
– when turning at an almost straight fork in  
the road  
– when running on a gridiron road  
– after taking a ferry, etc.  
– when running on a steep mountain road  
– when running on a spiral road  
– when turning left or right after running  
on a long straight road  
– when running in a zigzag line on a broad  
road  
– when starting your car shortly after  
starting the engine  
• The search result is displayed in North Up  
view regardless of your map view setting.  
• The name you entered to search for a POI  
may be different from the name of the search  
result.  
From the list of POI  
• If no POI data exists for the selected city, POI  
not found. appears on the display. Press  
BACK until the city entry menu appears, then  
re-enter another city.  
POI around a place/route  
– when running for the first time after  
installing the unit  
– when changing tires or attaching chains  
on the tires  
• If no POI data exists for the selected area, POI  
not found. appears on the display. Press  
BACK until the main categories list appears.  
Additional information 47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
– when tire slip occurs continuously and  
frequently  
– after running on areas other than a road  
(e.g. private lands or parking lots)  
– after running in underground or tower  
type parking lots  
– after rotating your car on a turntable  
– after frequent stops and starts in a  
congestion  
– when the accuracy of GPS is deteriorated  
intentionally  
– when running on a road constructed  
recently  
Arranging your route  
• Highways are always used to calculate the  
route if the distance to the destination is over  
120 mi (200 km).  
• If the destination cannot be reached without  
using highways or ferries, they are used to  
calculate the route without respect to the  
Route Options settings.  
• If the destination cannot be reached without  
using tollroads, activating Avoid Toll Road  
in Route Options causes an error in route  
calculation. Deactivate Avoid Toll Road  
and try again.  
• A detour may not be calculated with Avoid  
• The route calculated by the System is one of  
the possible routes to your destination. The  
route is not always the most appropriate one.  
• If a street name is not available in the  
database, Unnamed appears in place of the  
street name.  
• If no-exit roads (only entering the rotary from  
the roads is allowed) exist on the rotary, the  
no-exit roads can neither be shown in the  
route guidance on the display nor counted in  
the route guidance voice message.  
• The following phenomena may occur even if  
the System is working correctly...  
– It may guide to a closed road or to a route  
requiring U-turn.  
Section depending on the route.  
Traffic information on map  
• When Bypass Traffic is set to Manual  
Reroute, the rerouting may be canceled  
while you are checking due to a change  
of traffic condition. The rerouting is also  
canceled if you do not confirm the rerouting  
in one minute.  
• Since 30 days before the expiration date of  
your traffic subscription or free trial, The  
TMC license will expire on xx/xx/  
xxxx. appears on the display at turning on  
the unit.  
• For 30 days after your traffic subscription or  
free trial expired, To reactivate service,  
please visit: http://www.jvc-exad.  
com appears on the display at turning on the  
unit.  
– It may not guide to your destination if  
there is only a narrow road or no road to  
your destination.  
– It may not avoid a congestion even  
if Bypass Traffic is set to Auto  
Reroute  
.
– It may show a different road name.  
– It may not ask you to turn at a junction  
even if you need to.  
– It may give a guidance different from the  
actual road condition.  
– It may give an incorrect distance  
information.  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
List of POI icons  
Gas Station  
Emergency  
Hospital  
Hotel  
Lab/Facility  
Physician  
Parking  
Restaurant  
Shopping  
Others [Medical]  
Financial  
Travel  
ATM  
Agency/Info  
Bank  
Air Transportation  
Airport  
Service  
City Finder  
Automotive  
Rental  
Ground Transportation  
Others [Travel]  
Sales  
Service  
Recreation  
Bowling  
Others [Automotive]  
Golf  
Community  
Agriculture/Farming  
Child Service  
Outdoor  
Skiing  
Education  
Theme Park/Exercise  
Zoo  
Government/Administration  
Health/Safety  
Insurance  
Others [Recreation]  
Entertainment  
Legal Service  
Manufacturing  
Multimedia  
Casino  
Museum  
Night Club/Bar  
Theater  
Police/Fire  
Post Office  
Others [Entertainment]  
Real Estate  
Medical  
Religious  
Animal Health  
Others [Community]  
Drug Store/Pharmacy  
Additional information 49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
List of traffic icons  
Traffic Jam  
Road works  
Road is blocked or closed  
Traffic lane closed  
Accident  
Condition  
Other Caution Event  
Information  
AV source operations in the map screen  
Source  
Auto search.  
Change preset stations.  
Change categories.  
Change titles/groups/folders.  
Change albums.  
Tuner  
Satellite radio  
Disc  
Change channels.  
Music server  
CD changer  
iPod/D. player  
Bluetooth Audio  
Change tracks.  
Change folders.  
(No function)  
(No function)  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Radio  
52 Listening to the radio  
FM station automatic presetting  
—SSM (Strong-station Sequential Memory)  
Manual presetting  
Selecting preset stations  
Assigning titles to stations  
52  
53  
53  
54  
54  
When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to receive  
Tuning in to stations with sufficient signal strength 54  
55 Listening to the satellite radio  
Activating your subscription after connection  
Selecting channels by channel number  
Presetting channels  
55  
57  
57  
58  
Selecting channels on the lists  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Listening to the radio  
* Assigned station name.  
Band  
Equalizer type ☞ [98]  
FM1 Preset4  
Station name  
*
MHz  
92.5  
ST DX  
Select “TUNER.”  
Select the bands.  
Search for a station—Auto Search.  
• Manual Search: Press and hold either 4 or ¢ until Manual Search appears on  
the monitor, then press it repeatedly.  
•
lights up when receiving an FM stereo broadcast with sufficient signal strength.  
FM station automatic presetting  
—SSM (Strong-station Sequential Memory)  
This function works only for FM bands.  
3
AV Menu  
Mode  
SSM  
You can preset six stations for each band.  
]
1
4
2
]
SSM appears on the display.  
Local FM stations with the strongest signals  
are searched and stored automatically in the  
FM band.  
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Manual presetting  
Selecting preset stations  
You can preset six stations for each band.  
1
1
2 Select a preset number.  
2 Tune in to the station you want  
to preset.  
3 Display the Preset List.  
On the remote:  
FM1 Preset  
1 87.5 MHz  
2 88.3 MHz  
3 88.7 MHz  
4 91.5 MHz  
5 93.1 MHz  
6 95.3 MHz  
Store  
1
or  
2 Select a preset number.  
[Hold]  
• For FM only: Each time you press and  
hold the button, you can change the  
bands.  
or  
4 Select a preset number.  
From the Preset List  
1 Display the Preset List.  
FM1 Preset  
1 87.5 MHz  
Store  
[Hold]  
2 88.3 MHz  
or  
3 88.7 MHz  
4 91.5 MHz  
5 93.1 MHz  
6 95.3 MHz  
[Hold]  
You can also access the Preset List through  
• For FM only: Each time you press and  
hold the button, you can change the  
bands.  
AV Menu  
]
List.  
2 Select a preset number.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals SearchLAinstdeDnoinwgnlotoadt.he radio 53  
Assigning titles to stations  
When an FM stereo broadcast is hard  
to receive  
You can assign a title to up to 30 radio stations.  
1 Tune in to the station you want  
1
2
to assign a title to.  
AV Menu  
Mode  
Mono  
On  
2
]
]
3
AV Menu  
Title Entry  
]
]
- Input Station Name -  
3
lights up. Reception improves, but stereo  
effect will be lost.  
To restore stereo effect, select Off in step 2.  
Del More Store  
4 Assign the title.  
• Inputting characters ☞ [105]  
• You can use up to 16 characters.  
Tuning in to stations with sufficient  
signal strength  
5 Select Store  
.
If [Name Full] appears  
This function works only for FM bands.  
Once you have activated this function (selected  
Local), it always works when searching for FM  
stations.  
If you have assigned titles to 30 stations, you  
need to delete some titles to name new stations.  
After step 3 above...  
1
Title Delete  
Select All  
1/7  
1
2
Station name 1  
AV Menu  
Mode  
DX/Local  
Local  
Station name 2  
Station name 3  
Station name 4  
]
]
Delete  
Check  
]
2 Select the titles to delete.  
3
lights up. Only stations with sufficient  
signal strength will be detected.  
To tune in to all receivable stations again,  
select DX in step 2.  
• Checkbox operations ☞ [105]  
3 Delete the selected titles.  
[Hold]  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Listening to the satellite radio  
Before operating, connect either one of the following (separately purchased) to the CD changer jack  
on the rear of this unit.  
• JVC SIRIUS radio DLP—Down Link Processor, for listening to the SIRIUS Satellite radio.  
TM  
• XMDirect Universal Tuner Box—With a JVC Smart Digital Adapter (XMDJVC100: not  
supplied), for listening to the XM Satellite radio.  
Activating your subscription after connection  
For SIRIUS Radio  
For XM Radio  
1 Turn on the power.  
1 Turn on the power.  
2 Select “SAT” for the source.  
2 Select “SAT” for the source.  
TM  
JVC DLP starts updating all the SIRIUS  
channels. (☞ “GCI update” below.)  
• Once completed, JVC DLP tunes in  
to CH184 (channel for subscription  
guidance).  
XMDirect Universal Tuner Box starts  
updating all the XM channels. “Channel 1”  
is tuned in automatically. (☞ “GCI update”  
below.)  
3 Check your XM Satellite radio  
ID.  
3 Check your SIRIUS ID.  
☞ [93]  
It is labelled on the casing of the  
TM  
XMDirect Universal Tuner Box. You can  
4 Activate your subscription.  
also check it by tuning in to “Channel 0” (☞  
next page).  
Contact SIRIUS on the Internet at <http://  
activate.siriusradio.com/>, or call SIRIUS  
toll-free at 1-888-539-SIRIUS (7474).  
• “Subscription Updated Press Any Key to  
Continue” appears on the monitor once  
subscription has been completed.  
4 Activate your subscription.  
Contact XM Satellite radio on the Internet  
at <http://xmradio.com/activation/> to  
activate your subscription, or you can call  
1-800-XM-RADIO (1-800-967-2346).  
• Once completed, the unit tunes in to one  
of the available channels (Channel 4 or  
higher).  
GCI (Global Control Information) update:  
• If channels are updated after subscription, updating starts automatically, and no sound can be  
heard.  
For SIRIUS: “Channels Updating XX% completed” appears.  
For XM: “UPDATING” appears.  
• Update takes a few minutes to complete.  
• Do not press any button or perform any operation until updating is completed.  
Listening to the radio / Listening to the satellite radio 55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Switches the display to program information—artist name/song name(/  
composer name: only for SIRIUS Satellite radio).  
SIRIUS/XM Band  
Channel number Equalizer type ☞ [98]  
SR1 Preset4  
C
001ch  
A
Category name  
Channel name  
T
C
H
Signal indicator  
For XM Radio  
For SIRIUS Radio  
Select “SAT.”  
Select a category.  
Select “SAT.”  
Select a category.  
• To select a channel from all  
categories (including non-  
• To select a channel from all  
categories, select “ALL.”  
categorised channels), skip this step.  
• If you do not select a channel within  
15 seconds, the category selected is  
canceled. You can select a channel  
from all categories now.  
Select a channel to listen  
to.  
• Holding either 4 or ¢ changes  
the channels rapidly.  
• While searching, invalid and  
unsubscribed channels are skipped.  
Select a channel to listen  
to.  
• Holding either 4 or ¢ changes  
the channels rapidly.  
• While searching, invalid and  
unsubscribed channels are skipped.  
Checking the XM Satellite radio ID  
Select channel “0.”  
The 8-digit (alphanumeric) ID number is  
displayed on the monitor.  
To cancel the ID number display, select any  
channel other than channel “0.”  
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Selecting channels by channel  
number  
Presetting channels  
You can preset six channels for each band.  
On the remote only:  
1 Tune in to a channel you want  
to preset.  
1
2 Display the Preset List.  
SR1  
- - - ch  
3 T Direct Channel  
C
A
SR1 Preset  
Store  
1 Channel name  
2 The City  
3 40 at 40  
4
5
4 Hank’s Place  
5 Audio Visions  
6 Preview  
[Hold]  
2 Input the channel number in  
• Each time you keep pressing the button,  
you can change the bands.  
three digits.  
3 Select a preset number.  
[Hold]  
• You can also access the Preset List through  
AV Menu  
]
List  
]
Preset List.  
• “SIRIUS” and the SIRIUS dog logo are  
registered trademarks of SIRIUS Satellite  
Radio Inc.  
• XM and its corresponding logos are registered  
trademarks of XM Satellite Radio Inc.  
• “SAT Radio”, the SAT Radio logo and all  
related marks are trademarks of SIRIUS  
Satellite Radio Inc., and XM Satellite Radio,  
Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All ManuaLlsisSteeanricnhgAtnodtDhoewsnalotaedll.ite radio 57  
Selecting preset channels  
Selecting channels on the lists  
1 Display the Preset List.  
You can select a channel using one of the  
following lists—Preset list/Category list/  
Channel list.  
SR1 Preset  
Store  
1 Channel name  
2 The City  
3 40 at 40  
4 Hank’s Place  
5 Audio Visions  
6 Preview  
1
2
[Hold]  
AV Menu  
List  
Preset List/  
Category List/  
]
• Each time you keep pressing the button,  
you can change the bands.  
]
2 Select a preset number.  
Channel List  
•
•
Preset List: ☞ left column  
Category List: Displays the categories.  
= Select a category, then a channel within  
the selected category.  
•
Channel List: Displays all channels  
(XM) or all channels within the current  
category (SIRIUS). = Select a channel.  
On the remote:  
1 Select the bands.  
3 Select (a category, then) a  
channel.  
2 Enter the preset number.  
• You can also access the Category List by...  
[Hold]  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Discs and HDD  
60 Disc operations  
Playable discs/files  
61  
64  
65  
65  
65  
68  
68  
Selecting playback modes  
Selecting tracks on the list  
Prohibiting disc ejection  
Remote operations  
Special functions for DVD Audio  
Operations using the on-screen bar  
70 Music server operations  
Selecting tracks using lists  
Selecting playback modes  
71  
71  
72  
75  
76  
Recording/copying tracks from a disc  
Editing the library  
Checking the remaining storage size  
77 CD changer operations  
Selecting playback modes  
78  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Disc operations  
The disc type is automatically detected, and  
playback starts automatically (for some  
discs: automatic start depends on its internal  
program).  
To insert a disc  
If a disc does not have any disc menu, all tracks  
in it will be played repeatedly until you change  
the source or eject the disc.  
To eject the disc  
Disc type  
Equalizer type ☞ [98]  
01 0:00:03  
Album Name  
Artist Name  
Track Name  
Stop playback. Start playback.  
Playback mode ☞ [64]  
Select “DISC.”  
Each time you press DISP, the display  
changes.  
When a disc contains different types of file  
(music, movie or still pictures), you need to  
select the file type to play back. (☞ [91] File  
For picture discs: playback picture  
information vehicle information (☞ [11]  
Video input* (☞ [82] (back to the  
beginning)  
For audio discs: disc information vehicle  
information Video input* (back to the  
beginning)  
=
disc  
Type  
)
=
)
=
)
=
If “ ” appears on the monitor, the unit  
cannot accept the operation you have tried to  
do.  
• In some cases, without showing “ ,”  
operations will not be accepted.  
=
=
=
*
Appears only when you have selected Videoor  
Camerafor Video Inputsetting (☞ [93]).  
• For discs except DVD and VCD: The control screen  
appears on the connected external monitor. (☞  
[102]  
)
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playable discs/files  
Disc type  
Recording format, file type, etc.  
Playable  
DVD Video  
DVD Audio  
DVD  
DVD-ROM  
DVD Video  
DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2  
JPEG  
MP3/WMA/WAV  
ASF  
DVD-VR, DVD+VR  
DVD side  
DVD Recordable/Rewritable  
(DVD-R*1/-RW, +R/+RW*2)  
• Compliant to UDF bridge  
format  
• DVD-RAM cannot be  
played.  
Dual Disc  
Non-DVD side  
Audio CD/CD Text (CD-DA), DTS-CD  
VCD (Video CD)  
CD-ROM  
CD/VCD  
CD-I (CD-I Ready)  
CD-DA  
MP3/WMA/WAV  
DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2  
JPEG  
CD Recordable/Rewritable  
(CD-R/-RW)  
• Compliant to ISO 9660  
level 1, level 2, Romeo,  
Joliet  
MPEG4  
*1 DVD-R recorded in multi-border format is also playable (except for dual layer discs).  
*2 It is possible to play back finalized +R/+RW (Video mode only) discs. However, the use of +R double layer disc is not  
recommended.  
• This unit is not compatible with Multiple  
Bit Rate (MBR: a file that contains the same  
DVD players and DVD Video discs have their  
content encoded at several different bit rates).  
own Region Code numbers. This unit can  
Note on Region Code:  
only play back DVD discs whose Region Code  
numbers include “1.”  
If you insert a DVD Video disc of an incorrect  
Region Code, Region Code Error appears  
on the monitor.  
Disc operations 61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CD  
*
Only for CD-Text. “No Name” appears  
for conventional CDs.  
DTS icon (only for DTS-CDs)  
Track no./Playing time  
01 0:00:03  
4
,
¢
Press: Select track  
Hold: Reverse/  
Disc Title*  
Artist Name*  
Track Name*  
forward search*1  
MP3, WMA, WAV  
*
Tag data will be shown instead of folder/  
file names when they are recorded and  
Tag Displayis set to On. ☞ [90]  
Audio format  
Folder no./File no./Playing time  
4
,
¢
Press: Select file  
Hold: Reverse/  
forward search*1  
01  
01 0:00:03  
Folder Name*  
File Name.mp3*  
∞
,
5
Press: Select folder  
Hold: Display Folder  
List  
DivX, MPEG  
Folder no./File no./Playing time  
File type  
4
,
¢
Press: Select file  
Hold: Reverse/  
forward search*2  
01  
01 0:00:03  
Folder Name  
File Name.avi  
∞
,
5
Press: Select folder  
Hold: Display Folder  
List  
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVD Video  
Title no./Chapter no./Playing time Audio format  
4
,
¢
Press: Select  
chapter  
Hold: Reverse/  
T
C
01  
01 0:00:03  
forward search*1  
∞
Press: Select title  
,
5
DVD Audio  
Group no./Track no./Playing time Audio format  
BONUS indicator ☞ [68]  
B.S.P indicator ☞ [68]  
4
,
¢
Press: Select track  
Hold: Reverse/  
G
01  
01 0:00:03  
forward search*1  
∞
Press: Select group  
,
5
VCD  
Track no./Playing time PBC indicator: lights up when PBC is in use. ☞ [67]  
01 0:00:03  
4
,
¢
Press: Select track  
Hold: Reverse/  
forward search*1  
*1 Search speed: x2  
]
x10  
*2 Search speed:  
¡
1
] ¡  
2
Disc operations 63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JPEG  
Folder no.  
File no.  
4
Press: Select file  
,
¢
01  
01  
Folder Name  
File Name.jpg  
∞
,
5
Press: Select folder  
Hold: Display Folder  
List  
Selecting playback modes  
You can use only one of the following playback  
Disc type  
Repeat  
modes—Intro/Repeat/Random.  
Ex. To select Track Repeat  
Chapter  
:
Repeats current chapter  
1
2
Title  
:
Repeats current title  
AV Menu  
Mode  
Repeat  
Track  
Track  
:
]
Repeats current track  
]
Track  
:
]
Repeats current track  
3
Folder  
:
Repeats current folder  
When one of the playback modes is selected, the  
corresponding indicator lights up on the disc  
information screen.  
Folder  
:
Repeats current folder  
To cancel, select Off in step 2.  
Disc type  
Intro  
Repeat  
Random  
Track  
Plays the first 15 seconds  
of each track (for VCD:  
PBC not in use)  
:
Track  
:
Disc:  
Repeats current track  
(for VCD: PBC not in  
use)  
Randomly plays all tracks  
(for VCD: PBC not in  
use)  
Track  
Plays the first 15 seconds  
of each track  
:
Track  
Repeats current track  
Folder  
Repeats all tracks of the  
current folder  
:
Folder  
:
Randomly plays all tracks  
of current folder, then  
tracks of next folders  
:
Folder  
:
Plays the first 15 seconds  
of the first track of each  
folder  
Disc  
:
Randomly plays all tracks  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Selecting tracks on the list  
Prohibiting disc ejection  
If a disc includes folders, you can display the  
Folder/Track Lists, then start playback.  
1
1 Display the Folder List.  
[Hold]  
Eject  
Folder List  
My Best  
1/4  
Emergency Eject  
No Eject  
Cinema  
or  
My Best2  
Pops  
Favorites  
020315  
Set  
[Hold]  
2 Select No Eject  
.
2 Select a folder, then a track.  
• If you press ENT while a folder is selected, all  
tracks in the selected folder are played back.  
To cancel the prohibition, select Eject OK in  
step 2.  
You can also access the Folder List through  
AV Menu  
]
List.  
Remote operations  
Common operations  
• Change the source.  
• Turn off the AV function if  
pressed and held.  
AV/OFF  
Switch to the map screen.  
MAP/POS  
Start playing/pause.  
(For JPEG: Slide show)  
ENT 6  
Stop playing.  
BACK/BAND  
MENU  
Call up AV Menu.  
Adjust the volume.  
VOL +/–  
ATT  
DISP  
Attenuate/restore the sound.  
Change the display. ☞ [11]  
Display the on-screen bar.  
[68]  
☞
OSD  
Change the aspect ratio of the  
playback pictures.  
ASPECT  
Disc operations 65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Press: Select a chapter.  
Press and hold: Reverse/forward search*1.  
Press: Select a track.  
Press and hold: Reverse/forward search*1.  
4/¢  
Select a title.  
Select a group.  
∞/5  
Chapter  
=
Title  
=
Off  
Track  
=
Group  
=
Off  
DIRECT  
(☞ below  
)
Reverse/forward search*2  
Slow motion*3 during pause. (No sound can Reverse/forward search*2  
be heard.)  
1/¡  
Select audio language.  
Select subtitle language.  
Select a view angle.  
—
—
Press: Select a track.  
Press and hold: Reverse/forward search*1  
4/¢  
—
Select a folder.  
∞/5  
Track  
=
Off  
File  
=
Folder  
=
Off  
DIRECT  
(☞ below  
)
Reverse/forward search*2  
1/¡  
Selecting an item with number keys  
You can select a chapter/title/group/folder/  
track by inputting its number.  
2 Input the title number.  
Ex.: To select a title of a DVD Video.  
1 [twice]  
On the playback screen:  
• To correct a misentry, press DIRECT to  
clear the entry and input again.  
appears on the screen.  
– –  
TITLE  
On the disc information screen:  
The title number lights up in gray.  
3
• Each time you press  
selectable item changes. See the table  
above.  
, the  
66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Press: Select a track.  
Press and hold: Reverse/forward Press and hold: Reverse/forward Press: Select a track.  
search*4. (No sound can be heard.) search*1. (No sound can be heard.)  
Press: Select a track.  
Select a folder.  
Track Folder  
—
Select a folder.  
=
=
Off  
Track  
=
Off  
File  
=
Folder  
=
Off  
Reverse/forward search*2  
Reverse/forward search*5 (No  
sound can be heard.)  
Forward slow motion*3 during  
pause. (No sound can be heard.)  
—
Select audio language. (Only for  
DivX.)  
Select audio channel.  
—
Select subtitle language. (Only  
for DivX.)  
—
—
—
—
—
*1 Search speed: x2  
*2 Search speed: x2  
*3 Slow motion speed: 1/32  
]
]
x10  
x5  
*4 Search speed:  
*5 Search speed:  
¡
¡
1
1
] ¡  
2
]
x10  
]
]
1/16  
x20  
]
]
1/8  
x60  
1/4  
] ¡  
2
] ¡3  
]
]
1/2  
PBC playback  
Select an item on the menu.  
Menu driven operations  
(For DVD and DivX 6)  
1
or  
(only for DVD  
Video and DivX)  
2 Select an item you want  
to play.  
• To return to the previous menus, press  
.
To cancel PBC playback  
3
1
Quick skip  
2 Select a track.  
Return/advance the scenes by 5  
minutes.  
While playing...  
current playback position  
• To resume PBC, press  
/
.
Disc operations 67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Special functions for DVD Audio  
Operations using the on-screen bar  
For DVD/VCD/DivX/MPEG/JPEG discs, you  
can check the disc information and use some  
functions through the on-screen bar.  
Playing back a bonus group  
If a DVD Audio including a “bonus group”  
is detected,  
lights up on the disc  
1 Display the on-screen bar.  
information screen.  
[twice]  
1 Select the bonus group.  
• When you press OSD once, the  
information bar appears. When you press  
it again, the operation bar spreads out  
below.  
• The bonus group is usually recorded as  
the last group.  
2 Enter the key number.  
2 Select an item.  
• ☞ next column “To enter numbers”  
• “Key number” (a kind of password) for  
the bonus group is not open to public.  
The way of getting the key number  
depends on the disc.  
3 Make a selection.  
3 Follow the interactive  
instructions shown on the  
monitor.  
If pop-up menu appears...  
Selecting browsable still pictures  
When a disc including browsable still pictures  
• For entering time/numbers, see below.  
is detected,  
lights up on the disc  
To remove the on-screen bar  
information screen.  
When disc shows the BSP selecting icons such  
To enter numbers  
as @ or # on the screen...  
1 Select a number.  
1 Select an item you want to  
display.  
2 Move to the next digit.  
2
3 Repeat steps 1 and 2.  
4
• To correct a misentry, use ¤.  
• It is not necessarily required to enter trailing  
zeros.  
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Information  
Operation  
T02-C03 TOTAL 1:25:58  
C. RPT  
CHAP  
DVD-V  
TIME  
TITLE  
RPT  
1
Disc type  
Pause  
Stop  
2
Audio signal format (for DVD)  
PBC (for VCD)  
Playback mode  
7
Operation icons  
3
TIME  
Change time indication (☞ 5)  
*
T. RPT Title Repeat/Track Repeat  
C. RPT Chapter Repeat  
F. RPT Folder Repeat  
D. RND Disc Random  
T. INT  
Playback information  
Time Search (Enter the elapsed  
playing time of the current title  
or of the disc.)  
Title Search (by its number)  
Group Search (by its number)  
Chapter Search (by its number)  
Track Search (by its number)  
*
*
*
TITLE  
GROUP  
CHAP  
TRACK  
*
Track Intro  
4
Current title/chapter  
T02-C03  
Current group/track  
Current track  
G02-T03  
*
RPT  
INT  
Repeat play  
Intro play  
Random play  
Change the audio language or  
audio channel  
TRACK 01  
F001-T001  
F001-F001  
*
Current folder/track  
Current folder/file  
*
RND  
5
Time indication  
Change the subtitle language or  
hide the subtitle.  
Change the view angle  
Elapsed playing time of the disc  
TOTAL  
T. REM  
Remaining title/group time (for  
DVD)  
Remaining disc time (for others)  
Elapsed playing time of the  
current chapter/track  
Remaining time of the current  
chapter/track  
PAGE 1/15 Change the B.S.P (for DVD  
Audio) (The numbers in the  
indicator show the current page/  
total page number.)  
TIME  
REM  
*
☞ [64]  
6
Playback status  
Play  
Reverse/forward search  
Reverse/forward slow-motion  
Disc operations 69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Music server operations  
The built-in HDD works not only as storage for navigation data, but as a music server, where you  
can record CD tracks and music files (MP3, WMA and WAV files).  
The recorded tracks are categorized into genres and albums.  
You can make 99 genres in the music server, and 99 albums in each genre. Each album can contain  
999 tracks.  
Track 1  
Album 1  
Genre 1  
Track 2  
Track 3  
Track 1  
Track 2  
Album 2  
Genre 2  
File type/Compression mode  
Equalizer type ☞ [98]  
Genre no./Album no./Track no./Play time  
01 01 01 0:00:03  
Genre Name  
Album Name  
Track Name  
Playback mode ☞ [71]  
Select “HDD.”  
The last selected track starts playing from the beginning.  
Select the track.  
Change the track.  
Change the album.  
70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Selecting tracks using lists  
Selecting playback modes  
You can use only one of the following playback  
1 Call up the Genre List.  
modes—Intro/Repeat/Random.  
Ex. To select Track Repeat  
Genre List  
60’s  
1
or  
Jazz  
Drive  
2
AV Menu  
Mode  
Repeat  
Track  
Favorites  
Classical  
80’s  
]
[Hold]  
]
2 Select a genre, then an album.  
]
3
When one of the playback modes is selected,  
the corresponding indicator lights up on the  
monitor.  
• Repeat the same procedure to select the  
album.  
To cancel, select Off in step 2.  
Track  
:
Intro  
3 Select a track to play back.  
Plays the first 15 seconds  
of all tracks in the current  
album  
Album  
:
Plays the first 15 seconds  
of the first tracks of each  
album in the current genre  
• If you press ENT while a genre or an  
album is selected, all tracks in the selected  
genre or album are played back.  
Genre  
Plays the first 15 seconds of  
the first tracks of each genre  
:
Track  
Repeats current track  
Album  
Repeats all tracks of the  
current album  
Genre  
:
Repeat  
Random  
You can also access the Genre List through  
AV Menu  
]
List.  
:
:
Repeats all tracks of the  
current genre  
Album  
Randomly plays all tracks of  
the current album  
:
Genre  
:
Randomly plays all tracks of  
the current genre  
All  
:
Randomly plays all tracks in  
the music server  
Music server operations 71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notes on the name of new genres and  
albums  
Recording/copying tracks from a disc  
• You can record tracks of audio CDs into the  
• If you want to make a new genre or a new  
album for the tracks to be recorded/copied,  
select [New Genre] or [New Album]. To  
name the new genre/album, press and hold  
DISP. You can also name it later through  
Title Entry (☞ [75] “Changing the titles”).  
• If you do not specify a genre name or  
album name on recording/copying, they are  
assigned as follows.  
HDD. Record appears in AV Menu  
.
• You can copy music files (MP3, WMA, WAV)  
into the HDD. Copy appears in AV Menu  
.
Preparation:  
Insert the disc to record/copy, and select DISC  
as the source.  
– For audio CDs, the genre name and  
album name are assigned automatically  
using the recording date and time.  
– For music files, the genre name is  
assigned automatically using the  
recording date and time. The original  
folder name and file name are used as  
the album name and the track name.  
• While recording an audio CD, you cannot  
listen to the tracks being recorded with the  
map screen displayed.  
• While copying music files, you cannot listen  
to them.  
• You cannot change the source while  
recording or copying tracks. If you want to  
interrupt the recording and enjoy another  
source, cancel the recording/copying (☞  
below).  
When the recording/copying is finished  
Completed is displayed, and playback  
resumes.  
To record the current track  
1
2
AV Menu  
Record  
Current Track  
To cancel recording/copying  
While recording or copying...  
]
]
3 Start recording.  
You can also cancel recording/copying  
through AV Menu  
]
Record  
/
Copy  
]
Recording... appears.  
Cancel  
.
• When you record a track for the first  
time with this function, a new genre and  
a new album is automatically created for  
the track. Other tracks recorded with  
this function are recorded into the same  
album until you turn off the ignition  
switch or edit the library.  
72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To record all the tracks in a disc  
To record selected tracks  
1
1
2
AV Menu  
Record  
Select All  
2
AV Menu  
Record  
Select Track  
]
]
]
]
3 Select the genre and album to  
3 Select the tracks to record.  
record the tracks into.  
Select Track  
Select All  
Track 1  
1/3  
Select Genre  
[New Genre]  
Jazz  
1/2  
Track 2  
Track 3  
Drive  
Track 4  
Check  
Favorites  
Classical  
[34/99]  
• Checkbox operations ☞ [105]  
Number of albums in the selected genre  
• Repeat the same procedure to select the  
album.  
4
5 Select the genre and album to  
record the tracks into.  
4 Select a compression mode.  
Compress  
Select Genre  
[New Genre]  
Jazz  
1/2  
High Quality  
Normal Quality  
Drive  
Favorites  
Classical  
[34/99]  
Record  
High Quality: High quality lossless  
recording (LLC).  
Normal Quality: More compressed  
recording, so data size becomes smaller  
(BSC).  
Number of albums in the selected genre  
• Repeat the same procedure to select the  
album.  
6 Select a compression mode.  
Compress  
5 Start recording.  
High Quality  
Normal Quality  
Record  
Recording... appears.  
High Quality: High quality lossless  
recording (LLC).  
Normal Quality: More compressed  
recording, so data size becomes smaller  
(BSC).  
7 Start recording.  
Recording... appears.  
Music server operations 73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To copy the current track  
To copy selected tracks  
1
1
2
AV Menu  
Copy  
Current Track  
2
AV Menu  
Copy  
Select Track  
]
]
]
]
3 Start copying.  
3 Select the tracks to copy.  
Select Track  
Select All  
Track 1  
1/3  
Track 2  
Track 3  
Track 4  
Copying... appears.  
• When you copy a track for the first time  
with this function, a new genre and a  
new album is automatically created for  
the track. Other tracks copied with this  
function are copied into the same album  
until you turn off the ignition switch or  
edit the library.  
Check  
• Checkbox operations ☞ [105]  
4
5 Select the genre to copy the  
tracks into.  
To copy all the tracks in a folder  
1 Select the target folder.  
2
Select Genre  
[New Genre]  
Jazz  
1/2  
Drive  
Favorites  
Classical  
[34/99]  
3
AV Menu  
Copy  
Select All  
Number of albums in the selected genre  
]
]
6 Select the album to copy the  
4 Select the genre to copy the  
tracks into.  
tracks into.  
Select Genre  
[New Genre]  
Jazz  
1/2  
Drive  
Favorites  
Classical  
[34/99]  
Copying... appears, and copying starts.  
Number of albums in the selected genre  
5 Select the album to copy the  
tracks into.  
To resume the interrupted recording/copying  
If have turned off the power, switched off the  
car ignition switch, or detached the control  
panel while recording/copying, you can resume  
the last recording/copying.  
• If you eject the disc or edit the library of the  
music sever, Continue mode is canceled.  
• You cannot use Continue if you have  
canceled recording/copying manually.  
Copying... appears, and copying starts.  
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
2
6 Select Store to finish editing.  
• You cannot edit the tag data of tracks.  
AV Menu  
Record or Copy  
Continue  
]
]
Moving tracks between albums/Moving  
albums between genres  
3 Start recording/copying.  
Ex. To move tracks between albums  
• Select the album which the target tracks  
belong to.  
Recording.../Copying... appears.  
1
2
Editing the library  
AV Menu  
Edit  
Move  
Track  
• Library editing is possible only when HDD is  
selected as the source.  
]
]
]
Changing the titles  
You can change the names of genres, albums  
and tracks in the HDD.  
Ex. To change the name of a track  
3 Check the tracks to move.  
Move Track  
Select All  
Track 1  
1/2  
1
Track 2  
Track 3  
Track 4  
2
AV Menu  
Title Entry  
Check  
]
• Checkbox operations ☞ [105]  
3 Select a genre, then an album.  
4
5 Select the album to move the  
tracks into.  
Move to  
1/2  
[New Album]  
Album 1  
Album 2  
Album 3  
Album 4  
Playback of the selected item starts.  
• Repeat the same procedure to select the  
album.  
[15/999]  
Move  
4 Select a track to edit.  
Number of tracks in the selected album  
Over the Rainbow  
6 Move the selected tracks.  
A confirmation message appears. Press ENT  
to confirm the operation. Press BACK to  
cancel.  
Del More Store  
5 Enter the name.  
• Inputting characters ☞ [105]  
• You can use up to 32 characters for the  
name of tracks, albums, or genres.  
Music server operations 75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Rearranging the order of tracks, albums and  
genres  
Ex. To rearrange the order of tracks in an  
album  
Deleting tracks, albums, or genres  
Ex. To delete tracks  
• Select the album which the target tracks  
belong to.  
• Select the album which the target tracks  
belong to.  
1
2
AV Menu  
Edit  
Delete  
Track  
1
2
]
AV Menu  
Edit  
Sort  
Track  
]
]
]
]
3 Check the tracks to delete.  
]
Delete Track  
Select All  
Track 1  
1/2  
3 Select the track to move.  
Sort Track  
Track 1  
Track 2  
Track 3  
Track 4  
Track 5  
1/2  
Track 2  
Track 3  
Track 4  
Delete  
Select  
• Checkbox operations ☞ [105]  
Select  
4 Delete the selected tracks.  
4 Move the selected track.  
Sort Track  
Track 2  
Track 3  
Track 1  
Track 4  
Track 5  
1/2  
[Hold]  
A confirmation message appears. Press ENT  
to confirm the operation. Press BACK to  
cancel.  
Sort  
A confirmation message appears. Press ENT  
to confirm the operation. Press BACK to  
cancel.  
• To rearrange more tracks, repeat steps 1 to 4.  
Checking the remaining storage size  
1
2
AV Menu  
Edit  
HDD Free Area  
]
]
Edit  
Delete  
Move  
Sort  
HDD Free Area  
[
]
80.5% 20.0GB  
Exit  
Free space of the music server  
76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CD changer operations  
It is recommended to use a JVC MP3-compatible CD changer with your unit.  
• You can play only CDs (CD-DA) and MP3 discs.  
Preparation:  
Make sure Changer is selected for the external input setting. (☞ [93])  
Disc no./Track no./Playing time  
Equalizer type ☞ [98]  
01  
01 0:00:03  
Disc Title*  
Artist Name*  
Current Track*  
*
“No Name” appears for  
conventional CDs.  
Playback mode ☞ [78]  
Select “CD-CH.”  
To select tracks  
Playback starts automatically.  
Press: Select track  
Hold: Reverse/forward  
search  
Display the Disc List.  
Disc List  
MP3 Disc  
1/2  
Press: Select folder (MP3  
only)  
Hold: Display the Disc List  
Disc 02  
Disc 03  
or  
Disc 04  
Disc 05  
Disc 06  
[Hold]  
On the remote:  
To select a disc  
• Each time you hold the button,  
you can display the other list of the  
remaining discs.  
or  
Select a disc to start  
playing.  
: Select folder  
(MP3 only)  
: Select track  
CD changer operations 77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Selecting playback modes  
You can use only one of the following playback  
modes—Intro/Repeat/Random.  
Ex. To select Track Repeat  
3
1
2
When one of the playback modes is selected,  
the corresponding indicator lights up on the  
monitor.  
AV Menu  
Mode  
Repeat  
To cancel, select Off in step 2.  
]
]
]
Track  
Disc type  
Intro  
Repeat  
Random  
Track  
Plays the first 15 seconds  
of each track  
:
Track  
Repeats current track  
:
Disc:  
Randomly plays all tracks  
of the current disc  
:
Randomly plays all tracks  
of all loaded discs  
Disc  
:
Disc  
:
Repeats all tracks of the All  
Plays the first 15 seconds  
of the first track of all  
loaded discs  
current disc  
Track  
Plays the first 15 seconds  
of each track  
:
Track  
Repeats current track  
Folder  
Repeats all tracks of the  
current folder  
:
Folder  
:
Randomly plays all tracks  
of current folder, then  
tracks of next folders  
:
Folder  
:
Plays the first 15 seconds  
of the first track of each  
folder  
Disc  
:
Randomly plays all tracks  
Disc  
:
of the current disc  
Repeats all tracks of the  
Disc  
:
current disc  
All  
:
Plays the first 15 seconds  
of the first track of all  
loaded discs  
Randomly plays all tracks  
of all loaded discs  
• You can also access the Disc List through AV Menu  
• While playing an MP3 disc, you can select and start playing a track in the disc using the Lists.  
]
List.  
Disc List  
MP3 Disc  
1/2  
Folder List  
My Best  
Cinema  
Pops  
1/2  
Track List  
Song011.mp3  
1/2  
Disc 02  
Disc 03  
Disc 04  
Disc 05  
Disc 06  
Song012.mp3  
Song013.mp3  
Song014.mp3  
Song015.mp3  
Song016.mp3  
My Best2  
Favorite Song  
Cinema2  
78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other functions  
80 iPod/D. player operations  
Selecting a track from the player’s menu  
Selecting playback modes  
80  
80  
81 Playing other external  
components  
External input  
Video input  
81  
82  
83 Using Bluetooth® devices  
—Cellular phone/audio player  
Menu operation for Bluetooth devices  
Registering a Bluetooth device  
Using the Bluetooth cellular phone  
Using the Bluetooth audio player  
Phone Menu  
83  
83  
85  
87  
88  
90 AV Menu items  
98 Sound equalization  
Selecting an equalizer type  
Storing your own adjustment  
98  
98  
99 Additional Information  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
iPod/D. player operations  
For Apple iPod and JVC D. player, it is required to connect the interface adapter (KS-PD100 for  
iPod or KS-PD500 for D. player) to the CD changer jack on the rear.  
Preparation:  
Make sure Changer is selected for the external input setting. (☞ [93])  
01  
0:00:03  
Album Name  
Artist Name  
Track Name  
Playback mode  
☞ below  
Pause/Resume  
Select “iPod” or “D. PLAYER.”  
Playback starts automatically.  
Equalizer type ☞ [98]  
Select a track.  
Selecting playback modes  
Selecting a track from the player’s  
menu  
1
1 Enter the player’s menu.  
2
AV Menu  
Mode  
Repeat or Random  
]
]
appears.  
• This mode will be canceled if no  
Repeat One  
:
operations are done for about 5 seconds.  
Functions the same as “Repeat  
One” or “Repeat Mode = One.”  
2 Select the desired menu item.  
3 Confirm the selection.  
All  
:
Functions the same as “Repeat  
All” or “Repeat Mode = All.”  
Random Song  
/On:  
Functions the same as “Shuffle  
Songs” or “Random Play =  
On.”  
Album  
Functions the same as “Shuffle  
Albums” of the iPod.  
4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to select a  
track.  
:
• When a track is selected finally, playback  
starts.  
• To return to the previous menu...  
To cancel, select Off in step 2.  
• iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.,  
registered in the U.S. and other countries.  
80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playing other external components  
External input  
You can connect an external component to the CD changer jack on the rear using the Line Input  
Adapter—KS-U57 (not supplied) or AUX Input Adapter—KS-U58 (not supplied).  
Preparation:  
Make sure Ext Input is selected for the external input setting. (☞ [93])  
AV Input  
Equalizer type ☞ [98]  
Select “EXT-IN.”  
Turn on the connected component and start playing the  
source.  
Assigning title to the external input  
4 Assign a title.  
• Inputting characters ☞ [105]  
1 Select EXT-IN as the source.  
2
• You can use up to 16 characters.  
5 Select Store  
.
3
AV Menu  
Title Entry  
• While driving at a speed greater than 6 mi/h  
(10 km/h), operations of inputting are  
prohibited.  
]
Del More Store  
DownloadiPfroomd/WDw. pwl.aSyoemraonpuaelrsa.ctoiomn. sAl/l PMlaanyuianlgs SoetahrecrheAxntderDnoawlnclooamd.ponents 81  
Video input  
You can connect an external component to the VIDEO IN plug.  
Preparation:  
When connecting a video component  
Make sure Ext Input is selected for the external input setting, and Video for the video input  
setting. (☞ [93])  
• You cannot view the video picture when the parking brake is not engaged.  
When connecting a camera  
Make sure Camera is selected for the video input setting. (☞ [93])  
Each time you press DISP, the display switches as follows:  
AV screen  
screen)  
=
Vehicle information (☞ [11]  
)
=
Video picture or camera picture  
=
(Back to the AV  
For video components:  
Turn on the connected component and start playing.  
To switch to the camera view automatically  
You can set the unit to automatically display  
the camera view when the car is put into reverse  
gear or when the car slows down.  
☞ [94] Interlock  
To reverse the camera picture  
☞ [94] Horizontal and Vertical  
82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Bluetooth® devices—Cellular phone/audio player  
For Bluetooth operations, it is required to connect the Bluetooth Adapter (KS-BTA200) to the CD  
changer jack on the rear.  
• Refer also to the instructions supplied with the Bluetooth Adapter and the Bluetooth device.  
• Refer to the list (included in the box) to see the countries where you may use the Bluetooth®  
function.  
Menu operation for Bluetooth devices  
Registering a Bluetooth device  
AV Menu  
Mode  
2/2  
Mode  
Dial  
1/2  
1/2  
AV screen:  
Message  
Open  
Search  
=
Bluetooth Audio  
Special Device  
Phone Menu  
Mode  
Mode  
Map screen/AV  
screen: other sources  
than Bluetooth Audio  
Dial  
Message  
Open  
Search  
Special Device  
List  
[Hold]  
Using the Bluetooth cellular phone  
Phone Menu  
Mode  
Bluetooth Phone  
Map screen/  
AV screen  
P902i  
List  
[Hold]  
10:35 AM  
Registering a Bluetooth device  
Preparation:  
Operate the device to turn on its Bluetooth  
function.  
Registration (Pairing) methods  
• Use Phone Menu to register a device as a  
cellular phone.  
• Use AV Menu to register a device as an  
audio player.  
To use a Bluetooth device through the unit  
(“Bluetooth Phone” and “Bluetooth Audio”) for  
the first time, you need to establish Bluetooth  
wireless connection between the unit and the  
device.  
• Once the connection is established, it is  
registered in the unit even if you reset your  
unit. Up to five devices can be registered in  
total.  
Make the unit ready to establish  
a new Bluetooth connection.  
Connection is established by  
operating the Bluetooth device.  
Open  
Make the unit ready to establish  
a new Bluetooth connection.  
Connection is established by  
operating this unit.  
Search  
• Only one device for Bluetooth Phone and one  
for Bluetooth Audio can be connected at a  
time.  
Using Bluetooth devices 83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Searching for available devices  
To register another device after you have  
registered a device, make sure New Device  
is selected. (☞ [85])  
1
Mode  
Search  
]
Searching...  
Registering using Open  
The unit searches for available devices and  
displays the list of them. (If no available  
device is detected, Device Unfound  
appears.)  
1
Mode  
Open  
]
0000  
2 Select a device you want to  
connect.  
Connect  
BS  
2 Enter a PIN (Personal  
*
Identification Number) code to  
the unit.  
3 Enter the specific PIN code of  
• Inputting characters ☞ [105]  
the device to the unit.  
• You can enter any number you like (1-  
• Inputting characters ☞ [105]  
• Refer to the instructions supplied with the  
device to check the PIN code.  
digit to 16-digit number).  
* Some devices have their own PIN code. Enter the  
specified PIN code to the unit.  
Connecting...  
3 Select Connect  
.
Open...  
4 Use the Bluetooth device to  
connect.  
4 Operate the target Bluetooth  
Now connection is established and you can  
use the device through the unit.  
device.  
Enter the same PIN code (as entered in the  
above step) on the device to be connected.  
Now connection is established and you can use  
the device through the unit.  
Connecting a special device  
The device remains registered even after  
you disconnect the device. Use Connect  
(or activate Auto Connect) to connect the  
same device from next time. (☞ [89])  
1
Mode  
]
Special Device  
The unit displays the list of the preset  
devices.  
2 Select a device you want to  
connect.  
3 Use Open (or Search) to  
connect.  
84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting/disconnecting a registered device  
2 Select the method to make a  
call.  
1 On the Bluetooth Phone screen  
or the Bluetooth Audio screen,  
select a registered device you  
want to connect/disconnect.  
•
Redial: Shows the list of the phone  
numbers you have dialed. Go to the  
following step.  
•
•
Received Calls: Shows the list of the  
received calls. Go to the following step.  
Phonebook: Shows the phone book of  
the connected cellular phone. Go to the  
following step.  
• Each time you press 5 ∞, the  
registered device names (and New  
Device when a new device can be  
registered) appear in turn.  
•
•
Missed Calls: Shows the list of the  
missed calls. Go to the following step.  
Phone Number: Shows the phone  
number entry screen. = Input numbers  
and select Dial. (Inputting characters ☞  
[105])  
Voice (Only when the connected cellular  
phone has the voice recognition system):  
= Speak the name you want to call.  
2
Mode  
Connect or  
Disconnect  
]
• Select Connect to connect the selected  
device.  
•
• Select Disconnect to disconnect the  
selected device.  
3 Select the name/phone number  
You can set the unit to connect a Bluetooth  
device automatically when the unit is turned  
on. (☞ [89])  
you want to call.  
Deleting a registered device  
After step 1 above...  
Mode  
]
Delete Pair  
Yes  
]
Bluetooth icon  
lights up when the adapter is connected.*1  
• To cancel, select No  
.
Bluetooth Phone  
Using the Bluetooth cellular phone  
2 P902i  
Calling...  
Jack  
09845671234  
10:35 AM  
Making a call  
You can make a call using one of the Dial  
Menu items.  
Status of the device*3  
Signal strength/Battery remainder  
*1 Blue: The device is connected.  
White: The device is not connected.  
Cellular phone  
Cellular phone with audio function  
*3 Appears only when the information comes from  
the device.  
1
Phone Menu  
Mode  
Dial  
]
]
Dial  
Redial  
1/2  
*2  
Received Calls  
Phonebook  
Missed Calls  
Phone Number  
[01234567890]  
Using Bluetooth devices 85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
On the unit:  
• You can also access the Dial menu by  
pressing PHONE on the remote controller.  
• You can also access the redial list by  
pressing and holding PHONE on the  
remote controller.  
• You can also access the voice calling screen  
by pressing and holding MENU while the  
Bluetooth Phone screen is displayed.  
1 Call up the preset list.  
or  
[Hold]  
To adjust the volume  
2 Select the preset number to call.  
• This adjustment does not affect the  
volume level of the other sources.  
• You can adjust the microphone  
volume level. ☞ [89]  
Dial Preset  
11122223333  
22233336666  
44455556666  
09845671234  
99988887777  
55566668888  
To end the call  
Press and hold MENU, DISP, BACK, ENT,  
5,  
∞,  
,
or TRAFFIC.  
You can also access the preset number list  
through Phone Menu  
]
List.  
Presetting the phone numbers  
You can preset up to six phone numbers.  
To dial to the number acquired in Navigation  
System  
1 Display the phone number you  
want to preset by using one of  
the Dial Menu items.  
1 Search for a POI or a favorite  
point which has telephone  
number information.  
2 Call up the preset list.  
[Hold]  
• To preset a phone number using Phone  
Number, select Store after inputting a  
phone number.  
0.7 mi  
2 Select [Call]  
.
3 Select a preset number.  
• You cannot make an  
international call through this  
function.  
Preset Memory  
11122223333  
22233336666  
44455556666  
09845671234  
99988887777  
55566668888  
Store  
[Hold]  
You can use the following buttons on the  
remote controller for the Bluetooth phone  
operations.  
ENT 6, PHONE: Answer the incoming  
To call a preset number  
On the remote:  
While the Bluetooth Phone screen is displayed...  
call.  
End the call.  
BACK:  
Number keys: Enter the phone number/PIN  
code.  
PHONE: Call up the redial list if pressed and  
held.  
86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When a call comes in...  
When a text message comes in...  
Bluetooth Phone  
If the cellular phone is compatible with text  
message and Message Info is set to Auto  
(☞ [89]), the unit rings and Receiving  
Message appears on the monitor to inform  
you of the arrival of the message.  
To read the message  
While Receiving Message is displayed...  
P902i  
Receiving Call  
Jack  
09845671234  
10:35 AM  
Name and  
phone number  
(if acquired)  
The screen is automatically changed to  
Bluetooth Phone.  
When Auto Answer is activated  
The unit answers the incoming calls  
automatically. (☞ [89])  
• You cannot edit or send a message through  
the unit.  
• When Auto Answer is deactivated, press  
MENU, DISP, BACK, ENT,  
5
,
∞
,
,
or TRAFFIC to answer the incoming  
call.  
Using the Bluetooth audio player  
Equalizer type ☞ [98]  
Reverse/forward skip  
*1Connected device*2  
Play*3  
Bluetooth icon: lights up when the adapter is Stop playback.  
connected.  
*1  
Audio player  
Cellular phone with audio function  
Select “Bluetooth  
Audio.”  
*2 Each time you press 5 ∞, the registered device names (and  
New Devicewhen a new device can be registered) appear in  
turn.  
Start playback.  
*3 Indicates the button pressed. It may be different from the  
operation status.  
• ☞ [83] for connecting a new device.  
• ☞ [85] for connecting/disconnecting a  
registered device.  
You can use the following buttons on the  
remote controller for the Bluetooth audio  
operations.  
• ☞ [85] for deleting a registered device.  
ENT 6, BACK: Start/stop playback.  
4/¢: Reverse/forward skip  
VOL +/−: Adjust the volume.  
Number keys: Enter the PIN code.  
Using Bluetooth devices 87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Phone Menu  
Menu items  
Selectable settings  
(Initial setting)  
Select a phone number from the list of the phone numbers you have  
dialed.  
Redial  
Select a phone number from the list of the received calls.  
Received Calls  
Phonebook  
Select a name, then phone number from the phone book of the  
connected cellular phone.  
Select a phone number from the list of the missed calls.  
Enter the phone number.  
Missed Calls  
Phone Number  
Voice  
If the connected cellular phone has the voice recognition system, you  
can call by voice command.  
You can read a message from the following message histories.  
Unread: Messages you have not read.  
Read: Messages you have read.  
Message*2  
Unsent: Messages you have not sent.  
Sent: Messages you have sent.  
Only for New Device  
.
Make the unit ready to establish a new Bluetooth connection. Select  
this when establishing a Bluetooth connection with a device for the  
first time, mainly from the device. ☞ [84]  
Open*3  
• Once the connection is established, it is registered in the unit. You  
can connect the unit and the device by using Connect (☞ [89])  
from the next time.  
Only for New Device  
.
Make the unit ready to establish a new Bluetooth connection. Select  
this when establishing a Bluetooth connection with a device for the  
first time, mainly from the unit. The unit searches for available new  
devices. ☞ [84]  
• Before starting a search, turn on the Bluetooth function of the  
device so that the unit can detect it.  
Search*3  
• Once the connection is established, it is registered in the unit. You  
can connect the unit and the device by using Connect (☞ [89])  
from the next time.  
Only for New Device  
.
Shows the list of Bluetooth devices which requires some special  
procedure to establish Bluetooth connection. Select a device you want  
to connect. ☞ [84]  
• After selecting the device, use Open or Search (☞ above) for  
connection.  
Special Device*3  
• Once the connection is established, it is registered in the unit. You  
can connect the unit and the device by using Connect (☞ [89])  
from the next time.  
88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Phone Menu (continued)  
Menu items  
Selectable settings  
(Initial setting)  
Only for the registered devices.  
After selecting a device from among the registered devices (☞ [85,  
87]), establish the connection with it. ☞ [85]  
Connect*3  
Only for the device being connected.  
Disconnect*3  
Disconnect the current device before connecting another device. ☞  
[85]  
Only for the registered devices.  
Delete Pair*3  
Auto Connect  
Delete the registered devices. ☞ [85]  
When the unit is turned on, the connection is established  
automatically with...  
Off: No Bluetooth device.  
Last: The last connected Bluetooth device.  
Order: The available registered Bluetooth device found at first.  
Auto Answer*4  
Message Info*4  
Only for the device being connected for “Bluetooth Phone.”  
Off: The unit does not answer the calls automatically. Answer the call  
manually.  
On: The unit answers the incoming calls automatically.  
Reject: The unit rejects all incoming calls.  
Only for the device being connected for “Bluetooth Phone.”  
Auto: The unit informs you of the arrival of a message by ringing and  
displaying Receiving Message. To read the message, press ENT  
(☞ [87]).  
Manual: The unit does not inform you of the arrival of a message.  
Only for the device being connected for “Bluetooth Phone.”  
Adjust microphone volume connected to the Bluetooth adapter.  
Microphone  
Level*4  
1
,
2
,
3
The Bluetooth software and hardware version is shown.  
Version  
*1 Selectable items vary depending on the connected device.  
*2 Selectable only when the device is compatible with text message.  
*3 Also available in Modein AV Menufor Bluetooth Audio.  
*4 Not selectable for New Device.  
The Bluetooth word mark and logos are  
Bluetooth Information:  
If you wish to receive more information about  
Bluetooth, visit our JVC web site.  
owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any  
use of such marks by Victor Company of  
Japan, Limited (JVC) is under licence. Other  
trademarks and trade names are those of their  
respective owners.  
Using Bluetooth devices 89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AV Menu items  
☞ [12] for the detailed Menu operations.  
AV Menu  
Setup  
EQ  
1/2  
2/2  
Setup  
1/2  
Display  
Clock  
Disc  
Tuner  
Input  
Sound  
Screen Control  
Aspect  
AV Menu  
Setup  
Others  
2/2  
Mode  
List  
Record/Copy  
Edit  
Title Entry  
Menu items  
Selectable settings  
(Initial setting)  
Language*1  
English US, Español, Français  
Demonstration  
Off: Cancels.  
On: Activates the demonstration on the monitor.  
You can select the background picture of the monitor.  
Default, Digital, Midnight, Sunset, Gauges,  
Sunrise, Nucleus, Carbon, Tunnels, Orbit,  
Shadow, Forest  
Wall Paper  
Scroll  
Off: Cancels.  
Once: Scrolls the display information once.  
Auto: Repeats scrolling (5-second intervals).  
• Holding DISP scrolls the information regardless of this  
setting.  
Tag Display  
Dimmer  
Off: Cancels.  
On: Shows the Tag data while playing MP3/WMA/WAV  
tracks on discs or on HDD.  
Off: Cancels.  
On: Activates dimmer.  
*2  
Auto  
:
Dims the monitor when you turn on the headlights.  
Time Set: Set the time to switch the day/night screen.  
• When you choose Time Set, set the switching time on  
the following screen.  
*1 This setting is shared with the Languagesetting in Setup Menu (☞ [46]  
)
*2 The ILLUMINATION CONTROL lead connection is required. ( Installation/Connection Manual)  
☞
90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu items  
Selectable settings  
12Hours 24Hours  
(Initial setting)  
Time Format  
Time Zone  
,
Alaska, Pacific, Mountain, Central, Eastern,  
Atlantic, Newfoundland  
DST (Daylight Saving  
Time)  
Activate this if your residential area is subject to DST.  
Off: Cancels.  
Auto: Automatically applies DST when necessary.  
Menu Language*4  
Select the initial disc menu language (☞ also [97]).  
(
English)  
Audio Language*4  
Subtitle*4  
Select the initial audio language (☞ also [97]). (English)  
Select the initial subtitle language or erase the subtitle (Off  
(☞ also [97]).  
)
Select the on-screen language used for the external monitor  
connected to the VIDEO OUT plug. (English  
OSD Language  
Monitor Type  
)
Select the monitor type to watch a wide screen picture.  
16:9: Select when the aspect ratio of the external monitor  
is 16:9.  
16:9  
4:3 Letter Box  
4:3 Letter Box/4:3 Pan Scan: Select when the  
aspect ratio of the external monitor is 4:3. Refer to the  
illustrations on the left to see how the pictures are shown  
on the monitor.  
4:3 Pan Scan  
Select the position of the on-screen bar. ☞ [68]  
OSD Position  
1
2
: Higher position  
: Lower position  
Position 1 Position 2  
Select playback file type when a disc contains different  
types of files.  
File Type  
Audio: Plays back audio files.  
Still Picture: Plays back JPEG files.  
Video: Plays back DivX/MPEG files.  
*3 Adjustable only while the source is set to DISC and playback is stopped.  
*4 After you change these settings, turn off then on the power so that your setting takes effect.  
AV Menu items 91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu items  
Selectable settings  
(Initial setting)  
Select the signal format to be emitted through the  
DIGITAL OUT (Optical) terminal on the rear. For details,  
☞ [106].  
D. Audio Output  
Off: No signal is output from the terminal.  
PCM Only: Select this when connecting an amplifier or a  
decoder incompatible with Dolby Digital, DTS or MPEG  
Audio, or connecting to a recording device.  
Dolby Digital/PCM: Select this when connecting an  
amplifier or a decoder compatible with Dolby Digital.  
Stream/PCM: Select this when connecting an amplifier  
or a decoder compatible with Dolby Digital, DTS, and  
MPEG Audio.  
When playing back a multi-channel DVD disc, this setting  
affects the signals reproduced through the LINE OUT jacks  
(and through the DIGITAL OUT terminal when PCM  
Only is selected for D. Audio Output).  
Down Mix  
Surround Compat.: Select this when you want to enjoy  
multichannel surround audio by connecting an amplifier  
compatible with Dolby Surround to this receiver.  
Stereo: Normally select this.  
You can enjoy a powerful sound at a low volume level  
while playing Dolby Digital software.  
Auto: Select to apply the effect to multi-channel encoded  
software.  
D. Range Comp.  
On: Select to always use this function.  
This unit has its own Registration Code. Once you  
have played back a disc in which the Registration Code  
recorded, this unit’s Registration Code is overwritten for  
copyright protection.  
DivX Registration  
Select the format of video output according to the color  
system of your external monitor.  
Video Output Format  
• The color system of the unit’s display is also changed.  
Picture quality on the main unit’s display may deteriorate  
when you select PAL  
.
NTSC PAL  
,
92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu items  
Selectable settings  
(Initial setting)  
IF Band Width  
Auto: Increases the tuner selectivity to reduce interference  
noises between adjacent stations. (Stereo effect may be  
lost.)  
Wide: Subject to the interference from adjacent stations,  
but sound quality will not be degraded and the stereo  
effect will remain.  
Area Setting  
US: When using in North/Central/South America. AM/FM  
intervals are set to 10 kHz/200 kHz.  
Europe: When using in any other areas. AM/FM intervals  
are set to 9 kHz/50 kHz (100 kHz during auto search).  
South America: When using in South American  
countries where FM interval is 100 kHz. AM interval is  
set to 10 kHz.  
SIRIUS ID*5  
Your SIRIUS identification number appears on the  
monitor.  
External Input*6  
When connecting an external component to the CD  
changer jack on the rear.  
Changer: CD changer, iPod, or D. player.  
Ext Input: Any other than the above.  
• For connecting the satellite radio tuner or the Bluetooth  
Adapter, this setting is not required. It is automatically  
detected.  
Video Input*7  
You can determine the use of the VIDEO IN plug. ☞ [82]  
Off: Select if no component is connected. (Video input is  
skipped while changing the display with DISP key.)  
Video: Select when connecting an AV component such as  
VCR.  
Camera: Select when connecting a camera.  
*5 Appears only when a SIRIUS tuner is connected.  
*6 Not selectable when the component connected to the CD changer jack is selected as the source.  
*7 Not selectable when “EXT-IN” is selected as the source.  
AV Menu items 93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu items  
Interlock  
Selectable settings  
(Initial setting)  
Off: Cancels.  
Reverse: Automatically switch to the camera view when  
*8  
the gear is shifted into reverse.  
Low Speed: Automatically switch to the camera view  
*9  
when your car slows down.  
Horizontal adjustment is required according to how you  
would like to see the picture on the monitor. Vertical  
adjustment is required according to how you have installed  
your camera.  
Horizontal/  
Vertical  
Horizontal: Normal  
Horizontal: Reverse  
Vertical:  
Normal  
Vertical:  
Reverse  
Video Format*10  
Select the format of video input according to the color  
system of the component connected to the VIDEO IN  
plug.  
NTSC PAL  
,
Beep  
Off: Cancels.  
On: Activates the key-touch tone.  
You can mute the sound of the System (AV source sounds  
and voice guidance) while you talk on the cellular phone.  
Off: Cancels.  
Telephone Muting  
Muting1 Muting2: Select either one which mute the  
,
*11  
sounds while using the cellular phone.  
Select either of the two which indicates your gear direction  
correctly.  
Reverse Polarization  
Connection*12  
GND Battery  
,
You can check the connection status.  
*8 Reverse lamp lead connection is required. (  
☞
Installation/Connection Manual)  
Installation/Connection Manual)  
*10 Not selectable when Video Inputis set to Off.  
*11 The TEL MUTING lead connection is required. ( Installation/Connection Manual)  
*9 Speed signal lead connection is required. (  
☞
☞
*12 This shows the same information as Connectionin the Information Menu (☞ [43]).  
94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu items  
EQ  
Selectable settings  
(Initial setting)  
Flat, Hard Rock, R&B, Pop, Jazz, Dance Music,  
Country, Reggae, Classic, User 1, User 2,  
User 3 ☞ [98]  
Adjust fader—speaker output balance between the front  
and rear speakers. (00  
F06: front only  
Fader/Balance  
)
Fader/Balance  
R06: rear only  
F02  
Exit  
• When using a two-speaker system, set the fader to the  
center (00).  
L02  
Adjust balance—speaker output balance between the left  
and right speakers. (00  
L06: left only  
)
R06: right only  
Adjust and store auto-adjustment volume level for each  
source, comparing to the FM volume level. The volume  
level will automatically increase or decrease when you  
change the source.  
Volume Adjust  
–12 to +12 (00)  
Adjust the settings below in the submenu:  
Subwoofer  
•
Phase: Subwoofer phase. Select either Normal or  
Reverse, which reproduces a better sound.  
•
Level: Subwoofer output level. 00 to 08 (04)  
High Pass Filter  
Crossover  
Through: Select when the subwoofer is not connected.  
On: Select when the subwoofer is connected.  
Adjust the crossover frequency between the front/rear  
speakers and the subwoofer.  
55 Hz, 85 Hz, 125 Hz  
You can change the maximum volume level of this  
receiver.  
Amplifier Gain  
Amplifier Off: Deactivates the built-in amplifier.  
Low Power: Volume 00 to 30 (Select this if the maximum  
power of the speakers is less than 50 W)  
High Power: Volume 00 to 50  
AV Menu items 95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu items  
Selectable settings  
(Initial setting)  
You can adjust the monitor to make it clear and legible.  
• While picture from VIDEO IN is displayed, you can  
adjust the playback picture of VIDEO IN (Picture  
[Video]).  
• While DISC is selected as the source and playback  
picture is displayed, you can adjust the playback picture  
of DISC (Picture [Disc]).  
Screen Control/  
Picture [Disc]/  
Picture [Video]  
• For other screens than above, Screen Control  
*13  
appears.  
Bright*14: Adjust if the picture is too bright or too dark.  
Screen Control  
–15 to +15 (00)  
Color Temp.: Adjust the color temperature of the  
+03  
Exit  
picture—warmer or cooler. –15 to +15  
(
00  
)
Contrast: Adjust the contrast. –15 to +15  
(
00)  
Bright  
Tint: Adjust the tint if the human skin color is unnatural.  
–15 to +15 (00)  
•
Tint is adjustable only for VIDEO IN signal in NTSC  
and discs in NTSC.  
You can change the aspect ratio of the picture.  
Aspect ratio of incoming signal  
4:3 16:9  
Full  
:
For 16:9 original  
pictures  
Aspect [Disc]/  
Aspect [Video]  
Regular  
For 4:3 original  
pictures  
:
• For “DISC”: Aspect ratio is  
automatically selected to match  
to the incoming signals.  
Auto  
:
• For the other video sources:  
Aspect ratio is fixed to Full  
.
*13 The settings of Screen Controlare also applied to the map screen and screens of Navigation Menus.  
*14 This setting in Screen Controlis shared with Brightnesssetting in SetupMenu (☞ [44]).  
96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu items  
Selectable settings  
(Initial setting)  
Mono  
Only for FM. (Off  
Only for FM. (DX  
,
On) ☞ [54]  
DX / Local  
SSM  
,
Local) ☞ [54]  
Only for FM. ☞ [52]  
Only for disc playback, music server, CD changer and  
iPod/D. player. ☞ [64, 71, 78, 80]  
Intro/Repeat/Random  
The accessible lists differ depending on the sources.  
To record audio CDs into the music server. ☞ [72, 73]  
To copy music files into the music server. ☞ [74]  
To edit the tracks in the music server. ☞ [75]  
☞ [54, 75, 81]  
List  
Record  
Copy  
Edit  
Title Entry  
*15 For the menu items in Modefor Bluetooth Audio, ☞ [88, 89]  
.
Language codes (for DVD/DivX language selection)  
Code Language  
Code Language  
Code Language  
Code Language  
Code Language  
Afar  
Persian  
Finnish  
Fiji  
Faroese  
Frisian  
Irish  
Scots Gaelic  
Galician  
Guarani  
Gujarati  
Hausa  
Greenlandic  
Cambodian  
Kannada  
Korean (KOR)  
Kashmiri  
Kurdish  
Kirghiz  
Latin  
Lingala  
Laothian  
Lithuanian  
Latvian, Lettish  
Malagasy  
Maori  
Macedonian  
Malayalam  
Mongolian  
Moldavian  
Marathi  
Malay (MAY)  
Maltese  
Burmese  
Nauru  
Nepali  
Norwegian  
Occitan  
(Afan) Oromo  
Oriya  
Panjabi  
Polish  
Pashto, Pushto  
Portuguese  
Quechua  
Rhaeto-Romance  
Kirundi  
Rumanian  
Kinyarwanda  
Sanskrit  
Sesotho  
Sundanese  
Swahili  
Tamil  
Telugu  
Tajik  
AA  
AB  
AF  
AM  
AR  
AS  
AY  
AZ  
BA  
BE  
BG  
BH  
BI  
BN  
BO  
BR  
CA  
CO  
CS  
CY  
DZ  
EL  
FA  
FI  
KL  
OC  
OM  
OR  
PA  
PL  
PS  
PT  
QU  
RM  
RN  
RO  
RW  
SA  
SD  
SG  
SH  
SI  
ST  
SU  
SW  
TA  
TE  
TG  
TH  
TI  
Abkhazian  
Afrikaans  
Ameharic  
Arabic  
Assamese  
Aymara  
Azerbaijani  
Bashkir  
Byelorussian  
Bulgarian  
Bihari  
Bislama  
Bengali, Bangla  
Tibetan  
Breton  
Catalan  
Corsican  
Czech  
Welsh  
Bhutani  
Greek  
Esperanto  
Estonian  
Basque  
KM  
KN  
KO  
KS  
KU  
KY  
LA  
LN  
LO  
LT  
LV  
MG  
MI  
MK  
ML  
MN  
MO  
MR  
MS  
MT  
MY  
NA  
NE  
NO  
FJ  
FO  
FY  
GA  
GD  
GL  
GN  
GU  
HA  
HI  
HR  
HU  
HY  
IA  
IE  
IK  
Thai  
Tigrinya  
Turkmen  
Tagalog  
Setswana  
Tonga  
Turkish  
Tsonga  
Tatar  
TK  
TL  
TN  
TO  
TR  
TS  
TT  
TW  
UK  
UR  
UZ  
VI  
VO  
WO  
XH  
YO  
ZU  
Hindi  
Croatian  
Hungarian  
Armenian  
Interlingua  
Interlingue  
Inupiak  
Indonesian  
Icelandic  
Hebrew  
Yiddish  
Javanese  
Georgian  
Kazakh  
Sindhi  
Sangho  
Serbo-Croatian  
Singhalese  
Slovak  
Slovenian  
Samoan  
Shona  
Somali  
Albanian  
Serbian  
Siswati  
Twi  
Ukrainian  
Urdu  
SK  
SL  
Uzbek  
IN  
IS  
Vietnamese  
Volapuk  
Wolof  
Xhosa  
Yoruba  
Zulu  
SM  
SN  
SO  
SQ  
SR  
SS  
IW  
JI  
JW  
KA  
KK  
EO  
ET  
EU  
AV Menu items 97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sound equalization  
Selecting an equalizer type  
1
Storing your own adjustment  
You can store your adjustment into User 1  
,
User 2, and User 3  
.
2
AV Menu  
EQ  
1 Repeat steps 1 and 2 above, then  
]
in step 3...  
EQ - Flat  
Settings  
00  
EQ  
1/3  
Flat  
Hard Rock  
R&B  
Pop  
Jazz  
Frequency  
60 Hz  
Store  
Exit  
3 Select an equalizer type.  
2 Adjust.  
Select the frequency.  
Adjust the level.  
Preset equalizing values  
60 150 400  
1
2.4  
6
12  
Equalizer type  
Flat  
Hz Hz Hz kHz kHz kHz kHz  
00 00 00 00 00 00 00  
+03 +03 +01 00 00 +02 +01  
+03 +02 +02 00 +01 +01 +03  
00 +02 00 00 +01 +01 +02  
+03 +02 +01 +01 +01 +03 +02  
+04 +02 00 –02 –01 +01 +01  
+02 +01 00 00 00 +01 +02  
+03 00 00 +01 +02 +02 +03  
+02 +03 +01 00 00 +02 00  
00 00 00 00 00 00 00  
3 Store the setting into User 1  
,
User 2 or User 3  
.
Hard Rock  
R&B  
EQ - Store To  
User 1  
User 2  
User 3  
Pop  
Jazz  
Dance Music  
Country  
Reggae  
Classic  
User 1/2/3  
Store  
98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional Information  
General  
Listening to the radio  
Storing stations in memory  
• When SSM is over, all previously stored  
stations are erased and stations are stored  
newly.  
• There is a time limit for some operations.  
In this case, if no further operation is done  
for a certain period, the current operation is  
canceled.  
• By pressing SRC or MAP on the unit, you  
can also turn on the power. The map screen  
is displayed at turn-on if you press MAP, and  
an AV screen if you press SRC. If the source is  
ready, playback starts.  
• You cannot select some sources if they are not  
ready.  
• When SSM is over, received stations are  
preset in No. 1 (lowest frequency) to No. 6  
(highest frequency), and preset station No. 1  
is tuned in.  
• When storing a station manually, a previously  
preset station is erased when a new station is  
stored in the same preset number.  
– SAT/CD-CH: cannot be selected without  
connecting the target source component.  
– DISC: cannot be selected if a disc is not in  
the loading slot.  
– EXT-IN: cannot be selected without  
selecting Ext Input for the External  
Input setting. (☞ [93])  
Satellite radio operations  
• You can also connect the JVC SIRIUS radio  
PnP (Plug and Play), using the JVC SIRIUS  
radio adapter, KS-U100K (not supplied) to  
the CD changer jack on the rear.  
By turning on/off the power of the unit, you  
can turn on/off the JVC PnP. However, you  
cannot control it from this unit.  
• To know more about SIRIUS Satellite radio or  
to sign up, visit <http://www.sirius.com>.  
• For the latest channel listings and  
programming information, or to sign up  
for XM Satellite radio, visit <http://www.  
xmradio.com>.  
– Bluetooth Audio: cannot be selected if a  
Bluetooth adapter is not connected.  
• If you turn off the power while DISC is  
selected as the source, disc play will start  
automatically next time you turn on the  
power.  
• The voltage and the speed on the vehicle  
information screen may be different from the  
actual values.  
Download from Www.SomanuaSlso.cuonmd. Aelql uMaanliuzaaltsioSnea/rcAhdAdnidtioDnowanl lionafdo.rmation 99  
Playing Recordable/Rewritable discs  
• This unit can recognize a total of 3 500 files  
and 250 folders (a maximum of 999 files per  
folder).  
• If no playable files are recorded in a folder, the  
folder will not be recognized.  
Disc operations  
General  
• In this manual, words “track” and “file” are  
interchangeably used.  
• This unit can also play back 8 cm discs.  
• This unit can only play back audio CD  
(CD-DA) files if different type of files are  
recorded in the same disc.  
• On some discs, the actual operations may  
be different from what is explained in this  
manual.  
• This unit can display only one-byte  
characters. No other characters can be  
correctly displayed.  
• Reverse search stops automatically when it  
reaches the beginning of the disc. Playback  
resumes at normal speed.  
• No sound comes out during slow motion  
playback. When playing a VCD, reverse slow  
motion playback is prohibited.  
• When playing a DVD/VCD, no sound comes  
out during Search.  
• For some DVDs and VCDs, changing the  
subtitle language, audio language (or audio  
channel) without using the disc menu is  
prohibited.  
• Use only “finalized” discs.  
• This unit can play back multi-session discs;  
however, unclosed sessions will be skipped  
while playing.  
• This unit may be unable to play back some  
discs or files due to their characteristics or  
recording conditions.  
• This unit can recognize a total 25 characters  
for file/folder names.  
• For DVD-R/DVD-RW: This receiver can  
play only discs recorded in the DVD-Video  
format. (Discs recorded in the DVD-VR  
format cannot be played.)  
• DVD-RWs or CD-RWs may require a longer  
readout time since the reflectance of DVD-  
RW and CD-RW is lower than that of regular  
discs.  
• Do not use discs on which labels can be  
directly printed by an ink jet printer. Using  
these discs under high temperatures or high  
humidity may cause malfunctions or damages  
to discs.  
Inserting a disc  
• When a disc is inserted upside down, Disc  
Error appears on the monitor. Eject the disc.  
Playing DivX files  
• This unit can play back DivX files with  
the extension code <.divx>, <.div>, <.avi>  
(regardless of the letter case—upper/lower).  
• This unit supports the DivX files whose  
resolution is 720 x 576 pixels or less.  
• This unit supports DivX 6.x, 5.x, 4.x, and 3.11.  
• Audio stream should conform to MP3 or  
Dolby Digital.  
Ejecting a disc  
• If the ejected disc is not removed within  
15 seconds, the disc is automatically inserted  
again into the loading slot to protect it from  
dust.  
• If the control panel is left open for a while, it  
closes automatically.  
Changing the source  
• If you change the source, playback also stops  
without ejecting the disc.  
Next time you select “DISC” for the playback  
source, disc play starts from where it has been  
stopped previously.  
• When a disc has been loaded, selecting  
“DISC” for the playback source starts disc  
play.  
• This unit does not support GMC (Global  
Motion Compression).  
• The file encoded in the interlaced scanning  
mode may not be played back correctly.  
• This unit can display a unique registration  
code—DivX Video On Demand (DRM—  
Digital Rights Management). For activation  
and more detail, visit <www.divx.com/vod>.  
100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playing MPEG files  
• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR  
(variable bit rate).  
• This unit can play back MPEG files with the  
extension code <.mpg> or <.mpeg>.  
• The stream format should conform to MPEG  
system/program stream.  
• The file format should be MP@ML (Main  
Profile at Main Level)/SP@ML (Simple Profile  
at Main Level)/MP@LL (Main Profile at Low  
Level).  
• Audio streams should conform to MPEG1  
Audio Layer-2.  
Playing JPEG files  
• It is recommended that you record a file at  
640 x 480 resolution.  
• This unit can play back baseline JPEG files.  
Progressive JPEG files or lossless JPEG files  
cannot be played.  
Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in  
elapsed time indication.  
• This unit cannot play back the following files  
and skips them when playing back files:  
– MP3 files encoded with MP3i and  
MP3 PRO format.  
– MP3 files encoded in an unappropriated  
format.  
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.  
– WMA files encoded with lossless,  
professional, and voice format.  
– WMA files which are not based upon  
Windows Media® Audio.  
– WMA DRM (Digital Rights  
Management).  
– Files which have the data such as AIFF,  
ATRAC3, etc.  
– WMA files encoded with MBR (Multiple  
Bit Rate) format.  
– AAC files.  
– OGG files.  
Playing MP3/WMA/WAV files  
• This unit can play back files with the  
extension code <.mp3>, <.wma>, or <.wav>  
(regardless of the letter case—upper/lower).  
• This unit can show ID3 Tag Version  
1.0/1.1/2.2/2.3/2.4 (for MP3). This unit can  
also show WAV Tag and WMA Tag.  
• This unit can play back the files meeting the  
conditions below:  
– Bit rate: MP3/WMA: 32 kbps - 320 kbps  
– Sampling frequency:  
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG1)  
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG2)  
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for WMA)  
44.1 kHz (for WAV)  
– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/ Level 2,  
Romeo, Joliet, Windows long file name  
Additional information 101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
On-screen guide icons  
During play, the following guide icons may  
appear for a while on the monitor.  
Control screen  
• The following control screens appear only  
on the external monitor.  
Appears at the beginning of a scene  
containing multi-subtitle languages  
(for DVD only).  
DivX/MPEG/JPEG/MP3/WMA/WAV  
Appears at the beginning of a scene  
containing multi-audio languages (for  
DVD only).  
Appears at the beginning of a scene  
containing multi-angle views (for DVD  
only).  
T. RPT  
TIME 00:00:14  
Folder :  
2 / 3  
Track : 6 / 14 (Total 41)  
01 Music  
02 Music  
03 Music  
Cloudy.mp3  
Fair.mp3  
Fog.mp3  
Hail.wma  
Indian summer.mp3  
Rain.mp3  
Shower.mp3  
Snow.mp3  
Thunder.wma  
Typhoon.mp3  
Wind.mp3  
Track Information  
Album  
Weather  
Artist  
Robert M. Smith  
Title  
Rain  
Playback  
Pause  
Winter sky.mp3  
Forward slow motion playback (for  
DVD and VCD only)  
Reverse slow motion playback (for  
DVD only)  
Forward search  
Reverse search  
1
2
3
4
5
Current folder (highlighted bar)  
Current folder number/total folder number  
Folder list  
Selected playback mode  
Elapsed playing time of the current track (not  
displayed for JPEG)  
6
7
Operation status  
Current track number/total number of tracks  
in the current folder (total number of tracks  
on the disc)  
8
9
p
Track information (only for MP3/WMA/WAV)  
Track list  
Current track (highlighted)  
CD  
TIME  
00:14  
T. RPT  
Track : 6 / 14  
Cloudy  
Fair  
Fog  
Hail  
Indian summer  
Rain  
Shower  
Snow  
Thunder  
Typhoon  
Wind  
Track Information  
Album  
Four seasons  
Artist  
Robert M. Smith  
Title  
Winter sky  
Rain  
1
2
3
4
Selected playback mode  
Elapsed playing time of the current track  
Operation status  
Current track number/total number of tracks  
on the disc  
Track information  
5
6
7
Track list  
Current track (highlighted bar)  
102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Music server operations  
iPod/D. player operations  
• Sound quality may deteriorate if you select  
Normal Quality for recording mode.  
• While recording, recorded sounds are  
reproduced from the speakers. When  
recording is stopped, CD original sounds are  
reproduced.  
• When you turn on this unit, the iPod or  
D. player is charged through this unit.  
• The text information may not be displayed  
correctly. This unit can display up to 40  
characters.  
• The items in the player’s top menu are as  
follows:  
• You cannot change the source while recording  
or copying tracks.  
For iPod:  
• This system uses SCMS (Serial Copy  
Management System) which allows only  
first-generation digital copies to be made of  
premastered software such as regular CDs. If  
you try to record from a duplicated CD-R/  
-RW, SCMS Cannot Copy may appear on  
the display then recording will be cancelled.  
• Text data in the CD Text cannot be recorded  
into the HDD.  
Playlists Ô Artists Ô Albums Ô Songs  
Ô Genres Ô Composers Ô (back to  
the beginning)  
For D. player:  
Playlist Ô Artist Ô Album Ô Genre  
Ô Track Ô (back to the beginning)  
Notice:  
When operating an iPod or a D. player, some  
operations may not be performed correctly  
or as intended. In this case, visit the following  
JVC web site:  
• Play time indication may advance unstably  
on the monitor while recording. This is not a  
malfunction of this unit.  
For iPod users: <http://www.jvc.co.jp/  
english/car/support/ks-pd100/index.html>  
For D. player users: <http://www.jvc.co.jp/  
english/car/support/ks-pd500/index.html>  
• You cannot edit the Tag data of tracks in the  
HDD.  
• While the System is moving, rearranging or  
deleting items in the library, no sound comes  
out, and you cannot change the playback  
source.  
• When you move, rearrange or delete items in  
the llibrary, the playback mode is canceled.  
Additional information 103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Bluetooth devices  
AV Menu items  
General  
• If you change the Amplifier Gain setting  
from High Power to Low Power while the  
volume level is set higher than 30, the unit  
automatically changes the volume level to  
• While driving, do not perform complicated  
operation such as dialing the numbers, using  
phone book, etc. When you perform these  
operations, stop your car in a safe place.  
• Some Bluetooth devices may not be connected  
to this unit depending on the Bluetooth  
version of the device.  
• This unit may not work for some Bluetooth  
devices.  
• Connecting condition may vary depending on  
circumstances around you.  
Volume 30  
.
• After you change any of Menu Language  
/
Audio Language  
/
Subtitle settings, turn  
off then on the power, and re-insert the disc  
(or insert another disc) so that your setting  
takes effect.  
• When the language you have selected is not  
recorded on a disc, the original language is  
automatically used as the initial language. In  
addition, for some discs, the initial languages  
settings will not work as you set due to their  
internal disc programming.  
• When you select 16:9 for a picture whose  
aspect ratio is 4:3, the picture slightly changes  
due to the process for converting the picture  
width.  
• When the unit is turned off, the device is  
disconnected.  
Icons for phone types  
• These icons indicate the phone type set on the  
device.  
: Cellular phone  
: Household phone  
: Office  
• Even if 4:3 Pan Scan is selected, the screen  
size may become 4:3 Letter Box for some  
discs.  
: General  
: Other than above  
Warning messages for Bluetooth operations  
•
Connection Error : The device is registered  
but the connection has failed. Use Connect  
to connect the device again. (☞ [85])  
Error : Try the operation again. If Error  
appears again, check if the device supports the  
function you have tried.  
•
•
•
•
Device Unfound : No available Bluetooth  
device is detected by Search  
.
Loading : The unit is updating the phone  
book and/or a text message.  
Please Wait... : The unit is preparing to  
use the Bluetooth function. If the message  
does not disappear, turn off and turn on the  
unit, then connect the device again (or reset  
the unit).  
•
Reset 08 : Check the connection between  
the adapter and this unit.  
104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Inputting characters  
Checkbox operations  
Ex.:  
Ex.:  
- Input Genre Name -  
Select Track  
Select All  
Track 1  
1/3  
Track 2  
Track 3  
Track 4  
Check  
Del More Store  
To select an item in the list  
Enter a space  
Move the cursor  
Display other keyboards  
Delete a character  
• Each time you press ENT, the checkbox  
alternates between checked (selected) and  
not checked (not selected).  
Select a character on the  
keyboard  
To select all the items in the list  
Select Select All and press ENT.  
• When you have selected all the items, the  
top item in the list changes to Deselect  
All. To remove all the item from  
selection, select Deselect All and press  
ENT.  
Enter the selected character  
To display other keyboards  
• Each time you press the button, the  
keyboard changes cyclically. By pressing  
and holding the button, you can change  
the keyboards in the reverse direction.  
Characters available for word entry  
In addition to the roman alphabet (A – Z, a – z),  
the following characters can be used to input  
various information.  
To delete all the characters  
Select Del and hold ENT.  
• While driving at a speed greater than 6 mi/h  
(10 km/h), operations of inputting are  
prohibited.  
space  
Additional information 105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About sounds reproduced through the rear terminals  
• Through the analog terminals (Speaker out/LINE OUT):  
2-channel signal is emitted. When playing a multi-channel encoded disc, multi-channel signals are  
downmixed. (☞ [92] Down Mix.)  
• Through DIGITAL OUT (optical):  
Digital signals (Linear PCM, Dolby Digital, DTS, MPEG Audio) are emitted through this terminal.  
To reproduce multi-channel sounds such as Dolby Digital, DTS, and MPEG Audio, connect an  
amplifier or a decoder compatible with these multi-channel sources to this terminal, and set D.  
Audio Output correctly. (☞ below.)  
Output signals through the DIGITAL OUT terminal  
Output signals are different depending on the D. Audio Output setting (☞ [92]).  
D. Audio Output  
Dolby Digital/  
PCM Only  
Stream/PCM  
PCM  
Playback disc  
48 kHz, 16/20/24 bits  
Linear PCM  
48 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM*  
48 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM  
96 kHz, Linear PCM  
DVD  
Video  
48 kHz, 16 bits stereo  
Linear PCM  
48 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM  
48 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM  
with Dolby Digital  
Dolby Digital bitstream  
with DTS  
with MPEG Audio  
DTS bitstream  
MPEG bitstream  
44.1/88.2/176.4 kHz,  
16/20/24 bits Linear  
PCM  
44.1 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM  
48/96/192 kHz,  
16/20/24 bits Linear  
PCM  
DVD  
Audio  
48 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM  
48 kHz, 16 bits stereo  
Linear PCM  
with Dolby Digital  
with DTS  
Dolby Digital bitstream  
48 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM  
DTS bitstream  
44.1 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM  
48 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM  
48 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM  
48 kHz, 16 bits stereo  
Linear PCM  
Audio CD, Video CD  
Audio CD with DTS  
with Dolby Digital  
DTS bitstream  
Dolby Digital bitstream  
DivX  
with MPEG Audio  
MPEG  
MP3/WMA  
WAV  
32/44.1/48 kHz, 16 bits Linear PCM  
44.1/48 kHz, 16 bits Linear PCM  
32/44.1/48 kHz, 16 bits Linear PCM  
44.1 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM  
*
While playing some DVDs, digital signals may be emitted at 20 bits or 24 bits (at their original bit rate) through the  
DIGITAL OUT terminal if the discs are not copy-protected.  
106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Information  
108 Maintenance  
109 Troubleshooting  
117 Specifications  
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance  
How to clean the connectors  
Frequent detachment will deteriorate the  
connectors.  
To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe  
the connectors with a cotton swab or cloth  
moistened with alcohol, being careful not to  
damage the connectors.  
How to handle discs  
Center  
holder  
When removing a disc from its  
case, press down the center holder  
of the case and lift the disc out,  
holding it by the edges.  
• Always hold the disc by the  
edges. Do not touch its recording surface.  
When storing a disc into its case, gently insert  
the disc around the center holder (with the  
printed surface facing up).  
• Make sure to store discs into the cases after  
use.  
To keep discs clean  
A dirty disc may not play correctly.  
If a disc does become dirty, wipe it  
with a soft cloth in a straight line  
from center to edge.  
Connectors  
• Do not use any solvent (for  
example, conventional record cleaner, spray,  
thinner, benzine, etc.) to clean discs.  
Moisture condensation  
Moisture may condense on the lens inside the  
DVD/CD player in the following cases:  
• After starting the heater in the car.  
• If it becomes very humid inside the car.  
Should this occur, the DVD/CD player may  
malfunction. In this case, eject the disc and  
leave the unit turned on for a few hours until  
the moisture evaporates.  
To play new discs  
New discs may have some rough  
spots around the inner and outer  
edges. If such a disc is used, this  
unit may reject the disc.  
To remove these rough spots, rub  
the edges with a pencil or ball-point pen, etc.  
To clean the unit  
When the unit is very dirty, wipe with a  
well-wrung cloth dipped in a kitchen cleanser  
(neutral) thinned by water and then go over the  
same surface with a dry cloth.  
(Since there is the possibility of water drops  
getting inside of the unit, do not directly apply  
cleanser to the surface.)  
Do not use the following discs:  
Warped disc  
Sticker  
Sticker residue  
Stick-on label  
108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service  
center.  
Symptoms  
Causes/Remedies  
Some operations are prohibited without the  
parking brake engaged. Park the car in a safe place  
before the operations.  
•
Parking Brake appears on the  
monitor.  
• Sound cannot be heard from the  
speakers.  
• Adjust the volume to the optimum level.  
• Check the cords and connections.  
• The monitor is not clear and legible for Sunshine from the windshield may cause this  
watching the playback picture or the  
map.  
symptom. Adjust Bright and Contrast of  
Screen Control. (☞ [96]).  
The internal temperature is too low. Leave the  
power on, and wait until the internal temperature  
rises and the indication goes off.  
•
•
Low Temperature/HDD Warming  
Up appears and some functions do not  
work properly.  
Something is blocking the control panel  
movement. Remove the obstacle, then reset the  
unit (☞ [4]).  
• If this does not work, check if the installation  
has been correctly done.  
Push Reset appears on the display,  
and the control panel movement is  
freezed.  
• The unit does not work at all.  
Reset the unit (☞ [4]).  
• Cannot operate some functions of an  
AV source on the map screen.  
On the map screen, you can operate only some  
limited functions of the current source. Press SRC  
to display the AV screen and operate the source.  
• Cannot operate AV sources with the  
remote controller on the map screen.  
On the map screen, 4¢5∞ keys of the  
remote controller always works for scrolling the  
map.  
• Route calculation seems to have  
stopped.  
Route calculation may take long depending on the  
route. Wait for a while.  
• Navigation voice cannot be heard from Guidance voice level is set to the minimum level.  
the speakers.  
Adjust it to the optimum level. (☞ [43])  
• Voice guidance are not heard while  
viewing an AV screen.  
Interruption is set to Off. Set it to On to allow  
the voice guidance interrupt the AV source. (☞  
[44])  
• The voice guidance does not come out  
from the speaker on the driver’s side.  
Change the Output Channel setting. (☞ [43])  
• Cannot scroll the map to northeast, etc.  
To scroll to northeast, you need to press 5 and  
¢ at the same time.  
Maintenance / Troubleshooting 109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Symptoms  
Causes/Remedies  
• Navigation guidance is incorrect.  
Installation angle setting is not correct. Set it  
correctly. (☞ [46])  
• Navigation guidance is sometimes  
incorrect.  
Reversing signal/speed signal wires are not  
connected. Connect them correctly (☞  
Installation/Connection Manual—separate  
volume).  
• Navigation guidance is hard to listen to. Surround noise interferes. Increase the voice  
cruise level. (☞ [44])  
Failed to calculate the route. Select another  
destination/via point.  
•
•
Route Calculation Error. appears  
on the monitor.  
Valid information is not available in the database.  
Search for another place.  
City not found.  
not found. Valid information not  
found. Coordinate information  
,
Street/Center  
,
,
not found. or Street not found.  
appears on the monitor.  
This is not a malfunction. The system may also  
search areas around the selected city/state.  
• A POI found using Category in the  
Destination Menu is not within the  
selected city/state.  
You tried to save a route in an existing name.  
Select another name.  
•
•
•
•
The route name already exists.  
appears on the monitor.  
Delete some routes and save the new one.  
No valid traffic information is available now.  
Check your PIN code and input correct one.  
No space to store the new  
route. appears on the monitor.  
There are no valid traffic  
information. appears on the monitor.  
PIN code error. appears when trying  
to subscribe to traffic service.  
110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Symptoms  
Causes/Remedies  
• SSM automatic presetting does not  
work.  
Store stations manually (☞ [53]).  
• Static noise while listening to the radio. Connect the antenna firmly.  
Start subscribing to SIRIUS Satellite Radio (☞  
[55]).  
•
•
•
•
CALL 1-888-539-SIRIUS TO  
SUBSCRIBE appears on the monitor.  
Move to an area where signals are stronger.  
No Signal or NO SIGNAL appears on  
the monitor.  
Connect the antenna firmly.  
No Antenna or CHECK ANTENNA  
appears on the monitor.  
No broadcast on the selected channel.  
Select another channel or continue listening to the  
previous channel.  
Invalid Channel appears on the  
monitor for about 5 seconds, then  
returns to the previous display when  
listening to the SIRIUS Satellite radio.  
Selected channel is no longer available or is  
unauthorized. Select another channel or continue  
listening to the previous channel.  
•
CHANNEL– – – appears on the  
display for about 2 seconds, then  
returns to the previous channel while  
listening to the XM Satellite radio.  
No text information for the selected channel.  
•
•
NO NAME appears on the monitor.  
The unit is updating the channel information and  
it takes a few minutes to complete.  
Channels Updating XX%  
completed (for SIRIUS) or  
UPDATING (for XM) appear son the  
monitor.  
Selected channel is not broadcasting at this time.  
Select another channel or continue listening to the  
previous channel.  
The unit is loading the channel information  
and audio. Text information are temporarily  
unavailable.  
•
•
•
OFF AIR appears on the display while  
listening to the XM Satellite Radio.  
LOADING appears on the display  
while listening to the XM Satellite  
Radio.  
Reconnect this unit and the Satellite Radio  
correctly and reset this unit.  
Reset 08 appears on the display.  
• Satellite Radio does not work at all.  
Reconnect the Satellite radio after a few seconds.  
• Disc can be neither recognized nor  
played.  
Eject the disc forcibly (☞ [4]).  
• Disc cannot be ejected.  
Unlock the disc (☞ [65]).  
• Recordable/Rewritable discs cannot be • Insert a finalized disc.  
played back.  
• Tracks on the Recordable/Rewritable  
discs cannot be skipped.  
• Finalize the discs with the component which  
you used for recording.  
Troubleshooting 111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Symptoms  
Causes/Remedies  
The format of the disc is supported.  
Insert the disc correctly again.  
•
•
•
Not Support appears on the monitor.  
Disc Error appears on the monitor.  
The player may have malfunctioned. Eject the disc  
forcibly.  
Eject Error or Loading Error  
appears on the monitor.  
• Sound and pictures are sometimes  
interrupted or distorted.  
• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.  
• Change the disc.  
• No playback picture appears on the  
monitor.  
Parking brake wire is not connected properly. (☞  
Installation/Connection Manual.)  
• No sound is heard while playing back a Some DVD Audios prohibit downmixed output.  
DVD Audio.  
When you play back such a disc, the unit plays  
back the right front and left front signals only.  
Region code is not correct (☞ [61]).  
•
Region Code Error appears on the  
monitor when you insert a DVD Video.  
• Disc cannot be played back.  
• Change the disc.  
• Record the tracks using a compliant application  
in the appropriate discs (☞ [61]).  
• Add appropriate extension codes to the file  
names.  
• WMA track cannot be played back, and The track is copy-protected with DRM.  
skipped.  
• Noise is generated.  
The track played back is not a playable file. Skip to  
another file.  
• Tracks are not played back as you have Playback order may differ from the one played  
intended.  
back using other players.  
• A longer readout time is required.  
Readout time varies due to the complexity of the  
folder/file configuration. Do not use too many  
hierarchies and folders.  
• Elapsed playing time is not correct.  
This sometimes occurs during playback. This is  
caused by how the tracks are recorded.  
• Correct characters are not displayed  
(e.g. album name).  
This unit can only display alphabets (A – Z, a  
– z), numbers, and a limited number of symbols  
and some accented letters. Available characters ☞  
[105]  
Insert a disc that contains tracks of proper  
formats.  
•
No Files appears on the monitor.  
112  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Symptoms  
Causes/Remedies  
• Sound does not come out while  
copying music files.  
This is not a malfunction.  
• Sound does not come out in the map  
screen while recording a CD.  
This is not a malfunction.  
• Cannot change the source while  
recording/copying.  
This is not a malfunction. If you want to enjoy  
another source, cancel recording/copying and  
change the source.  
• Edited track name is not displayed.  
Tag information instead of the track name is  
displayed. Set Tag Display to Off to display the  
track name. (☞ [90])  
No track is stored in the HDD.  
•
•
No Music appears on the monitor.  
The selected item contains no tracks/albums.  
Select another.  
No Track or No Album appears on  
the monitor.  
The selected album is full. Select another album.  
•
•
Cannot record tracks over. or  
Cannot copy tracks over. appears  
on the monitor.  
Record only xx/XX tracks. or  
Copy only xx/XX tracks. appears  
on the monitor.  
The selected album cannot contain all the  
tracks you wanted to record/copy. Press ENT to  
continue recording/copying, or press BACK to  
select another album.  
The selected album/genre cannot contain all the  
items you wanted to move. Press ENT to continue  
moving the items, or press BACK to select  
another album/genre.  
•
Move only xx/XX tracks? or  
Move only xx/XX albums?  
appears on the monitor.  
The capacity of the target storage you have  
selected is already full. Delete the unwanted items  
in the target storage to make an enough space.  
•
•
HDD Full, Track Full, Album  
Full, or Genre Full appears on the  
monitor.  
Recording is failed due to the external influences  
such as vibration, shaking of the car. Try to record  
once more while driving on a paved road. If the  
trouble still persist, consult your dealer.  
Write Error/Read Error appears  
and CD recording is canceled.  
You have tried to copy non-original disc. Copy its  
original disc.  
•
•
•
SCMS cannot Copy appears.  
The format of the track is not supported.  
Not Supported appears on the  
monitor.  
The selected track does not exist in the HDD.  
Not Playable appears on the  
monitor.  
Troubleshooting 113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Symptoms  
Causes/Remedies  
• Insert a disc into the magazine.  
• A disc is inserted upside down. Insert the disc  
correctly.  
•
No Disc appears on the monitor.  
Insert the magazine.  
•
•
•
No Magazine appears on the  
monitor.  
Disc does not include playable files. Replace the  
disc with playable files.  
Connect this unit and the CD changer correctly  
and press the reset button of the CD changer.  
No Files appears on the monitor.  
Reset 08 appears on the monitor.  
Press the reset button of the CD changer.  
Reset 01 Reset 07 appears on the  
•
–
monitor.  
• The CD changer does not work at all.  
Reset the unit (☞ [4]).  
• The iPod or D. player does not turn on • Check the connecting cable and its connection.  
or does not work.  
• Charge the battery.  
• For D. player: Update the firmware version.  
• The sound is distorted.  
Deactivate the equalizer either on this unit or the  
iPod/D. player.  
Check the connecting cable and its connection.  
•
Disconnect appears on the monitor.  
• For iPod: Playback stops.  
The headphones are disconnected during  
playback. Restart playback.  
• No sound can be heard when  
connecting an iPod nano.  
Disconnect the headphones from the iPod nano.  
• No sound can be heard.  
Disconnect the adapter from the D. player. Then,  
connect it again.  
•
•
•
•
ERROR 01 appears on the monitor  
when connecting a D. player.  
No tracks are stored. Import tracks to the iPod or  
D. player.  
No Files or No Track appears on  
the monitor.  
Disconnect the adapter from both this unit and  
iPod/D. player. Then, connect it again.  
Reset 01 Reset 07 appears on the  
–
monitor.  
Check the connection between the adapter and  
this unit.  
Reset 08 appears on the monitor.  
• The iPod’s or D. player’s controls do  
not work after disconnecting from this  
unit.  
Reset the iPod or D. player.  
114  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Symptoms  
Causes/Remedies  
• Bluetooth device does not detect the  
unit.  
This unit can be connected with one Bluetooth  
cellular phone and one Bluetooth audio device at a  
time. While connecting a device, this unit cannot  
be detected from another device. Disconnect  
currently connected device and search again.  
• The unit does not detect the Bluetooth • Check the Bluetooth setting of the device.  
device.  
• Search from the Bluetooth device. After the  
device detects the unit, select Open on the unit  
to connect the device. (☞ [84])  
• The unit does not make pairing with  
the Bluetooth device.  
• Enter the same PIN code for both the unit and  
target device.  
• Select the device name from Special Device  
,
then try to connect again. (☞ [84])  
• Echo or noise occurs.  
Adjust the microphone unit position.  
• Phone sound quality is poor.  
• Place the Bluetooth audio device nearer to the  
adapter.  
• Move the car to place where you can get a better  
signal reception.  
• The sound is interrupted or skipped  
during playback of a Bluetooth audio  
device.  
• Place the Bluetooth audio device nearer to the  
adapter.  
• Disconnect the device connected for “Bluetooth  
Phone.”  
• Turn off, then turn on the unit.  
• (When the sound is not yet restored,) connect  
the device again.  
• The connected audio device cannot be Check whether the connected audio device  
controlled.  
supports AVRCP (Audio Video Remote Control  
Profile).  
*
For Bluetooth operations, refer also to the instructions supplied with the Bluetooth Adapter.  
Troubleshooting 115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback sources  
Dolby Digital  
Compressed digital audio, developed by  
Dolby Laboratories, which enables multi-  
channel encode to create the realistic  
surround sound.  
Glossary  
Navigation System  
GPS  
Global Positioning System. By receiving the  
GPS signals from the satellites, the Navigation  
System determines the position of the car.  
DTS  
Compressed digital audio, developed by  
Digital Theater Systems, Inc., which enables  
multichannel like Dolby Digital. As the  
compression ratio is lower than for Dolby  
Digital, it provides wider dynamic range and  
better separation.  
Linear PCM  
Uncompressed digital audio, the same format  
used for CDs and most studio masters.  
POI  
Points of Interest. You can select your  
destinations by selecting from the  
categories—such as business centers,  
shopping centers.  
TMC  
Traffic Message Channel. Traffic messages  
transmitted by some VHF broadcasters via  
RDS signals. Using this data, the Navigation  
System informs you of road conditions.  
MPEG Audio  
Another compressed digital audio which also  
enables multi-channel encode to create the  
realistic surround sound.  
Via Point  
A location through which you reach your final  
destination. For this Navigation System, you  
can determine nine locations through which  
you can reach your final destination.  
On-screen guide  
While operating the built-in DVD/CD  
player, operation modes are displayed on the  
monitor. (☞ [102])  
UDF-Bridge Format  
A hybrid file system used to provide  
compatibility with ISO 9660 for accessing  
any type of files on the disc. (UDF stands for  
Universal Disk Format.)  
WMA  
Windows Media Audio. A compression  
process developed by Microsoft® for  
compressing audio data (i.e. music).  
116  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
L1, C/A code  
System & Service  
Global Positioning System  
Standard Positioning Service  
15-channel multi-channel reception system  
1 575.42 MHz  
Reception System  
Reception Frequency  
Sensitivity  
–130 dBm  
1/second, continuous  
Update Rate  
Polarization  
Right Handed Circular Polarization  
GPS Antenna  
Dimensions (approx.) 30.4 mm × 11.7 mm × 35.5 mm  
(W × H × D)  
Cable (approx.)  
(1-1/4 inches × 1/2 inch × 1-7/16 inches)  
5.0 m (16.4 feet)  
Attachment mat size  
(approx.)  
70 mm × 70 mm (2-13/16 inches ×  
2-13/16 inches)  
20 W RMS × 4  
Power Output  
Channels at 4 Ω and  
≤ 1% THD+N  
80 dBA (reference:  
1 W into 4 Ω)  
Signal to Noise Ratio  
Load Impedance  
4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)  
Frequencies  
Level  
60 Hz, 150 Hz, 400 Hz, 1 kHz, 2.4 kHz,  
6 kHz, 12 kHz  
10 dB  
Equalizer Control Range  
Line-Out Level/  
Impedance  
Audio output level  
2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)  
Output Impedance  
Signal wave length  
Output level  
1 kΩ  
660 nm  
–21 dBm to –15 dBm  
NTSC  
Digital (DIGITAL OUT:  
Optical)  
Color system  
Video output (composite)  
Video input (composite)  
Other Terminals  
1 Vp-p/75 Ω  
1 Vp-p/75 Ω  
VIDEO IN, steering wheel remote input  
Input  
Output  
VIDEO OUT, LINE OUT (FRONT),  
LINE OUT (REAR), SUBWOOFER OUT  
Others  
CD changer  
Specifications 117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FM (with channel  
interval set to 100 kHz  
or 200 kHz):  
87.5 MHz to 107.9 MHz  
Frequency Range  
FM (with channel  
87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz  
530 kHz to 1 710 kHz  
531 kHz to 1 602 kHz  
interval set to 50 kHz):  
AM (with channel  
interval set to 10 kHz):  
AM (with channel  
interval set to 9 kHz):  
Usable Sensitivity  
FM Tuner  
11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)  
16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)  
50 dB Quieting  
Sensitivity  
Alternate Channel  
Selectivity (400 kHz)  
65 dB  
Frequency Response  
Stereo Separation  
Capture Ratio  
Sensitivity  
40 Hz to 15 000 Hz  
40 dB  
1.5 dB  
20 μV  
AM Tuner  
Selectivity  
65 dB  
Non-contact optical pickup  
(semiconductor laser)  
Signal Detection System  
2 channels (stereo)  
16 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
Number of Channels  
Frequency Response  
DVD, fs=48 kHz/  
96 kHz  
DVD, fs=192 kHz  
VCD/CD  
16 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
16 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
96 dB  
Dynamic Range  
98 dB  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio  
Wow and Flutter  
Less than measurable limit  
Max. Resolution  
720 x 480 pixels (30 fps)  
720 x 576 pixels (25 fps)  
DivX  
Video  
Bit Rate  
32 Kbps – 320 Kbps  
Audio  
Sampling Frequency  
MPEG-1: 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz  
MPEG-2: 16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz  
Max. Resolution  
720 x 480 pixels (30 fps)  
720 x 576 pixels (25 fps)  
32 Kbps – 384 Kbps  
MPEG Video  
Video  
Audio  
Bit Rate  
Sampling Frequency  
MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3)  
WMA (Windows Media® Audio)  
32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz  
Max. Bit Rate: 320 Kbps  
Max. Bit Rate: 320 Kbps  
118  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
40 GB (Map data: 16 GB / Storage: 24 GB)  
HDD  
Max. Bit Rate: 320 kbps  
Max. Bit Rate: 320 kbps  
MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3)  
WMA (Windows Media® Audio)  
3.5 inch wide liquid crystal display  
Screen size  
224 640 pixels: 320 (horizontal) × 3 × 234 (vertical)  
TFT (Thin Film Transistor) active matrix format  
NTSC  
16:9 (wide)  
Number of Pixel  
Drive Method  
Color System  
Aspect Ratio  
Operating Voltage  
DC 14.4 V (11 V to 16 V allowance)  
Negative ground  
Power Requirement  
Grounding System  
–10°C to +60°C (14°F to 140°F)  
0°C to +40°C (32°F to 104°F)  
–300 m to +3 000 m (–980 feet to +9 800  
feet)  
Allowable Storage Temperature  
Allowable Operating Temperature  
Allowable Operating Altitude  
Installation Size  
182 mm × 52 mm × 158 mm  
(7-3/16 inches × 2-1/16 inches × 6-1/4  
inches)  
Dimensions (approx.)  
(W × H × D)  
Panel Size  
188 mm × 58 mm × 12 mm  
(7-7/16 inches × 2-5/16 inches × 1/2 inch)  
2.2 kg (4.9 lbs) (excluding accessories)  
Mass (approx.)  
Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.  
If a kit is necessary for your car, consult your telephone directory for the nearest car audio speciality  
shop.  
• DivX, DivX Ultra Certified, and associated  
logos are trademarks of DivX, inc. and are  
used under license.  
• Microsoft and Windows Media are either  
registered trademarks or trademarks of  
Microsoft Corporation in the United States  
and/or other countries.  
• Official DivX® Ultra Certified product  
• “DVD Logo” is a trademark of DVD Format/  
Logo Licensing Corporation registered in the  
US, Japan and other countries.  
• Manufactured under license from Dolby  
Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol  
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.  
• Plays all versions of DivX® video (including  
DivX® 6) with enhanced playback of DivX®  
media files and the DivX® Media Format  
• “DTS” is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc.  
and “DTS 2.0 + Digital Out” is a trademark of  
DTS, Inc.  
Specifications 119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Having TROUBLE with operation?  
Please reset your unit  
Refer to page of How to reset your unit  
Still having trouble??  
USA ONLY  
Call 1-800-252-5722  
http://www.jvc.com  
We can help you!  
EN, SP, FR  
© 2007 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
0107NSMMDWJEIN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
KD-NX5000  
Installation/Connection Manual  
Manual de instalación/conexión  
Manuel d’installation/raccordement  
0107NSMMDWJEIN  
EN, SP, FR  
©2007 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
LVT1627-002A  
[J]  
ENGLISH  
ESPAÑOL  
FRANÇAIS  
This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical  
systems. If your vehicle does not have this system, a voltage inverter is  
required, which can be purchased at JVC car audio dealers.  
Esta unidad está diseñada para funcionar con 12 V de CC, con sistemas  
eléctricos de masa NEGATIVA. Si su vehículo no posee este sistema,  
será necesario un inversor de tensión, que puede ser adquirido en los  
concesionarios de JVC de equipos de audio para automóviles.  
Cet appareil est conçu pour fonctionner sur des sources de courant continu de  
12 V à masse NEGATIVE. Si votre véhicule n’offre pas ce type d’alimentation,  
il vous faut un convertisseur de tension, que vous pouvez acheter chez un  
revendeur d’autoradios JVC.  
WARNINGS  
ADVERTENCIAS  
AVERTISSEMENTS  
• DO NOT install any unit in locations where:  
•
NO instale la unidad en los siguientes sitios:  
• N’INSTALLEZ aucun appareil dans les endroits suivants où:  
– il peut gêner l’utilisation du volant ou du levier de vitesse.  
– il peut gêner le fonctionnement de dispositifs de sécurité tels que les coussins  
de sécurité.  
– it may obstruct the steering wheel and gearshift lever operations.  
– it may obstruct the operation of safety devices such as air bags.  
– it may obstruct visibility.  
• DO NOT operate the unit while driving. If you need to operate the unit  
while driving, be sure to look ahead carefully.  
• The driver must not watch the monitor while driving.  
• This unit has a built-in HDD, which is a device to read minute magnetic  
changes. The inside of the device is precision components, requiring you to  
notice the following when installing the unit:  
Install the unit at a place where the following conditions are satisfied:  
– Dry and neither too hot nor too cold—between 5°C (41°F) and 35°C  
(95°F). If the temperature is too low, the HDD will not work. Wait until  
the temperature in the car becomes normal before operating the unit.  
– At an altitude between –300 m (–980 ft) below sea level and +3000 m  
(9800 ft) above sea level.  
– puede obstaculizar las maniobras del volante de dirección y de la palanca  
de cambios.  
– puede obstaculizar la operación de los dispositivos de seguridad, como  
por ejemplo, bolsas de aire.  
– il peut gêner la visibilité.  
– Donde pueda obstruir la visibilidad.  
• NE manipulez pas l’appareil quand vous conduisez. Si vous devez commander  
l’appareil pendant que vous conduisez, assurez-vous de bien regarder devant vous.  
• Le conducteur ne doit pas regarder le moniteur lorsqu’il conduit.  
• Cet appareil contient un disque dur intégré, qui est dispositif permettant de  
lire les charges magnétiques minuscules. L’intérieur de l’appareil est composé  
de dispositifs de précision, vous demandant de prendre les précautions  
suivantes lors de l’installation de l’appareil:  
Installez l’appareil dans un endroit où les conditions suivantes sont satisfaites:  
– Sec et ni trop chaud ni trop froid—entre 5°C (41°F) et 35°C (95°F). Si la  
température est trop basse, le disque dur ne fonctionne pas. Attendez que la  
température dans la voiture redevienne normale avant d’utiliser l’appareil.  
– À une altitude située entre –300 m (–980 pied) au-dessous du niveau de la  
mer et +3000 m (9800 pied) au-dessus du niveau de la mer.  
– Avec une ventilation suffisante pour éviter tout échauffement interne de  
l’appareil.  
•
NO opere la unidad mientras maneja. Si es necesario operar la unidad  
mientras maneja, asegúrese de no apartar la vista de la carretera.  
El conductor no debe mirar el monitor mientras conduce.  
Esta unidad dispone de un HDD incorporado, que es un dispositivo que  
lee los cambios magnéticos diminutos. En el interior del dispositivo hay  
componentes de precisión y por lo tanto, se deberá tener en cuenta lo  
siguiente al instalar la unidad.  
•
•
Instale la unidad en un lugar que cumpla con las siguientes condiciones:  
– Nivelado y seco, ni demasiado frío ni demasiado caluroso—entre 5°C (41°F)  
y 35°C (95°F). El HDD no funcionará si la temperatura es muy baja. Antes de  
operar la unidad, espere hasta que la temperatura del habitáculo se normalice.  
– A una altitud entre –300 m (–980 pie) por debajo del nivel del mar y  
+3000 m (9800 pie) por encima del nivel del mar.  
– With adequate ventilation to prevent internal heat buildup in the unit.  
– Con una ventilación adecuada para evitar la generación de calor en el  
interior de la unidad.  
Parts list for installation and connection  
Lista de piezas para instalación y conexión  
Liste des pièces pour l’installation et raccordement  
The following parts are provided for this unit. If anything is missing, contact Con esta unidad se suministran las siguientes piezas.  
Les pièces suivantes sont fournies avec cet appareil.  
Après vérification, veuillez les placer correctement.  
your dealer immediately.  
Después de inspeccionarlas, colóquelas correctamente.  
A / B  
C
D
Trim plate  
Placa de guarnición  
Plaque d’assemblage  
E
Power cord  
Cordón de alimentación  
Cordon d’alimentation  
F
AV I/O cords  
G
Hard case/Control panel  
Estuche duro/Panel de  
control  
Sleeve  
Cubierta  
Manchon  
Crimp connectors  
Conectores de sujeción  
Raccord à sertir  
Cables de E/S AV  
Cordons entrée/sortie audio-vidéo  
Etui de transport/Panneau  
de commande  
H
J
Mounting bolt—  
M5 x 20 mm  
K
M
O
Batteries  
Pilas  
P
Q/R  
S
Washer (ø5)  
Arandela (ø5)  
Rondelle (ø5)  
Rubber cushion  
Cojín de goma  
Amortisseur en  
caoutchouc  
Remote controller/Holder  
Control remoto/Soporte  
Télécommande/Support  
Extension leads  
Cable prolongador  
Cordon rallonge  
GPS antenna/Attachment mat  
Antena GPS/Estera de fijación  
Antenne GPS/Feuille de fixation  
Measuring gauge  
Calibrador de  
medición  
(M5 x 13/16")  
Piles  
Perno de montaje—  
M5 x 20 mm  
Gabarit de mesure  
I
RM-RK250  
Lock nut (M5)  
Tuerca de seguridad (M5)  
Ecrou d’arrêt (M5)  
L
(M5 x 13/16 pulgada)  
Boulon de montage—  
M5 x 20 mm  
Handles  
Manijas  
Poignées  
R03(UM-4)/  
AAA(24F) x 2  
N
(M5 x 13/16 pouces)  
Double-sided adhesive tape  
Cinta adhesiva de doble cara  
Ruban adhésif double face  
Required space for installation / Espacio requerido para la instalación / Espace  
nécessaire pour l’installation  
Installing the remote controller/  
Instalación del control remoto/  
Installation de la télécommande  
Caution when installing / Precaución en la  
instalación / Précautions lors de l’installation  
• You cannot install the unit on the  
car which has any obstacles in the  
diagonally shaded areas.  
3 mm (1/8")  
6 mm (1/4")  
Dashboard  
Fit the unit into the mounting sleeve  
by using four corners of the trim  
plate.  
• DO NOT press the panel (shaded  
in the illustration).  
Introduzca el receptor en la manga  
de montaje utilizando las cuatro  
esquinas de la placa decorativa.  
Holder/Soporte/Support  
Tablero de instrumentos  
Tableau de bord  
•
No es posible instalar la unidad en el  
coche si hay obstáculos en las zonas  
sombreadas laterales.  
Trim plate is detached on this illustration  
for explanation.  
Para fines explicativos, se ha retirado la  
placa de guarnición en esta ilustración.  
La plaque de garniture est montrée  
détachée sur cette illustration pour les  
besoins de l’explication.  
• Vous ne pouvez pas installer l’unité  
dans une voiture comportant des  
obstacles dans les zones ombrées sur  
l’illustration.  
•
NO presione el panel (sombreado en la ilustración).  
N
Fixez l’autoradio sur le manchon de montage en utilisant les  
quatre coins de la plaque de garniture.  
• NE POUSSEZ PAS sur le panneau (en gris sur l’illustration).  
Remote controller  
Control remoto  
Télécommande  
Control panel  
Panel de control  
Panneau de commande  
5 mm (1/4")  
5 mm (1/4")  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
• The fuse blows.  
LOCALIZACION DE AVERIAS  
• El fusible se quema.  
EN CAS DE DIFFICULTES  
• Le fusible saute.  
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?  
* ¿Están los conductores rojo y negro correctamente conectados?  
* Les fils rouge et noir sont-ils racordés correctement?  
• Power cannot be turned on.  
• No es posible conectar la alimentación.  
• L’appareil ne peut pas être mise sous tension.  
* Is the yellow lead connected?  
* ¿Está el cable amarillo conectado?  
* Le fil jaune est-elle raccordée?  
• No sound from the speakers.  
• No sale sonido de los altavoces.  
• Pas de son des enceintes.  
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?  
* ¿Está el cable de salida del altavoz cortocircuitado?  
* Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il court-circuité?  
• Sound is distorted.  
• El sonido presenta distorsión.  
• Le son est déformé.  
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?  
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?  
* ¿Está el cable de salida del altavoz conectado a masa?  
* ¿Están los terminales “–” de los altavoces L y R conectados a una masa  
común?  
* Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il à la masse?  
* Les bornes “–” des enceintes gauche et droit sont-elles mises ensemble à la  
masse?  
• Noise interfere with sounds.  
• Perturbación de ruido.  
• Interférence avec les sons.  
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and  
thicker cords?  
* ¿El terminal de tierra trasero está conectado al chasis del automóvil utilizando * La prise arrière de mise à la terre est-elle connectée au châssis de la voiture  
los cordones más corto y más grueso?  
avec un cordon court et épais?  
• No playback picture appears while an AV source is selected.  
• No aparece la reproducción de imágenes mientras se selecciona la  
fuente de AV.  
* ¿Se ha conectado correctamente el cable del freno de estacionamiento?  
• Aucune image de lecture n’apparaît lors de la sélection d’une  
source audio-vidéo.  
* Le fil de sortie du frein de stationnement est-il connecté correctement?  
* Is the parking brake lead properly connected?  
• Unit becomes hot.  
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?  
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?  
• La unidad se calienta.  
• L’appareil devient chaud.  
* ¿Está el cable de salida del altavoz conectado a masa?  
* ¿Están los terminales “–” de los altavoces L y R conectados a una masa  
común?  
* Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il à la masse?  
* Les bornes “–” des enceintes gauche et droit sont-elles mises ensemble à la  
masse?  
• This unit does not work at all.  
* Have you reset your unit?  
• Este receptor no funciona en absoluto.  
• Cet appareil ne fonctionne pas du tout.  
* ¿Reinicializó el receptor?  
* Avez-vous réinitialisé votre appareil?  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
INSTALLATION (IN-DASH MOUNTING)  
INSTALACION (MONTAJE EN EL TABLERO DE  
INSTRUMENTOS)  
INSTALLATION (MONTAGE DANS LE TABLEAU  
DE BORD)  
The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any  
questions or require information regarding installation kits, consult your JVC  
car audio dealer or a company supplying kits.  
La siguiente ilustración muestra una instalación típica. Si tiene alguna pregunta L’illustration suivante est un exemple d’installation typique. Si vous avez des  
o necesita información acerca de las herramientas para instalación, consulte  
con su concesionario de JVC de equipos de audio para automóviles o a una  
compañía que suministra tales herramientas.  
questions ou avez besoin d’information sur des kits d’installation, consulter votre  
revendeur d’autoradios JVC ou une compagnie d’approvisionnement.  
• Si l’on n’est pas sûr de pouvoir installer correctement cet appareil, le faire  
installer par un technicien qualifié.  
• Lors de l’installation assurez-vous de ne pas bloquer le ventilateur à l’arrière  
afin de permettre une ventilation correcte.  
• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a  
qualified technician.  
• Make sure not to block the fan on the rear panel to maintain proper  
ventilation when installed.  
•
Si usted no está seguro de cómo instalar correctamente la unidad, hágala  
instalar por un técnico cualificado.  
•
Asegúrese de no bloquear las rendijas de ventilación del panel trasero, para  
poder mantener una buena ventilación una vez instalado.  
Do the required electrical connections.  
Realice las conexiones eléctricas requeridas.  
Réalisez les connexions électriques.  
Do not block the fan.  
No tape las rendijas de ventilación.  
Ne bloquez pas le ventilateur.  
Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the sleeve firmly  
in place.  
Doble las lengüetas apropiadas para retener  
firmemente la manga en su lugar.  
Tordez les languettes appropriées pour maintenir le  
manchon en place.  
*1  
When you stand the unit, be careful not to damage the fuse on the rear.  
Al poner la unidad vertical, tenga cuidado de no dañar el fusible provisto en la  
parte posterior.  
*1  
*1  
Lorsque vous mettez l’appareil à la verticale, faire attention de ne pas endommager  
le fusible situé sur l’arrière.  
When installing the unit without using the sleeve / Instalación de la unidad sin utilizar la cubierta / Lors de  
l’installation de l’appareil sans utiliser de manchon  
When using the optional stay / Cuando emplea un soporte  
opcional / Lors de l’utilisation du hauban en option  
In a car having the “Required space for installation” (see page 1), first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.  
En un automóvil que dispone del “Espacio requerido para la instalación” (véase página 1), primero desmonte el autorradio e instale la unidad en su lugar.  
Dans une voiture possédant l’“Espace nécessaire pour l’installation” (voir page 1), retirez d’abord l’autoradio d’origine et installer cet appareil à sa place.  
Fire wall  
Tabique a prueba de incendios  
Cloison  
Stay (option)  
Soporte (opción)  
Hauban (en option)  
Flat type screws—M5 x 8 mm  
*2  
Not included for this unit.  
No suministrado con esta unidad.  
(M5 x 3/8") *2  
*2  
Tornillos tipo plano—M5 x 8 mm  
*2  
(M5 x 3/8 pulgada) *2  
Vis à tête plate—M5 x 8 mm  
(M5 x 3/8 pouces) *2  
Non fourni avec cet appareil.  
Dashboard  
Tablero de  
Bracket *2  
Ménsula *2  
Support *2  
Flat type screws—M5 x 8 mm  
(M5 x 3/8") *2  
instrumentos  
Tableau de bord  
Screw (option)  
Tornillo (opción)  
Vis (en option)  
Tornillos tipo plano—M5 x 8 mm  
(M5 x 3/8 pulgada) *2  
Bracket *2  
Ménsula *2  
Support *2  
Vis à tête plate—M5 x 8 mm  
(M5 x 3/8 pouces) *2  
Note  
:
:
:
When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm (3/8") -long screws. If longer screws are used,  
they could damage the unit.  
Cuando instala la unidad en la ménsula de montaje, asegúrese de utilizar los tornillos de 8 mm (3/8 pulgada) de longitud. Si se  
utilizan tornillos más largos, éstos pueden dañar la unidad.  
Lors de l’installation de l’appareil sur le support de montage, s’assurer d’utiliser des vis d’une longueur de 8 mm (3/8 pouces). Si  
des vis plus longues sont utilisées, elles peuvent endommager l’appareil.  
Nota  
Remarque  
Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚ vertically and of less than 5˚ horizontally.  
Assembling the measuring gauge / Montaje del calibrador de medición / Assemblage  
du gabarit de mesure  
• After installation, confirm the vertical angle of the unit using the supplied measuring gauge.  
Instale la unidad a un ángulo de menos de 30° en sentido vertical, y de menos de 5° en sentido horizontal.  
•
Después de la instalación, confirme el ángulo vertical de la unidad con el calibrador de medición suministrado.  
1
2
Installez l’appareil avec un angle vertical de moins de 30˚ et un angle horizontal de moins de 5˚.  
• Après l’installation, vérifiez l’angle vertical de l’appareil en utilisant le gabarit de mesure fourni.  
32  
˚
2
8˚  
2
3˚  
1
7˚  
-5  
˚
32  
˚
28˚  
23˚  
1
7˚  
30˚  
-5˚  
• Keep the gauge handy for the future use.  
Mantenga a mano el calibrador para uso futuro.  
5˚  
•
• Conservez le gabarit à portée de main pour une utilisation future.  
Measuring the installation angle  
Medición del ángulo de instalación  
Mesure de l’angle d’installation  
1
BEFORE starting, make sure...  
• You have parked the car where it cannot be inclined. (It  
should be parked horizontally.)  
ANTES de empezar, compruebe que...  
AVANT de commencer, assurez-vous que...  
• Vous avez garé votre voiture dans un endroit où elle n’est  
pas inclinée. (Elle doit être garée horizontalement.)  
•
Ha estacionado el automóvil en un sitio no inclinado.  
(Estacionar sobre una superficie plana.)  
1 Detach the control panel.  
2 Measure the angle.  
1 Desmonte el panel de control.  
2 Mida el ángulo.  
1 Détachez le panneau de commande.  
2 Mesurez l’angle.  
• Attach the measuring gauge closely and flatly to the  
•
Acople el patrón de medida de forma que quede plano  
• Attachez le gabarit de mesure étroitement et à plat sur  
l’unité principale (partie ombrée sur l’illustration de  
gauche).  
2
main unit (to the portion shaded in the illustration on  
the left).  
y cerca de la unidad principal, en la parte sombreada  
que se muestra en la parte izquierda de la ilustración.  
3 Note your measured angle.  
1: –5.0 to 1.0˚  
3 Anote el ángulo medido.  
1: –5,0 a 1,0˚  
3 Notez l’angle mesuré.  
1: –5,0 à 1,0˚  
:
:
:
:
1
2
3
4
2: 1.0 to 6.0˚  
2: 1,0 a 6,0˚  
2: 1,0 à 6,0˚  
3: 6.0 to 14.0˚  
3: 6,0 a 14,0˚  
4: 14,0 a 32,0˚*  
3: 6,0 à 14,0˚  
4: 14.0 to 32.0˚*  
4: 14,0 à 32,0˚*  
*
*
*
It is not recommended to install the main unit at an  
Se recomienda no instalar la unidad principal a un  
Il n’est pas recommandé d’installer l’apareil avec un  
angle of more than 30˚; otherwise, the malfunction  
may result.  
ángulo de más de 30° pues de lo contrario, podrían  
producirse fallos de funcionamiento.  
angle de plus de 30˚; sinon, cela peut entraîner un  
mauvais fonctionnement.  
When you use the Navigation System for the first time after  
installation...  
Follow the procedure described on pages 8 and 9 of the  
INSTRUCTIONS (separate volume).  
Cuando utilice el sistema de navegación por primera vez  
después de la instalación...  
Realice el procedimiento descrito en las páginas 8 y 9 del  
MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES (volumen separado).  
Quand vous utilisez l’autoradio pour la première fois après  
l’installation...  
Suivez la procédure décrite aux pages 8 et 9 du MANUEL  
D’INSTRUCTIONS (volume séparé).  
Measure this angle.  
Mida este ángulo.  
Mesurez cet angle.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2
Removing the unit  
Extracción de la unidad  
Retrait de l’appareil  
Before removing the unit, release the rear section.  
Antes de extraer la unidad, libere la sección trasera.  
Avant de retirer l’appareil, libérer la section arrière.  
Insert the two handles, then pull them as  
illustrated so that the unit can be removed.  
Inserte las dos manijas y, a continuación,  
extráigalas de la manera indicada en la  
ilustración para poder desmontar la unidad.  
Insérez les deux poignées, puis tirez de la façon  
illustrée de façon à retirer l’appareil.  
Installing the GPS antenna  
• People who use pacemakers should avoid a physical contact with the  
magnetic antenna and should not handle it themselves. This causes  
malfunctions of the pacemakers.  
• Keep the magnetic antenna away from the storage media such as disks,  
credit cards; otherwise, its data will be collapsed.  
• The antenna should be attached so firmly that it cannot be detached in the  
event of a collision or sudden braking.  
Instalación de la antena GPS  
Installation de l’antenne GPS  
• Les personnes utilisant un stimulateur cardiaque doivent éviter tout contact  
physique avec l’antenne magnétique et ne doivent pas la manipuler elles-  
même. Cela pourrait entraîner un dysfonctionnement du stimulateur  
cardiaque.  
•
Las personas portadoras de marcapasos deben evitar el contacto físico con  
la antena magnética, y deben abstenerse de intentar su manejo. Esto puede  
producir un fallo de funcionamiento en el marcapasos.  
•
•
Mantenga la antena magnética alejada de los medios de almacenaje como  
por ejemplo disquetes, tarjetas de crédito, y otros, pues se dañarán los datos. • Tenez l’antenne magnétique à distance des supports de mémoire tels que les  
Sujete la antena firmemente, para evitar que se salga en el caso eventual de  
un choque o de un frenado brusco.  
disques, les cartes de crédit; sinon, les données pourraient être corrompues.  
• L’antenne doit être fixée suffisamment solidement pour qu’elle ne puisse pas se  
détacher en cas de choc ou de coup de frein brutal.  
Å Inside the car  
Å Dentro del automóvil  
Å À l’intérieur de la voiture  
Beneath a non-metallised* window, fix the  
attachment mat (R) on the dashboard, then place  
the antenna (Q) on the mat.  
Detrás de un cristal no metalizado*, fije la estera  
de fijación (R) sobre el cubretablero y ponga la  
antena (Q) sobre la estera.  
Derrière une fenêtre non métallisée*, fixez la feuille  
de fixation (R) sur le tableau de bord, puis placez  
l’antenne (Q) sur la feuille.  
Q
• Make sure that the antenna is not covered by  
any components and parts of the car and it can  
receive the signals from all directions.  
•
Asegúrese de no tapar la antena con ningún  
componente ni pieza del automóvil, y de que la  
recepción de la señal es posible desde todas las  
direcciones.  
• Assurez-vous que l’antenne n’est recouverte  
par aucun composant ou aucune partie de la  
voiture et peut recevoir les signaux de toutes les  
directions.  
*
The windows with screen antenna, windshield  
*
*
heating or thermally insulated screens will  
interfere with GPS reception, and will degrade  
the reliability of the Navigation System.  
Las ventanillas que cuentan con antenas con  
pantalla, calefacción en el cristal del parabrisas o  
pantallas térmicamente aisladas interfieren con  
la recepción GPS, y disminuirán la confiabilidad  
del sistema de navegación.  
Les vitres avec une antenne incrustée, les  
chauffages de pare-brise ou les écrans d’isolation  
thermique interfèrent avec la réception GPS et  
réduisent la fiabilité du système de navigation.  
R
ı Outside the car  
ı Fuera del automóvil  
ı À l’extérieur de la voiture  
Q
Fix the antenna (Q) to a pre-washed, flat, metallic Fije la antena (Q) sobre una superficie metálica  
Fixez l’antenne (Q) sur une surface métallique  
plate.  
surface.  
plana, previamente lavada.  
• Wire the antenna cord so as not to allow the rain  
to leak in.  
•
Procure tender el cable de antena para no  
permitir la entrada de lluvia.  
• Câblez le cordon d’antenne de façon à empêcher  
la pluie de pénétrer à l’intérieur.  
• The antenna magnetically attached will be  
used even at a speed of 180 km/h (110 mi/h)  
(maximum). The antenna must be specially  
secured for higher speeds.  
• Detach the antenna before you wash the car with  
the car-wash facilities.  
•
La antena fijada magnéticamente puede  
utilizarse incluso a velocidades del orden de  
180 km/h (110 mi/h) (máximo). Para velocidades  
superiores, la antena deberá estar especialmente  
asegurada.  
• Une fois fixée, l’antenne magnétique ne se  
détachera pas même à une vitesse de 180 km/h  
(110 mi/h) (maximum). L’antenne doit être fixée  
spécialement pour les vitesses plus élevées.  
• Détachez l’antenne avant de laver votre voiture  
dans un poste de lavage.  
•
Desmonte la antena antes de lavar el automóvil  
en un lavacoches automático.  
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS  
CONEXIONES ELECTRICAS  
RACCORDEMENTS ELECTRIQUES  
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery’s  
Para evitar cortocircuitos, recomendamos que desconecte el terminal negativo Pour éviter tout court-circuit, nous vous recommandons de débrancher la borne  
negative terminal and make all electrical connections before installing the unit. de la batería y que efectúe todas las conexiones eléctricas antes de instalar la  
négative de la batterie et d’effectuer tous les raccordements électriques avant  
d’installer l’appareil.  
• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after  
installation.  
unidad.  
• Asegúrese de volver a conectar a masa esta unidad al chasis del  
automóvil después de la instalación.  
• Assurez-vous de raccorder de nouveau la mise à la masse de cet  
appareil au châssis de la voiture après l’installation.  
Notes:  
Notas:  
Remarques:  
• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently,  
consult your JVC car audio dealer.  
• It is recommended to connect to the speakers with maximum power of more  
than 50 W (both at the rear and at the front, with an impedance of 4 Ω to  
8 Ω). If the maximum power is less than 50 W, change “Amplifier Gain”  
setting to prevent the speakers from being damaged (see page 95 of the  
INSTRUCTIONS).  
• To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads with  
insulating tape.  
• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it when  
removing this unit.  
•
Reemplace el fusible por uno con la corriente especificada. Si el fusible se  
quemase frecuentemente consulte con su concesionario de JVC de equipos  
de audio para automóviles.  
• Remplacer le fusible par un de la valeur précisée. Si le fusible saute souvent,  
consulter votre revendeur d’autoradios JVC.  
• Il est recommandé de connecter des enceintes avec une puissance de plus  
de 50 W (les enceintes arrière et les enceintes avant, avec une impédance  
comprise entre 4 Ω et 8 Ω). Si la puissance maximum est inférieure à 50 W,  
changez “Gain amplific.” pour éviter d’endommager vos enceintes (voir page  
95 du MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS).  
• Pour éviter les court-circuits, couvrir les bornes des fils qui ne sont PAS  
UTILISÉS avec de la bande isolante.  
• Le dissipateur de chaleur devient très chaud après usage. Faire attention de ne  
pas le toucher en retirant cet appareil.  
•
Se recomienda conectar los altavoces con una potencia máxima de más  
de 50 W (tanto atrás como adelante, con una impedancia de 4 Ω a 8 Ω).  
Si la potencia máxima es de menos de 50 W, cambie “Gcia.amplific.” para  
evitar daños en los altavoces (consulte la página 95 del MANUAL DE  
INSTRUCCIONES).  
•
•
Para evitar cortocircuitos, cubra los cables NO UTILIZADOS con cinta aislante.  
El sumidero térmico estará muy caliente después del uso. Asegúrese de no  
tocarlo al desmontar esta unidad.  
Heat sink  
Sumidero térmico  
Dissipateur de chaleur  
PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker  
connections:  
PRECAUCIONES sobre las conexiones de la fuente de  
alimentación y de los altavoces:  
PRECAUTIONS sur l’alimentation et la connexion des  
enceintes:  
• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the car  
battery; otherwise, the unit will be seriously damaged.  
• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the speakers,  
check the speaker wiring in your car.  
• NO conecte los conductores de altavoz del cable de alimentación a  
la batería de automóvil, pues podrían producirse graves daños en la  
unidad.  
• NE CONNECTEZ PAS les fils d’enceintes du cordon d’alimentation à  
la batterie; sinon, l’appareil serait sérieusement endommagé.  
• AVANT de connecter les fils d’enceintes du cordon d’alimentation aux  
enceintes, vérifiez le câblage des enceintes de votre voiture.  
•
ANTES de conectar a los altavoces los conductores de altavoz del cable de  
alimentación, verifique el conexionado de altavoz de su automóvil.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
ENGLISH  
ESPAÑOL  
FRANÇAIS  
Typical Connections / Conexiones tipicas / Raccordements typiques  
A
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect  
connection may cause serious damage to this unit.  
The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body  
may be different in color.  
Antes de la conexión: Verifique atentamente el conexionado del vehículo.  
Una conexión incorrecta podría producir daños graves en la unidad.  
Los cordones del cable de alimentación y los del conector procedentes de la  
carrocería del automóvil podrían ser de diferentes en color.  
Avant de commencer la connexion: Vérifiez attentivement le câblage du  
véhicule. Une connexion incorrecte peut endommager sérieusement l’appareil.  
Le fil du cordon d’alimentation et ceux des connecteurs du châssis de la  
voiture peuvent être différents en couleur.  
1 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order  
1 Conecte los conductores de color del cable de alimentación en 1 Connectez les fils colorés du cordon d’alimentation dans l’ordre  
specified in the illustration below.  
el orden especificado en la ilustración de abajo.  
spécifié sur l’illustration ci-dessous.  
2 Connect the antenna cord and the GPS antenna.  
3 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.  
2 Conecte el cable de antena y la antena GPS.  
3 Por último, conecte el cable de alimentación a la unidad.  
2 Connectez le cordon d’antenne et l’antenne GPS.  
3 Finalement, connectez le faisceau de fils à l’appareil.  
GPS antenna  
Antena GPS  
Antenne GPS  
REVERSE GEAR SIGNAL (see diagram / véase diagrama / voir le diagramme  
SPEED SIGNAL (see diagram / véase diagrama / voir le diagramme  
)
)
Radio antenna  
VIDEO OUT (see diagram / véase diagrama / voir le diagramme  
VIDEO IN (see diagram / véase diagrama / voir le diagramme  
OE REMOTE  
)
Antena de radio  
Antenne radio  
)
DIGITAL OUT (see diagram  
/ véase diagrama / voir le  
diagramme  
)
Steering wheel remote input/ Entrada del control remoto del volante de dirección/ Entrée de la télécommande de volant (see  
Rear ground  
terminal  
Terminal de tierra  
posterior  
Borne arrière de  
masse  
diagram / véase diagrama / voir le diagramme  
)
15 A fuse  
Fusible de 15 A  
Fusible 15 A  
*1  
*1  
*1  
Not included for this unit  
No suministrado con esta unidad  
To an external component (see diagram and  
)
)
Non fourni avec cet appareil  
Ignition switch  
Interruptor de encendido  
Interrupteur d’allumage  
A un componente externo (véase diagrama  
y
Black  
Negro  
Noir  
Pour connecter un appareil extérieur (voir le  
diagramme et  
)
To metallic body or chassis of the car  
A un cuerpo metálico o chasis del automóvil  
Vers corps métallique ou châssis de la voiture  
Yellow *2  
Amarillo *2  
Jaune *2  
To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery (bypassing the  
ignition switch) (constant 12 V)  
A un terminal activo del bloque de fusibles conectado a la batería del automóvil  
(desviando el interruptor de encendido) (12 V constantes)  
A une borne sous tension du porte-fusible connectée à la batterie de la voiture (en  
dérivant l’interrupteur d’allumage) (12 V constant)  
LINE OUT (FRONT) (see diagram  
/
véase diagrama / voir le diagramme  
)
To an accessory terminal in the fuse block  
A un terminal accesorio del bloque de fusibles  
Vers borne accessoire du porte-fusible  
Red / Rojo / Rouge  
Blue / Azul / Bleu  
Fuse block  
Bloque de fusibles  
LINE OUT (REAR) (see diagram  
/
Porte-fusible  
véase diagrama / voir le diagramme  
To automatic antenna if any (250 mA max.)  
A la antena automática, si hubiere (250 mA máx.)  
À l’antenne automatique s’il y en a une (250 mA max.)  
)
SUBWOOFER OUT (see diagram  
Blue with white stripe  
Azul con rayas blancas  
Bleu avec bande blanche  
/ véase diagrama / voir le  
diagramme  
)
To the remote lead of other equipment (200 mA max.)  
Al conductor remoto del otro equipo (200 mA máx.)  
Au fil de télécommande d’un autre appareil (200 mA max.)  
Orange with white stripe  
Naranja con rayas blancas  
Orange avec bande blanche  
To car light control switch  
Al interruptor de control de las luces del automóvil  
À l’interrupteur d’éclairage de la voiture  
*2  
Before checking the operation of this unit prior to  
installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise power  
cannot be turned on.  
*2  
*2  
Antes de comprobar el funcionamiento de esta unidad  
previa a de la instalación, es necesario conectar este cable,  
de lo contrario no se podrá conectar la alimentación.  
To cellular phone system  
Al sistema de teléfono celular  
Al cellulare  
Brown / Marrón / Marron  
Pour vérifier le fonctionnement de cet appareil avant  
installation, ce fil doit être raccordé, sinon l’appareil ne peut  
pas être mis sous tension.  
To parking brake (see diagram  
Al freno de estacionamiento (véase diagrama  
Au frein de stationnement (voir le diagramme  
)
Light green / Verde claro / Vert clair  
)
)
Gray with black stripe  
Gris con rayas negras  
Gris avec bande noire  
Purple  
Púrpura  
Violet  
White with black stripe  
White  
Blanco  
Blanc  
Gray  
Gris  
Gris  
Green with black stripe  
Green  
Verde  
Vert  
Purple with black stripe  
Púrpura con rayas negras  
Violet avec bande noire  
Blanco con rayas negras  
Verde con rayas negras  
Blanc avec bande noire  
Vert avec bande noire  
Left speaker (rear)  
Right speaker (rear)  
Altavoz derecho (trasero)  
Enceinte droit (arrière)  
Left speaker (front)  
Altavoz izquierdo (frontal)  
Enceinte gauche (avant)  
Right speaker (front)  
Altavoz derecho (frontal)  
Enceinte droit (avant)  
Altavoz izquierdo (trasero)  
Enceinte gauche (arrière)  
Connecting the reverse gear signal lead / Conexión del cable de señal del engranaje de marcha atrás / Connexion du fil de signal de marche arrière  
B
Purple with white stripe  
Conductor de la luz trasera  
Violet avec bande blanche  
Reverse lamp lead  
Conductor de la luz trasera  
Fil des feux de recul  
Locate the reverse lamp lead in the  
KD-NX5000  
REVERSE GEAR SIGNAL  
trunk.  
Localice el conductor de la luz trasera  
en el compartimiento de equipajes.  
Localisez le fil des feux de recul dans le  
coffre.  
To reverse lamp  
A la luz trasera  
Aux feux de recul  
*3  
P
To car battery  
A la batería del automóvil  
À la batterie de la voiture  
Reverse lamp lead  
Reverse lamps  
Luces traseras  
Feux de recul  
Conductor de la luz trasera  
Fil des feux de recul  
Connecting the speed signal lead / Conexión del cable de señal de velocidad /  
Connexion du fil de signal de vitesse  
C
*3 Connecting the crimp connector / Conexión del conector de presión / Connexion de la cosse sertie  
• This connection is necessary to use the Navigation System.  
Esta conexión es necesaria para poder usar el sistema de navegación.  
• Cette connexion est nécessaire pour pouvoir utiliser le système de navigation.  
•
• If your car does not have a speed signal lead,  
use JVC’s Speed Pulse Generator KV-PG1  
(separately purchased).  
KD-NX5000  
SPEED  
SINGAL  
*3  
•
Si su coche no dispone de un conductor de  
la señal de velocidad, utilice el Generador de  
impulsos de velocidad KV-PG1 de JVC (vendido  
separadamente).  
P
Pink/Rosa/Rose  
Contact the metallic part of the crimp to the wires inside.  
Conecte la parte metálica del engarce a los cables interiores.  
Mettez en contact la partie métallique de la cosse à sertir et des fils intérieurs.  
Pinch the crimp firmly.  
Apriete firmemente el engarce.  
Pincez la cosse à sertir fermement.  
Signal lead from the speedometer  
Conductor del velocímetro  
Fil de signal de l’indicateur de vitesse  
• Si votre voiture ne possède de pas de fil de signal  
de vitesse, utilisez le Générateur d’impulsions  
de vitesse KV-PG1 de JVC (vendu séparément).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
Connecting the parking brake lead / Conexión del cable del freno de estacionamiento / Connexion du cordon de frein de stationnement  
D
Connect the parking brake lead  
to the parking brake system built  
in the car.  
Conecte el cable del freno de  
estacionamiento al sistema de  
freno de estacionamiento del  
automóvil.  
Connectez le fil de frein de  
stationnement au système de  
frein de stationnement.  
Parking brake switch (inside the car)  
Interruptor del freno de estacionamiento (dentro del automóvil)  
Commutateur de frein de stationnement (intérieur de la voiture)  
Parking brake lead of the power cord (light green)  
Cable del freno de estacionamiento del cable de  
alimentación (verde claro)  
Fil du frein de stationnement du cordon  
d’alimentation (vert clair)  
*3  
Parking brake  
Freno de estacionamiento  
Frein de stationnement  
To metallic body or chassis of the car  
A un cuerpo metálico o chasis del automóvil  
Vers corps métallique ou châssis de la voiture  
Connecting to the steering wheel remote controller / Conexión al control remoto del volante de dirección / Connexion de la télécommande de volant  
E
If your car is equipped with the steering wheel remote controller, you can operate this unit using the controller. For  
connection, an exclusive remote adapter (not supplied) which matches your car is required. For details, consult the  
same car audio dealer as where the unit is purchased.  
Si su vehículo está equipado con control remoto en el volante de dirección, podrá hacer funcionar este receptor  
utilizando dicho control. Para la conexión, se requiere un adaptador remoto exclusivo (no suministrado) que sea  
adecuado para su automóvil. Para los detalles, consulte con el concesionario car audio donde compró el receptor.  
Si votre voiture est munie d’une télécommande de volant, vous pouvez commander cet autoradio en utilisant la  
télécommande. Pour la connexion, un adaptateur de télécommande exclusif (non fourni) correspondant à votre voiture  
est requis. Pour en savoir plus, consultez le revendeur autoradio auprès duquel vous avez acheté cet autoradio.  
Remote adapter (not supplied)  
OE REMOTE  
Steering wheel remote input/ Entrada del  
control remoto del volante de dirección/  
Entrée de la télécommande de volant  
Adaptador para control remoto (no suministrado)  
Adaptateur pour télécommande au volant (non fourni)  
KD-NX5000  
Steering wheel remote controller (equipped in the car)  
Control remoto del volante de dirección (equipado en el  
vehículo)  
Télécommande de volant (installée dans la voiture)  
Connecting the external amplifiers / Conexión a los amplificadores externos / Connexion d’amplificateurs extérieurs  
F
Vous pouvez connecter des amplificateurs pour améliorer votre système  
autoradio.  
• Connectez le fil de commande à distance (bleu avec bande blanche) au  
fil de commande à distance de l’autre appareil de façon qu’il puisse être  
commandé via cet appareil.  
• Déconnectez les enceintes de cet appareil et connectez-les à  
l’amplificateur. Laissez les fils d’enceintes de cet appareil inutilisés.  
• Vous pouvez désactiver l’amplificateur intégré et envoyer les signaux audio  
uniquement à un ou plusieurs amplificateurs extérieurs afin d’obtenir un  
son clair et pour éviter un échauffement interne de l’appareil. Référez-vous à  
la page 95 du MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS (volume séparé).  
• La voix de guidage sort uniquement par les enceintes avant (et la sortie de  
ligne à l’arrière).  
You can connect amplifiers to upgrade your car stereo system.  
• Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote lead of the  
other equipment so that it can be controlled through this unit.  
• Disconnect the speakers from this unit, and connect them to the  
amplifier. Leave the speaker leads of this unit unused.  
• You can switch off the built-in amplifier and send the audio signals only  
to the external amplifier(s) to get clear sounds and to prevent internal heat  
built-up inside the unit. See page 95 of the INSTRUCTIONS (separate  
volume).  
Usted podrá conectar amplificadores para mejorar el sistema estéreo de su  
automóvil.  
•
Conecte el conductor remoto (azul con rayas blancas) al conductor remoto  
del otro equipo para poderlo controlar a través de esta unidad.  
Desconecte los altavoces de esta unidad y conéctelos al  
amplificador. Los cables de los altavoces de esta unidad quedan sin  
usar.  
•
•
•
Podrá desconectar el amplificador incorporado y enviar las señales de audio  
solamente al(los) amplificador(es) externo(s) para obtener sonidos nítidos  
y evitar que se caliente el interior de la unidad. Véase la página 95 de las  
MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES (volumen separado).  
La guía de voz se escucha sólo a través de los altavoces delanteros (y la salida  
de línea delantera en la parte trasera).  
• Guidance voice comes out only through the front speakers (and the front  
line out on the rear).  
Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)  
Conector en Y (no suministrado con esta unidad)  
Connecteur Y (non fourni avec cet appareil)  
Remote lead (Blue with white stripe)  
Cable remoto (Azul con rayas blancas)  
Fil d’alimentation à distance (Bleu  
avec bande blanche)  
Remote lead  
To the remote lead of other equipment  
Al conductor remoto de otro equipo  
Au fil de télécommande de l’autre appareil  
Cable remoto  
Rear speakers  
Fil d’alimentation à distance  
Altavoces posteriores  
Enceintes arrière  
LINE OUT (REAR)  
JVC Amplifier  
Amplificador de JVC  
JVC Amplificateur  
KD-NX5000  
*5  
*4  
*4  
Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)  
Cable de señal (no suministrado con esta unidad)  
*4  
Front speakers  
Altavoces delanteros  
*4  
Cordon de signal (non fourni avec cet appareil)  
Enceintes avant  
LINE OUT (FRONT)  
*5  
Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis  
JVC Amplifier  
of the car—to the place not coated with paint (if coated with paint,  
remove the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause  
damage to the unit.  
Amplificador de JVC  
*5  
JVC Amplificateur  
*4  
*5  
Fije firmemente el cable de tierra a la carrocería metálica o al chasis—a  
un lugar no cubierto con pintura (si está cubierto con pintura, quítela  
antes de fijar el cable). De lo contrario, se podrían producir daños en la  
unidad.  
Subwoofer  
Subwoofer  
Caisson de grave  
SUBWOOFER OUT  
*5  
Attachez solidement le fil de mise à la masse au châssis métallique de  
JVC Amplifier  
Amplificador de JVC  
JVC Amplificateur  
la voiture—à un endroit qui n’est pas recouvert de peinture (s’il est  
recouvert de peinture, enlevez d’abord la peinture avant d’attacher le fil).  
L’appareil peut être endommagé si cela n’est pas fait correctement.  
*5  
*4  
Connections for external component playback / Conexiones para la reproducción del componente externo / Connexions pour un appareil de lecture extérieur  
G
Video cord (not supplied)  
Cordón de video (no suministrado)  
Cordon vidéo (non fourni)  
VIDEO OUT  
VIDEO IN  
External monitor  
Monitor externo  
Moniteur extérieur  
KD-NX5000  
DIGITAL OUT  
KS-U57  
See page 106 of the INSTRUCTIONS.  
Consulte la página 106 del MANUAL DE  
INSTRUCCIONES.  
Voir la page 106 du MANUEL  
D’INSTRUCTIONS.  
(not supplied)  
(no suministrado)  
(non fourni)  
Camcorder, rear view camera, etc.  
• Set “External Input” to “Ext Input,” and “Video Input” to “Video”  
or “Camera” (see page 93 of the INSTRUCTIONS).  
Videocámera, cámera de retrovisión, etc.  
Audio/video control amplifier or the decoder compatible  
with the multichannel digital sources  
Amplificador de control de audio/vídeo o el decodificador  
compatibles con las fuentes digitales multicanal  
Amplificateur de commande audio/vidéo ou décodeur  
compatible avec les sources numériques multicanaux  
•
Cambie la configuración de “Entrada externa” a “Entr. ext.” y de  
“Entrada de vídeo” a “Vídeo” o “Cámara” (consulte la página 93 de las  
MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES).  
Digital optical cable (not supplied)  
Cable óptico digital (no suministrado)  
Câble optique numérique (non fourni)  
Caméscope, caméra de recul, etc.  
• Définir “Entrée ext.” sur “EntréeExt.” et “Entrée Vidéo” sur “Vidéo”  
ou “Caméra” (voir la page 93 des MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
Connecting other external components / Conexión de otros componentes externos / Connexion d’un autre appareil extérieur  
H
You can connect external components in series as shown in the diagram  
Vous pouvez connecter des appareils extérieurs en série comme montré sur  
l’illustration ci-dessous.  
Los componentes externos se pueden conectar en serie, tal como se muestra  
en el diagrama siguiente.  
below.  
• All the components, adapters or signal cords need to be purchased  
separately.  
• Tous les composants, adaptateurs ou cordons de signal doivent être achetés  
séparément.  
•
Todos los componentes, adaptadores o cables de señal se deben comprar  
separadamente.  
CAUTION:  
PRECAUCION:  
PRECAUTION:  
Before connecting the external components, make sure that the unit is  
turned off.  
Antes de conectar el cambiador dee componentes externos,  
asegúrese de que el receptor esté apagado.  
Avant de connecter votre appareil extérieur, assurez-vous que l’autoradio  
est hors tension.  
•
•
To use JVC CD changer, Apple iPod or JVC D. player, set “External  
Input” to “Changer” (see page 93 of the INSTRUCTIONS).  
To use other external components via KS-U57, KS-U58, or  
KS-U100K, set “External Input” to “Ext Input” (see page 93 of the  
INSTRUCTIONS).  
•
•
Para utilizar un cambiador de CD JVC, Apple iPod o reproductor D. de  
JVC, ajuste “Entrada externa” a “Cambiador” (véase la página 93 del  
MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES).  
Para utilizar otros componentes externos a través de KS-U57, KS-U58 o  
KS-U100K, ajuste “Entrada externa” a “Entr. ext.” (véase la página 93  
del MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES).  
•
•
Pour utiliser un changeur de CD JVC, un iPod Apple ou le lecteur D.  
de JVC, réglez “Entrée ext.” sur “Changeur” (voir page 93 du MANUEL  
D’INSTRUCTION).  
Pour utiliser d’autres appareils extérieurs via le KS-U57, KS-U58 ou  
KS-U100K, réglez “Entrée ext.” sur “EntréeExt.” (voir page 93 du  
MANUEL D’INSTRUCTION).  
Apple iPod  
KS-BTA200  
SIRIUS®  
JVC PnP  
Apple iPod  
KS-PD100  
iPod Apple  
KS-U100K  
KD-NX5000  
or / o / ou  
or / o / ou  
JVC D. player  
Reproductor D. JVC  
Lecteur D. JVC  
CD changer jack  
Jack para el cambiador de CD  
Prise du changeur de CD  
SIRIUS®  
JVC DLP  
DLP JVC  
KS-PD500  
Processeur DLP JVC  
or / o / ou  
or / o / ou  
To disconnect the connector  
Para desconectar el cable  
External component  
Componente exterior  
Appareil extérieur  
KS-U57  
XMDJVC100  
Pour déconnecter le connecteur  
Hold the connector top tightly (1),  
then pull it out (2).  
Sujete firmemente la parte superior  
del conector (1) y seguidamente,  
extráigalo (2).  
or / o / ou  
External component  
Componente exterior  
Appareil extérieur  
Tenez fermement le connecteur par-  
dessus (1) et tirez vers l’extérieur (2).  
KS-U58  
JVC CD changer  
Cambiador de CD de JVC  
Changeur de CD JVC  
or  
o
ou  
or  
o
ou  
KS-BTA200  
JVC DLP  
XMDJVC100  
KD-NX5000  
DLP JVC  
Processeur DLP JVC  
CD changer jack  
Jack para el cambiador de CD  
Prise du changeur de CD  
iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.  
iPod es una marca comercial de Apple Computer, Inc., registrada en los EE. UU. y otros países.  
iPod est une marque de commerce d’Apple Computer, Inc., enregistrée aux États-Unis et dans les autres pays.  
JVC PnP (Plug and Play) / PnP (“Plug and Play”) JVC / PnP (“Plug and Play”)  
JVC  
XM Satellite radio / radio satelital XM / radio satellite XM  
• For listening to the XM Satellite radio, connect XMDirectTM Universal Tuner Box (separately purchased) to this  
unit using JVC Smart Digital Adapter—XMDJVC100 (not supplied).  
•
Para escuchar la radio satelital XM, también puede conectar el Sintonizador universal XMDirectTM (adquirido por  
separado) al receptor mediante un adaptador Smart Digital XMDJVC100 de JVC (no suministrado).  
Stereo mini plug  
Miniclavija estéreo  
Fiche stéré mini  
To headphones jack  
Al jack para auriculares  
À la prise du casque d’écoute  
• Pour écouter la radio satellite XM, vous pouvez aussi connecter le tuner universel XMDirectTM (vendu séparément) à  
cet appareil en utilisant l’adaptateur numérique intelligent JVC—XMDJVC100 (non fourni).  
KS-U100K  
DC power plug  
To DC IN jack  
To KS-BTA200 or KD-NX5000  
A KS-BTA200 o KD-NX5000  
Au KS-BTA200 ou KD-NX5000  
Clavija de alimentación de CC  
Al jack DC IN  
To KS-BTA200 or KD-NX5000  
Fiche d’alimentation CC  
À la prise DC IN  
A KS-BTA200 o KD-NX5000  
Au KS-BTA200 ou KD-NX5000  
XMDJVC100  
External component / Componente exterior / Appareil extérieur  
*6  
Signal cord supplied with your Smart  
Digital Adapter  
*6  
Cable de señal suministrado con el  
adaptador Smart Digital  
To KS-BTA200, JVC  
*6  
Cordon de signal fourni avec votre  
adaptateur numérique intelligent  
Audio signal cord supplied with your  
Smart Digital Adapter  
*10  
DLP, XMDJVC100 or  
KS-U57 *8  
or / o / ou  
*6  
KD-NX5000  
A KS-BTA200, JVC  
DLP, XMDJVC100, o  
*7  
*7  
KS-U58 *9  
*7  
*7  
Cable de señal de audio suministrado  
con el adaptador Smart Digital  
KD-NX5000  
Au KS-BTA200, JVC  
DLP, XMDJVC100 ou  
KD-NX5000  
Cordon audio fourni avec votre  
adaptateur numérique intelligent  
3.5 mm stereo mini plug  
Miniclavija estéreo de 3,5 mm  
Mini-fiche stéréo de 3,5 mm  
XMDirectTM Universal  
Tuner Box  
Sintonizador universal  
*8  
*8  
*8  
Line Input Adapter KS-U57 (separately purchased)  
Adaptador de entrada de línea KS-U57 (adquirido opcionalmente)  
XMDirectTM  
Tuner universel XMDirectTM  
Adaptateur pour entrée de ligne KS-U57 (vendu séparément)  
Antenna (supplied with XMDirectTM  
Universal Tuner Box)  
*9  
*9  
*9  
Aux Input Adapter KS-U58 (separately purchased)  
Adaptador de entrada auxiliar KS-U58 (adquirido opcionalmente)  
Antena (suministrada con el Sintonizador  
Adaptateur pour entrée auxiliaire KS-U58 (vendu séparément)  
universal XMDirectTM  
)
Antenne (fournie avec le tuner universel  
*10  
*10  
*10  
Signal cord (not supplied)  
Cable de señal (no suministrado)  
XMDirectTM  
)
Cordon de signal (non fourni)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6
HDD NAVIGATION/DVD RECEIVER  
FESTPLATTEN-NAVIGATIONSSYSTEM/DVD-RECEIVER  
SYSTÈME DE NAVIGATION À DISQUE DUR/RÉCEPTEUR DVD  
KD-NX5000  
For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.  
Für den Einbau und die Anschlüsse siehe das eigenständige Handbuch.  
Pour l’installation et les raccordements, se référer au manuel séparé.  
INSTRUCTIONS  
BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG  
MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS  
LVT1628-001A  
[E]  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.  
Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to  
obtain the best possible performance from the unit.  
IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS  
1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT  
2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave  
all servicing to qualified service personnel.  
3. CAUTION: Visible and/or invisible class 1M laser radiation when open. Do not view directly  
with optical instruments.  
4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.  
Warning:  
Caution:  
If you need to operate the unit while driving,  
be sure to look ahead carefully or you may be  
involved in a traffic accident.  
Changes or modifications not approved by  
JVC could void the user’s authority to operate  
the equipment.  
Caution:  
Every time you turn on the unit, the screen  
below appears. Take enough care when  
operating the unit and make sure safe driving.  
Never try to analyse or retrieve the data  
stored in the Hard Disk Drive (HDD).  
Otherwise, you may have your warranty  
invalid, and be penalized by law. The  
manufacturer assumes no liability for any  
damage resulting from such conduct as  
mentioned above.  
CAUTION!  
DRIVER IS RESPONSIBLE FOR  
DRIVING DECISIONS AND  
KEEPING EYES ON THE ROAD!  
Please see owner’s manual  
for complete safety  
instructions.  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Hard Disk Drive (HDD)  
WARNINGS:  
To prevent accidents and damage  
Installation  
• DO NOT install any unit in locations  
where:  
This unit has a built-in HDD, which is a device  
to read minute magnetic changes. The inside of  
the device is precision components, requiring  
you to notice the following when installing the  
unit:  
Install the unit at a place where the following  
conditions are satisfied:  
• Dry and neither too hot nor too cold—  
between 5°C and 35°C.  
If the temperature is too low, the HDD will  
not work. Wait until the temperature in the  
car becomes normal before operating the  
unit.  
– it may obstruct the steering wheel and  
gearshift lever operations.  
– it may obstruct the operation of safety  
devices such as air bags.  
– it may obstruct visibility.  
• DO NOT operate the unit while driving. If  
you need to operate the unit while driving,  
be sure to look ahead carefully.  
• The driver must not watch the monitor  
while driving.  
• If the parking brake is not engaged,  
• At an altitude between –300 m below sea level  
and +3000 m above sea level.  
• With adequate ventilation to prevent internal  
heat buildup in the unit.  
“
Parking Brake” flashes on the monitor,  
and no playback picture will be shown.  
– This warning appears only when the  
parking brake wire is connected to the  
parking brake system built in the car  
(refer to the Installation/Connection  
Manual).  
Before using HDD  
While the unit is turned on, the hard disk  
is constantly rotating at a high speed. This  
requires you to notice the following:  
• DO NOT impart vibration or shock.  
• DO NOT allow anything having strong  
magnetism or emitting strong electromagnetic  
waves (mobile phones, etc.) near the unit.  
• DO NOT disconnect the power cords from  
the car battery when the unit is turned on.  
Failure in following the above cautions may  
damage the HDD (the stored data will be lost  
and be never restored).  
For security reasons, a numbered ID card  
is provided with this unit, and the same ID  
number is imprinted on the unit’s chassis.  
Keep the card in a safe place, as it will help the  
authorities to identify your unit if stolen.  
This unit does not function properly unless  
the speed signal lead is connected (refer to the  
Installation/Connection Manual).  
When the temperature is low, the HDD may  
take some time to start up, or may reboot  
automatically.  
It may be unlawful to record or play back  
copyrighted material without the consent of  
the copyright owner.  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
How to reset your unit  
How to forcibly eject a disc  
If a disc cannot be recognized by the unit or  
cannot be ejected, eject the disc as follows.  
• Your preset adjustments  
will also be erased.  
[Hold]  
Emergency Eject and No Eject (or Eject  
OK) appear on the monitor.  
Press 5 / ∞ repeatedly to select Emergency  
Eject, then press ENT.  
• If this does not work, reset your unit.  
• Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.  
How to detach/attach the control panel  
Detaching  
Attaching  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Information for Users on Disposal of Old  
Equipment  
Cautions on the monitor:  
• The monitor built in this unit has been  
produced with high precision, but it may  
have some ineffective dots. This is inevitable  
and is not malfunction.  
• Do not expose the monitor to direct  
sunlight.  
This symbol is only valid in the  
European Union.  
This symbol indicates that the product with  
this symbol should not be disposed as general  
household waste at its end-of-life. If you wish  
to dispose of this product, please do so in  
accordance with applicable national legislation  
or other rules in your country and municipality.  
By disposing of this product correctly, you will  
help to conserve natural resources and will  
help prevent potential negative effects on the  
environment and human health.  
For safety...  
• Do not raise the volume level too much, as  
this will block outside sounds, making driving  
dangerous.  
• Stop the car before performing any  
complicated operations.  
Temperature inside the car...  
If you have parked the car for a long time in hot  
or cold weather, wait until the temperature in  
the car becomes normal before operating the  
unit.  
Caution on volume setting:  
Discs produce very little noise compared with  
other sources. Lower the volume before playing  
a disc to avoid damaging the speakers by the  
sudden increase of the output level.  
Dear Customer,  
This apparatus is in conformance with the  
valid European directives and standards  
regarding electromagnetic compatibility and  
electrical safety.  
European representative of Victor Company  
of Japan, Limited is:  
This product incorporates copyright  
protection technology that is protected  
by U.S. patents and other intellectual  
property rights. Use of this copyright  
protection technology must be authorized  
by Macrovision, and is intended for home  
and other limited viewing uses only unless  
otherwise authorized by Macrovision.  
Reverse engineering or disassembly is  
prohibited.  
JVC Technology Centre Europe GmbH  
Postfach 10 05 52  
61145 Friedberg  
Germany  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
8 Introduction  
Initial settings  
Basic operations  
Parts index  
Remote controller—RM-RK250  
18 Navigation system  
Basic operations  
Registering your home  
Starting guidance  
Searching for a place  
How you are guided  
Arranging your route  
Registering favourite points  
Traffic information on map—TMC  
Navigation menu items  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
51 Radio  
Listening to the radio  
RDS operations  
DAB operations  
59 Discs and HDD  
Disc operations  
Music server operations  
CD changer operations  
79 Other functions  
iPod/D. player operations  
Playing other external components  
Using Bluetooth devices  
AV Menu items  
Sound equalization  
109 Troubleshooting  
117 Specifications  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Initial settings  
When you turn on the unit for the first time, the initial setup screen appears. Follow the procedure  
below and make necessary settings.  
Turn on the power.  
Language  
Dansk  
1/2  
Deutsch  
English UK  
English US  
Español  
Adjust the following settings.  
4
Reverse Polarization  
Engage the parking brake, step on the  
brake pedal, then switch the gear lever.  
If Forward and Reverse alternates  
on the display, connection is correct.  
Select one of the alternatives (GND or  
Battery) that shows the gear position  
correctly.  
Select an item  
Proceed to the next setting  
Back to the previous setting  
1
2
Language  
Select the language you want for the  
display and the voice guidance.  
Finish the procedure.  
Store Display Mode  
Select Off  
.
• If you select On, the System starts in  
the navigation demonstration mode  
for shops. (☞ [47])  
3
Installation Angle  
Select which angle your unit is installed  
at. This setting is necessary for the  
precise functioning of the Navigation  
System.  
You can also change these settings (except  
Store Display Mode) through Setup  
Menu and AV Menu when necessary.  
•
•
•
Language ☞ [46]  
Installation Angle ☞ [46]  
Reverse Polarization ☞ [95]  
• See “Measuring the installation  
angle” on the Installation/Connection  
Manual.  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Calibration  
Before using the Navigation System first time, it is required to calibrate the Navigation System.  
• After deleting the calibration data (☞ [46] Reset Calibration) or changing the installation  
angle (☞ [46] Installation Angle), calibration is also required.  
1 Display the map screen.  
2 Display the detail screen and check the  
connections.  
[Hold]  
Calibrating...  
Detail  
GPS Antenna  
Sensor Status  
Learning Lv.  
GPS Antenna  
Speed Signal  
Parking Brake :Off  
Direction  
:0  
:OK [5]  
:12.0  
•
OK ] Connection is OK. ([5]: number of the GPS  
satellites whose signal is detected.)  
•
NG ] Aerial is disconnected or short-circuited.  
:Forward  
Speed Signal  
Calibrating...  
Drive the car for a while.  
• If the number increases as you speed up the car,  
connection is OK.  
: Calibration not in  
progress.  
Parking Brake  
Step on the brake pedal, then disengage and engage the  
parking brake repeatedly.  
: Calibration in progress.  
• If Off appears when disengaged and On appears when engaged, connection is OK.  
If the result is not good, check the connection.  
• You can see detailed information on the items of Sensor Status in Information  
Connection. (☞ [43])  
]
3 After confirming all the above connections, drive the car to start  
calibration.  
• This process can take five minutes or more depending on the average speed driven.  
• A certain speed (greater than 40 km/h) is required for calibration.  
• Calibration time differs among the cars.  
• During calibrating, you can use the AV functions of the unit (you can listen to the music,  
etc.)  
• If you turn off the ignition switch, calibration is temporarily stopped. When it is turned  
on, calibration will restart.  
Once calibration is finished, the arrowhead icon turns red and the current position information  
appears instead of Calibrating...  
calibration finished.  
.
Learning Lv. (maximum level is  
4
) reaches  
1
after  
Navigation (functions such as guidance or route simulation) cannot be used until calibration  
is complete.  
Initial settings  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic operations  
Reset the unit.  
• Use only when the internal  
system malfunctions.  
To turn on the power  
To change the source  
TUNER  
EXT-IN/iPod/D. PLAYER*  
(Back to the beginning)  
* You cannot select these sources if they are not  
ready.  
=
DAB*  
=
DISC*  
=
HDD  
Bluetooth Audio*  
=
CD-CH/  
=
To turn off the power  
=
[Hold]  
To turn off the AV function  
To drop the volume in a moment (ATT)  
[Hold]  
The display switches to the map screen.  
• To activate the AV function, press the  
button briefly.  
ATT indicator flashes.  
To restore the sound, press the same  
button again.  
To adjust the volume  
For navigation operations, ☞ [18]  
For radio operations, ☞ [51]  
For disc/HDD operations, ☞ [59]  
For Bluetooth operations, ☞ [83]  
For other sources, ☞ [79]  
.
.
.
.
.
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To switch between the map screen and AV  
screen  
AV screen  
FM1  
Classics  
Station name  
92.5 MHz  
AV screen  
Map screen  
You can always switch between the AV  
screen and the map screen.  
This switching does not affect the playback  
sound of the unit (except while recording an  
Audio CD) or the guidance function of the  
Navigation System.  
Distance to the next turn/Turn  
icon  
(While not guided: Speed/  
Direction) (☞ [35])  
Current time  
The built-in clock is automatically adjusted by  
receiving the GPS signals.  
To change the display of AV screens  
Vehicle information  
Video input  
AV screen 1  
AV screen 2  
(☞ [82])  
*
The number and contents of AV screens depend on the source.  
** Appears only when you have selected Videoor Camerafor Video Inputsetting (☞ [94]).  
How to change the control panel angle  
[Hold]  
Tilt 1  
Tilt 2  
Tilt 3  
Tilt 4  
Caution: Do not insert your finger behind the control panel.  
Basic operations 11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu operations  
To call up a menu  
Navigation Menus  
AV Menu  
Map screen  
AV screen  
FM1  
Classics  
Station name  
92.5 MHz  
Destination Menu ☞ [42]  
AV Menu ☞ [90]  
Destination  
Home  
1/2  
AV Menu  
Setup  
EQ  
1/2  
Return  
Address  
POI  
Sound  
Screen Control  
Aspect  
Previous  
• The display indications may change according  
to change of the specifications.  
Information Menu ☞ [42]  
Information  
Current Position  
1/2  
To navigate through menus  
TMC  
Turns List  
Trip  
Destination  
Press: Select a menu item  
Hold: Skip to the first menu  
item on the next page  
Proceed to the next menu  
Back to the previous menu  
Setup Menu ☞ [43]  
Setup  
1/2  
Guidance Voice  
Guidance Options  
Route Options  
Map Colour  
To go back to the previous screen  
and adjust other items:  
Map Options  
To cancel menu operations and  
return to the map screen or the AV  
screen:  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu screen  
Current menu title  
Current page number/  
Total page number  
Remaining time until the  
menu screen goes off.  
(Appears only on AV Menu.)  
Display  
1/2  
Language  
Demonstration  
Wall Paper  
Scroll  
Selected menu item  
Button icons indicate the  
available operations in  
each screen.  
Tag Display  
[Off]  
Current setting of the  
selected item.  
On some screens, special operations are indicated  
here with the button to use.  
Menu items  
Ex.:  
Delete  
: Button to press  
•
If items are displayed in grey, you  
cannot use them now.  
: Button to press and hold  
When no icon is displayed here, ENT button  
functions the same as button.  
•
¢
In this manual, operation of selecting a menu item is instructed as in the example below.  
Ex.:  
AV Menu  
]
EQ  
]
Pop  
1 Call up AV Menu  
.
3 Change the setting as you like.  
2 Select EQ in AV Menu  
.
EQ  
1/3  
Flat  
Hard Rock  
R&B  
Pop  
Jazz  
AV Menu  
Setup  
EQ  
1/2  
Sound  
Screen Control  
Aspect  
Exit  
[Flat]  
Now the setting is changed. Press DISP to exit  
from the menu, or BACK to go back to the  
previous menu.  
EQ  
1/3  
Flat  
Hard Rock  
R&B  
Pop  
Jazz  
Exit  
Basic operations 13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Parts index  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
p
q
w e  
On the map screen  
• Turn on the unit.  
On the AV screens  
On menu screens  
• Turn off the unit if pressed and held.  
• Attenuate/restore the sound.  
1
2
/ATT  
In Navigation Menus:  
Switch to the AV  
screen.  
In AV Menu: Change  
the source and switch  
to the AV screen.  
Switch to the AV screen. Change the source.  
Turn off the AV function if pressed and held.  
AV/SRC  
• Change the map view.  
• Display your current  
position after scrolling  
the map.  
Switch to the map screen.  
3
4
MAP/POS  
+/–  
Adjust the volume.  
In Navigation Menus:  
Switch to other  
menus.  
Call up Destination  
Menu. ☞ [42]  
Call up AV Menu. ☞ [90]  
In AV Menu: Go back  
to the top screen of AV  
Menu or switch to the  
AV screen.  
5
MENU  
Call up Phone Menu if pressed and held when the Bluetooth adapter is connected. ☞ [83]  
Enter the scaling mode. Change the display. ☞ [11] Exit from the menu.  
Activate TA Standby Reception/PTY In AV Menu: Activate  
6
7
/DISP  
T/P  
TRAFFIC  
Display the TMC List.  
☞ [40]  
Search. ☞ [54, 55, 58]  
TA Standby Reception.  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
On the map screen  
On the AV screens  
On menu screens  
DAB: Select services.  
DVD: Select titles/groups.  
Files: Select folders.  
Music server: Select albums.  
iPod/D. player:  
5
Enter the main menu.  
Pause/resume playback.  
Bluetooth Audio: Select a device.  
5 ∞  
8
/
Operate the current  
source. ☞ [50]  
∞
Select an item.  
FM/AM: Search for stations.  
DAB: Search for ensembles.  
Disc, Music server, iPod/D. player,  
Bluetooth Audio: Select tracks/  
chapters.  
9
p
/
• Open/close the control panel.  
• Change the control panel angle if pressed and held.  
• Enter the manual  
scrolling mode.  
☞ [22]  
/BACK  
7/BAND  
Tuner: Select the bands.  
• Repeat the last voice  
Disc: Stop playing.  
guidance if pressed  
Go back to the  
previous screen.  
q
and held during  
guidance. ☞ [33]  
Call up Shortcut Menu.  
Disc: Start playing.  
☞ [25]  
3
Confirm the selection.  
w
e
ENT/  
/
Detach the control panel.  
Remote controller—RM-RK250  
Installing the batteries  
Caution:  
R03(UM-4)/  
AAA(24F)  
• If the range or effectiveness of the remote  
control decreases, replace both batteries.  
• Do not expose batteries to heat or flame.  
The unit is equipped with the steering wheel  
remote control function.  
• See the Installation/Connection Manual  
Before using the remote controller:  
• Aim the remote controller directly at the  
remote sensor on the unit.  
(separate volume) for connection.  
• DO NOT expose the remote sensor to bright  
light (direct sunlight or artificial lighting).  
Remote sensor  
Parts index / Remote controller—RM-RK250 15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operations from the remote controller  
On the map screen  
On the AV screens  
On menu screens  
In Navigation Menus:  
Switch to the AV screen.  
In AV Menu: Change the  
source and switch to the  
AV screen.  
Switch to the AV screen. • Change the source.  
1
2
3
AV/OFF  
MAP/POS  
MENU  
Turn off the AV function if pressed and held.  
• Change the map view.  
• Display your current  
Switch to the map screen.  
position after scrolling  
the map.  
In Navigation Menus:  
Switch to other menus.  
In AV Menu: Go back to the  
top screen of AV Menu or  
switch to the AV screen.  
Call up Destination Menu.  
Call up AV Menu. ☞ [90]  
☞ [42]  
Call up Phone Menu if pressed and held when the Bluetooth adapter is connected. ☞ [83]  
T/P  
TRAFFIC  
Display the TMC List.  
☞ [40]  
Activate TA Standby Reception/ In AV Menu: Activate TA  
PTY Search. ☞ [54, 55, 58]  
4
5
Standby Reception.  
Call up Shortcut Menu.  
☞ [25]  
Disc: Start playing/pause.  
Confirm the selection.  
ENT 6  
DAB: Select services.  
DVD: Select titles/groups.  
Files: Select folders.  
Music server: Select albums.  
iPod/D. player:  
5
Enter the main menu.  
Pause/resume playback.  
Bluetooth Audio: Select a device.  
5 ∞  
6
/
Scroll the map (in eight  
directions).  
∞
Select an item.  
FM/AM: Search for stations.  
DAB: Search for ensembles.  
Disc, Music server, iPod/D. player,  
Bluetooth Audio: Select tracks/  
chapters.  
7
/
Call up Dial Menu when the Bluetooth adapter is connected. ☞ [86]  
8
9
PHONE  
Repeat the last voice  
guidance if pressed and  
held during guidance.  
BACK/BAND  
/7/  
VOL +/–  
Tuner: Select the bands.  
Disc: Stop playing.  
Go back to the previous  
screen.  
Adjust the volume.  
Scale the map.  
p
q
(Not used)  
(Not used)  
+/–  
Start guidance to a home.  
☞ [24]  
Start guidance to a home.  
☞ [24]  
w
HOME  
Attenuate/restore the sound.  
e
r
ATT  
DISP  
Enter the scaling mode. Change the display. ☞ [11]  
Exit from the menu.  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Only on the AV screens  
• Make selections in disc menus.  
• DISC +/– buttons: Change discs for a CD changer.  
Disc: Confirm the selection.  
t
y
u
i
o
;
ENT  
TOP M  
DVD MENU  
OSD  
RETURN  
DIRECT/  
CLEAR  
DVD/DivX 6: Show the disc menu. ☞ [67]  
VCD with PBC: Resume PBC playback. ☞ [67]  
Display the on-screen bar. ☞ [68]  
VCD with PBC: Return to the previous menu. ☞ [67]  
Disc: To select a chapter/title/group/folder/track directly. ☞ [66]  
a
s
Disc: Change the aspect ratio of the playback pictures.  
ASPECT  
Disc: To select a chapter/title/group/folder/track directly. ☞ [66]  
Tuner: Select a preset station.  
CD changer: Select a disc.  
Number  
keys  
d
Bluetooth phone: Input telephone number. ☞ [87]  
Disc: Reverse search/forward search. Slow playback if pressed while paused.  
Disc: Select audio languages/audio channels.  
Disc: Select subtitles.  
f
g
h
j
1/¡  
Disc: Select a view angle.  
1
3
2
4
67  
5
8
9
a
d
s
p
e
q
f
w
r
ghj  
These buttons do  
not function at this  
position.  
u
t
o
i
y
;
Remote controller—RM-RK250 17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Navigation System  
20 Safety instructions for  
Navigation System  
22 Basic operations  
24 Registering your home  
To register your home  
To go home  
24  
24  
26 Starting guidance  
Setting a destination using Shortcut Menu  
Setting a destination using Destination Menu  
To go back to where you started  
26  
27  
27  
28 Searching for a place  
By address  
28  
29  
30  
30  
31  
31  
31  
From the list of POI  
From last destinations  
POI near a place/route  
From your favourites  
By postcode  
By coordinates  
32 How you are guided  
Getting information on your route and places  
Customizing how you are guided  
34  
35  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
36 Arranging your route  
Setting places to stop by  
Saving and loading routes  
Avoiding a congestion ahead  
36  
37  
37  
38 Registering favourite points  
Marking your favourite points  
Editing your favourite points  
38  
38  
40 Traffic information on map  
—TMC  
What is TMC?  
40  
41  
41  
Checking the TMC information  
How TMC information is reflected in navigation  
42 Navigation menu items  
Destination Menu  
Information Menu  
Setup Menu  
42  
42  
43  
47 Additional information  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Safety instructions for Navigation System  
• Traffic signs should be observed carefully  
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS  
while driving using the Navigation System.  
Navigation System is only an aid. Driver must  
always decide whether or not to heed the  
information provided. JVC does not accept  
liability for erroneous data provided by the  
Navigation System.  
Use of the Navigation System is only permitted  
if the traffic conditions are suitable and you  
are absolutely sure that no risk, obstruction  
or inconvenience will be incurred to you,  
your passengers or other road users. The  
requirements of the Road Traffic Regulations  
must always be followed. The destination must  
not be entered while driving the car.  
The Navigation System serves solely as an aid  
to navigation. It never releases the drivers from  
their duties to drive carefully and to make  
own judgement in road traffic. Inaccurate  
or incorrect instructions may happen to be  
given due to changing traffic conditions. The  
actual road signs and traffic regulations must  
therefore always be observed. In particular, the  
Navigation System cannot be used as an aid to  
orientation when visibility is poor.  
• Traffic guidance is restricted to  
passenger vehicles only. Special driving  
recommendations and regulations for other  
vehicles (e.g. commercial vehicles) are not  
included.  
• Do not operate the unit while driving.  
Terms of licence  
You are granted a non-exclusive licence to use  
the database for your personal purposes. The  
present licence does not authorise the granting  
of sublicenses.  
Use of the data is only permitted in this  
specific JVC system. It is forbidden to extract  
or make further use of significant parts of  
the database content, or to duplicate, modify,  
adapt, translate, analyse, decompile or reverse-  
engineer any part thereof.  
This Navigation System must only be used for  
its intended purpose. The volume of the car  
radio/Navigation System must be adjusted so  
that external noise is still audible.  
Navigation guidance is performed, based on  
the database, therefore, it may not be applicable  
to the current situation because of changes in  
traffic conditions (e.g. changes in tollroads,  
principal roads, one-way traffic, or other traffic  
regulations). In this case, observe the current  
traffic signs or regulations.  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WARNING:  
When replacing/rotating the tyres:  
It is required to clear all the accumulated  
calibration data which is important for accurate  
navigation. To clear the data, perform Reset  
Calibration on page 46.  
Road traffic regulations always take priority  
when a vehicle is being driven in traffic.  
Navigation System is only an aid. Errors may  
occur in individual data items/entries. At all  
times, the driver must decide whether or not to  
heed the information provided.  
JVC does not accept liability for erroneous data  
provided by the Navigation System.  
On map updating  
If “Your map data is more than one year old  
and updates may be available.” appears on the  
monitor, visit <http://www.jvc-exad.com>.  
For details about updating your unit, visit  
<http://www.jvc-exad.com>.  
© 2006 NAVTEQ All rights reserved.  
Safety instructions for Navigation System 21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic operations  
Current position mode  
—The map scrolls automatically so that your position is always at the centre of the map.  
Scale  
Show TMC information. (☞ [41]  
)
Scale the map.  
Switch to the AV screen.  
Adjust the volume.  
Your position  
Call up a menu screen.  
Current time  
Current street name  
Call up Shortcut Menu.  
Change the map view. (  
next page)/Display your  
current position.  
☞
Scroll the map.  
Operate the current AV source. (☞ [50]  
)
To scroll the map  
To change the map scale  
1
1
2
Scale bar  
Zoom in  
2
Zoom in rapidly  
Zoom out  
Zoom out rapidly  
The map scrolls in eight directions.  
• Press and hold the button to keep  
scrolling the map.  
To display your current position  
Direction and  
distance from your  
current position  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To change the map view  
To call up menus  
Navigation Menus  
The map view changes as follows:  
Each time you press the button, the menu  
switches as follows:  
Heading Up  
=
3D Map  
=
North Up  
(Map screen)  
Heading Up  
The map rotates so that you are always  
displayed heading “upwards.” The direction  
is displayed with a compass icon  
=
=
=
=
Destination Menu  
Information Menu  
Setup Menu  
.
(Back to the map screen)  
Menu operations ☞ [13]  
Menu items ☞ [42 – 46]  
Shortcut Menu  
While the map is displayed...  
3D Map  
The map is displayed in “heading up” and in  
a three-dimensional view. The direction is  
Shortcut Menu appears. ☞ [25]  
displayed with a compass icon  
.
Icons on the map  
Favourite points (☞ [38 – 39]  
)
POI (Point Of Interest) (☞ [30, 49]  
)
North Up  
The map view is oriented with north  
TMC (☞ [40, 50]  
)
“upwards,” like usual paper maps. The  
direction you are heading to is displayed at  
the upper right corner of the screen with an  
• Favourite icons are displayed on the map  
when a group is selected in the Favourite  
Icon setting (☞ [45]) and the map scale is  
between 30 m and 2.0 km.  
icon such as  
.
• POI icons are displayed on the map when a  
group is selected in the POI Icon setting (☞  
[45]). They may not be displayed depending  
on the map scale and the POI data.  
• TMC icons are displayed on the map when  
the Traffic Display setting is activated (☞  
[45]) and the map scale is between 30 m and  
2.0 km.  
You can also change the map view through  
Setup Menu ] Map Options  
]
Map  
View (☞ [45]).  
Basic operations 23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Registering your home  
To register your home  
To go home (Home)  
Register your home or your office, wherever  
you go often, as Home, so that you can easily set  
that place as destination.  
When you have registered your home, you can  
easily get guided to home.  
• You can register homes only after calibration  
is finished. (☞ [9])  
While not guided...  
1 Call up Shortcut Menu.  
1 If you are at home now, check  
that your home is displayed at  
the centre of the map.  
• Adjust the position by scrolling the map if  
necessary.  
2 Call up Shortcut Menu.  
2 Select [Go Home]  
to start  
guidance.  
• If you have registered several homes,  
select the one you want to go to from a  
list.  
On the remote:  
3 Select [Add to Favourite]  
.
The home is marked with  
icon.  
You can also be guided to home through  
Destination Menu ] Home  
.
To cancel guidance  
4 Select [Set Home]  
.
1 Call up Shortcut Menu.  
2 Select [Cancel Guidance]  
A confirmation message appears. Press ENT  
to confirm the operation. Press BACK to  
cancel.  
The home is marked with  
icon.  
.
• The icon may not appear depending on the  
map scale and your Favourite Icon setting.  
(☞ [45])  
• You can register several places as Home by  
registering the places as favourite points and  
setting their group to Home. (☞ [38, 39])  
You can also cancel guidance through  
Destination Menu ] Cancel Guide  
.
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
What is Shortcut Menu?  
On the map screen, you can call up Shortcut Menu by pressing ENT. Shortcut Menu is a gateway  
to various operations.  
Shortcut Menu  
While not guided  
Map screen  
While guided  
To select an icon, press ENT or one of the four  
keys on the right circle button corresponding  
to the icon.  
Icon  
Name  
View  
Function  
Button  
Show information on this place. ☞ [35]  
Information  
Start guidance to a home. ☞ [24] (Not  
Go Home  
Set Home  
selectable if no home is registered.)  
Register this place as home. ☞ [24] (Appears  
when no home is registered and a favourite  
icon is selected.)  
Cancel  
Guidance  
Cancel the guidance. ☞ [24]  
Add this place to your favourite points. ☞  
[38]  
Add to  
Favourite  
Edit this favourite point. ☞ [39] (Appears  
only when a favourite icon is selected. Not  
selectable while driving.)  
Edit Favourite  
Vicinity  
Go Here  
Search for POI around this place. ☞ [31]  
Start guidance to this place. ☞ [26]  
Recalculate the route to stop by this place. ☞  
[36] (Appears only while guided.)  
Add to Via  
Point  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals SearcRheAgnidstDeoriwnngloyaod.ur home 25  
Starting guidance  
• You can set destinations only after calibration is finished. (☞ [9])  
Setting a destination using Shortcut Menu  
Scroll the map to display the destination at the centre of the  
map.  
Call up Shortcut Menu.  
Select [Go Here]  
to start guidance.  
The System starts calculating the route to the selected destination, and guidance starts.  
To cancel guidance  
You can also cancel guidance through  
Destination Menu ] Cancel Guide  
.
1 Call up Shortcut Menu.  
2 Select [Cancel Guidance]  
.
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting a destination using Destination Menu  
Call up Destination Menu.  
Select one of the methods to search for your destination.  
Destination  
Home*  
1/2  
Destination  
Vicinity  
2/2  
☞ [24]  
☞ [30]  
☞ [31]  
☞ [31]  
☞ [31]  
☞ [below]  
☞ [28]  
Return**  
Address  
POI  
Favourite  
Postcode  
Coordinates  
Route Edit  
☞ [29]  
☞ [30]  
Previous  
*
During guidance, Cancel Guideappears.  
** During guidance, Avoid Sectionappears.  
• You cannot select the items when they are grey.  
To see the search result on  
map  
The information on the search result appears.  
Direction and distance from  
your current position  
Select [Go Here]  
to start guidance.  
The System starts calculating the route to the selected destination, and guidance starts.  
To go back to where you started (Return  
)
You can go back to the start point of the last guidance.  
1 Call up Destination Menu.  
2
Destination  
Return  
]
Starting guidance 27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Searching for a place  
To input names, addresses, or numbers  
3 Select the item you want from the  
list.  
Ex. Input screen for a city name  
By address (Address  
)
BS  
More  
1 Call up Destination Menu.  
Enter a space Display other  
keyboards*  
Delete the last character  
Display the list of  
matches  
You can also change the keyboard by pressing  
DISP. For available characters, ☞ [105].  
2
Destination  
Address  
]
*
Address  
Deutschland  
** Buttons vary depending on the input item.  
City  
Street  
House Number  
1 Enter characters.  
Move the cursor on the  
keyboard  
3 Select a country from the list.  
• Input the city name if a country is already  
selected.  
Enter the selected character  
Select Country  
Andorra  
1/6  
Belgien  
• Available characters are automatically  
narrowed down as the System searches its  
database for matches.  
Deutschland  
Dänemark  
England  
2 Display the list of matches.  
4 Input the city name.  
- Input City Name -  
• This button is available when the matches  
are narrowed down to 100 or less.  
• You can also display the list of matches by  
pressing and holding ENT.  
• When the matches are narrowed down to  
5 or less, the list appears automatically.  
BS  
More  
• Inputting characters ☞ [left column]  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5 Input the street name.  
4 Select a method to search for a  
POI with.  
• You can also select the centre of the city.  
(The list of city centres may appear.) You  
do not have to input the house number in  
this case.  
You can search for a POI in three ways:  
By name  
By category  
By telephone number  
• Select the area to search from the list if  
Select Area is displayed.  
POI  
6 Input the house number.  
Deutschland  
Name  
Category  
Telephone  
• You can also select the entire street or an  
intersection on the street.  
• If no data of house number for the  
selected street is available in the database,  
this step is skipped.  
By name  
1 Input the name of the POI you are  
looking for.  
• Inputting characters ☞ [28]  
From the list of POI (POI  
)
2 Select a category (then a sub  
category if any) of the POI.  
The System has a huge database of POI (Point  
Of Interest), such as restaurants, petrol stations,  
hospitals, etc.  
3 Input the city name if asked.  
4 Select a POI from the list.  
1 Call up Destination Menu.  
By category  
1 Input the city name to search.  
• Inputting characters ☞ [28]  
2
Destination  
POI  
]
POI  
2 Select a category (then a sub  
Deutschland  
Name  
Category  
Telephone  
category if any) of the POI.  
3 Select a POI from the list.  
By telephone number  
1 Input the telephone number.  
• Inputting characters ☞ [28]  
2 Select a POI from the list.  
3 Select a country from the list.  
• Proceed to the next step if a country is  
already selected.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search SAenadrDcohwinngloafod.r a place 29  
From last destinations (Previous  
)
POI near a place/route (Vicinity)  
You can select a place from the last 50  
destinations and via points.  
You can search for a POI around the place  
where you are now. While guided, you can also  
search for a POI near the destination or along  
the route.  
1 Call up Destination Menu.  
1 Call up Destination Menu.  
2
Destination  
]Previous  
2
Destination  
Vicinity  
The list of previous destinations/via points  
is displayed.  
]
Select Category  
Business  
1/3  
3 Select a place from the list.  
City/Town  
Community  
Emergency  
Food  
To delete items in the list of previous  
destinations/via points  
Area: Local  
Change  
1 After step 2 above...  
While guided, select the area to search if  
necessary.  
[Hold]  
2 Check the boxes of the items you  
want to delete.  
[Hold]  
Select Area  
Local Area  
Near Destination  
Along Route  
• Checkbox operations ☞ [105]  
3
[Hold]  
Local Area: within 2 km of your current  
position. If no POI is found in this area,  
the System expands the area to search.  
Near Destination: within 2 km of the  
destination. If no POI is found in this  
area, the System expands the area to  
search.  
A confirmation message appears. Press  
ENT to confirm the operation. Press BACK  
to cancel.  
Along Route: 50 km along the route you  
are taking.  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
By postcode (Postcode  
)
3 Select a category (then a sub  
category if any) of the POI.  
• Search by postcode is not available in some  
countries.  
Select Category  
Business  
1/3  
1 Call up Destination Menu.  
City/Town  
Community  
Emergency  
Food  
2
Destination  
Postcode  
Area: Local  
Change  
]
The result is listed in the order of distance  
from the place where you are.  
3 Select a country.  
• Input the postcode if a country is already  
selected.  
4 Select a POI from the list.  
4 Input the postcode.  
You can search for a POI around a place  
on the map through Shortcut Menu ]  
• The input screen varies with the selected  
country.  
• Inputting characters ☞ [28]  
[Vicinity]  
above after selecting [Vicinity]  
. Follow steps 3 and 4  
5 Input the street name.  
.
6 Input the house number.  
• You can also select the entire street.  
From your favourites (Favourite  
)
By coordinates (Coordinates  
)
• Registering your favourite points ☞ [38].  
1 Call up Destination Menu.  
1 Call up Destination Menu.  
2
Destination  
Favourite  
2
Destination  
Coordinates  
]
]
Select Group  
Home  
1/2  
3 Input the latitude and the  
3
12  
6
26  
15  
Friend  
longitude.  
Relative  
Business  
Visit  
Moves the cursor.  
To correct a  
Delete  
misentry, move  
the cursor and  
enter the number  
3 Select a group.  
4 Select a favourite point from the  
South  
Detail  
again.  
list.  
Switches South and North for  
latitude, or East and West for  
longitude.  
4 Select Detail when finished.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search SAenadrDcohwinngloafod.r a place 31  
How you are guided  
Destination found  
Route calculation  
Calculating...  
To cancel calculation, press BACK.  
Screen while guided  
Estimated time of  
arrival and distance  
to the destination/  
next via point  
Route to take  
Current time  
Next turn/  
Distance to the  
next turn  
: Name of the current street  
: Name of the next street  
To cancel guidance  
You can also cancel guidance through  
Destination Menu ] Cancel Guide  
.
1 Call up Shortcut Menu.  
To adjust the volume of the voice guidance  
☞ [43] Volume  
2 Select [Cancel Guidance]  
.
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Guidance at turns  
When you approach a turn, the System guides you with voice guidance and indications on the  
screen.  
• Guidance voice comes out only through the front speakers (and the front line out on the rear).  
Guidance point  
1
“Right turn  
1 km ahead.”  
When you do not  
have to make a  
turn, the System  
gives no guidance.  
Name of the current street  
Following turn (if any)  
2
3
“Right turn  
300 m ahead.”  
Indicate the distance to the next turn Name of the next street  
“Right turn  
now.”  
What if I miss a turn?  
Don’t worry. The System  
calculates a new route quickly  
and guides you to the destination.  
To repeat the last voice guidance  
• You can remove the progress bar to the next  
turn by pressing MAP.  
[Hold]  
How you are guided 33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting information on your route and places  
• You can also view the trip through  
To see the itinerary and the turns list  
Information Menu ] Trip  
.
Map screen  
• You can also view the turns list through  
Information Menu ] Turns List  
.
[Hold]  
Trip information  
Trip  
Trip  
Distance Driven  
8.1km  
0:12  
Time Driven  
Average speed  
40km/h  
Trip  
Info  
Turn on map  
Turns list  
Turns List  
500 m A124  
2 km A2120  
1/5  
2.5km xx street  
6 km Z square  
7 km B12  
Prev.  
Next  
Press  
∞
/
5
to see the next/previous turn.  
To get information on the destination and via points  
1 Call up Information Menu.  
[twice]  
2
Information  
Destination  
]
3 Select the destination or a via point.  
Remaining 2.7km  
Arrival 13:54  
13:54  
2.7 km  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To check the estimated arrival time and  
distance to the next via point  
To see how your trip will go  
Information Menu ] Simulation  
appears on the display.  
[Hold]  
To cancel simulation and resume guidance,  
press MENU, then DISP.  
disappears.  
Each time you press and hold the button,  
the information on the upper left corner  
alternates between that of the next via point  
and of the final destination.  
Customizing how you are guided  
To customize the guidance and display on the  
map screen  
☞ [43] Guidance View  
To see information on a place  
• This operation is always possible regardless of  
whether you are guided or not.  
To customize how the map scale changes  
1 Display where you want to  
know of at the centre of the  
map.  
☞ [45] Auto Zoom  
To customize the voice guidance on an AV  
screen  
☞ [44] Interruption  
2 Call up Shortcut Menu.  
To customize the mixing of audio sound and  
voice guidance  
☞ [43] Audio Mixing  
The guidance continues even when you  
switch the display to an AV screen. Guidance  
information is displayed on the lower-right  
corner of the AV screen.  
3 Select [View Information]  
.
FM1  
Classics  
Station name  
92.5 MHz  
If a telephone number is available, you can  
call to the number through JVC’s Bluetooth  
adapter. ☞ [86]  
Distance to the next turn/Turn icon  
(While not guided: Speed/Direction)  
You can also get information on your current  
position through Information Menu ]  
Current Position  
.
How you are guided 35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Arranging your route  
Setting places to stop by  
3 Select the via point you want to  
move.  
After selecting your destination, you can select  
up to nine places (“via points”) to stop by.  
Select Point  
1/2  
1
Station  
Forest Inn  
Intr’l Airport  
Car Dealer  
2
To add via points  
After guidance has started...  
3
4
5
Michael  
1 Select a place you want to stop  
by.  
Select  
4 Move the selected via point in  
• Searching for a place ☞ [27]  
the list.  
Move Point  
1/2  
1
Station  
Forest Inn  
Car Dealer  
Michael  
2
4
5
3
Intr’l Airport  
Set  
Delete  
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to move  
2 Select [Add to Via Point]  
.
other via points.  
6 Finish the rearrangement.  
The System starts calculating the new route,  
and guidance starts.  
• You can also use MENU, DISP,  
MAP, or  
.
You can also set via points on the map  
through Shortcut Menu ] [Add to Via  
A confirmation message appears. Press ENT  
to confirm the operation. Press BACK to  
cancel.  
Point]  
.
The System starts calculating the new route,  
and guidance starts.  
• No confirmation message appears if the  
via points are not changed.  
To delete a via point  
Press and hold ENT in step 4.  
A confirmation message appears. Press ENT  
to confirm the operation. Press BACK to  
cancel.  
To rearrange the sequence of via points  
1 Call up Destination Menu.  
2
Destination  
Route Edit  
Edit  
]
For other options for routing ☞ [44] Route  
Options  
]
The list of via points appears.  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To delete saved routes  
Saving and loading routes  
1 Call up Destination Menu.  
You can save up to 50 combinations of  
destination and via points. You can easily call  
up your usual route without the trouble of  
setting destinations.  
2
Destination  
Route Edit  
Delete  
• Each route can contain up to nine via points.  
]
To save a route  
]
1 Select your destination (and via  
points if necessary), and start  
guidance.  
3 Check the boxes at the head of  
the routes you want to delete.  
• Checkbox operations ☞ [105]  
2 Call up Destination Menu.  
3
Destination  
Route Edit  
Save  
]
4 Delete the selected routes.  
]
4 Name the route you are saving.  
[Hold]  
• Inputting characters ☞ [105]  
A confirmation message appears. Press ENT  
to confirm the operation. Press BACK to  
cancel.  
5 Select Store  
To load a saved route  
.
Avoiding a congestion ahead  
1 Call up Destination Menu.  
If you realize a congestion exists ahead...  
2
Destination  
Route Edit  
Load  
While being guided...  
]
1 Call up Destination Menu.  
]
3 Select the route you want to  
2
Destination  
Avoid Section  
take.  
]
Load  
Route A  
Route B  
Route C  
Route D  
3 Select the distance to avoid.  
Select Distance  
1km  
3km  
5km  
10km  
15km  
A confirmation message appears. Press ENT  
to confirm the operation. Press BACK to  
cancel.  
Start  
A confirmation message appears. Press ENT  
to confirm the operation. Press BACK to  
cancel.  
The route is calculated, and guidance starts.  
A detour is calculated, and guidance starts.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals SearchAArnrdaDnogwinngloaydo.ur route 37  
Registering favourite points  
Just like you mark your friend’s house or a nice  
Chinese restaurant on your map book, you can  
register your favourite points in the system.  
To proceed to edit the registered favourite  
point, select [Edit Favourite]  
step 4.  
after  
Marking your favourite points  
You can open the edit screen in step 3 of  
“Editing your favourite points.”  
• You can register 300 favourite points.  
• You can register favourite points only when  
the map scale is 2.0 km or more detailed.  
1 Display the place you want to  
save as favourite at the centre of  
the map.  
Editing your favourite points  
1 Call up Destination Menu.  
• Searching for a place ☞ [27]  
2 Call up Shortcut Menu.  
2
Destination  
Favourite  
]
Select Group  
Home  
1/2  
2
12  
Friend  
Relative  
Business  
Visit  
5
17  
24  
Delete  
3 Select [Add to Favourite]  
.
3 Select a group, then a favourite  
point to edit.  
The favourite point is registered in the  
group of Other and marked with  
icon.  
• The icon may not appear depending on  
the map scale and your Favourite Icon  
setting. (☞ [45])  
[Hold]  
Edit Favourite  
Input Name  
Other  
• To be guided to a favourite point ☞ [31]  
Input Address  
Input Phone Number  
Sound Off  
Delete  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To delete a favourite point  
Press and hold ENT after step 3 of “Editing  
your favourite points.”  
4 Select the item you want to edit.  
A confirmation message appears. Press ENT  
to confirm the operation. Press BACK to  
cancel.  
• You cannot delete a favourite point  
directly after editing it. To delete it, exit  
from the Edit Favourite screen once  
and do the procedure above.  
The name of the favourite point.  
• You can use up to 32  
characters.  
See the table on the right for the  
available ten groups.  
Name  
Group  
To delete all the favourite points in a group  
1 Press and hold ENT after step 2 of  
Categorize the favourite points  
so that you can find them easily.  
“Editing your favourite points.”  
The address of the favourite  
point.  
If you have connected  
KS-BTA200, you can call to this  
number. ☞ [86]  
Address  
2 Select the groups to delete.  
Select Group  
Home  
1/2  
Telephone  
number  
2
12  
5
Friend  
Relative  
Business  
Visit  
17  
24  
Delete  
Sound  
Sound Off, Alarm, Bell,  
Siren  
Check  
You can assign a sound to each  
favourite point. You hear the  
assigned sound when you come  
close (about within 200 m) to  
the favourite point.  
• Checkbox operations ☞ [105]  
3 Delete the selected groups.  
• Press ENT to listen to a sample  
sound.  
[Hold]  
A confirmation message appears. Press ENT  
to confirm the operation. Press BACK to  
cancel.  
5 Edit the item.  
• Inputting characters ☞ [105]  
Icons and groups for favourite points  
Home  
Shopping  
Friend  
Relative  
Business  
Visit  
Food  
Caution  
Sightseeing  
Other  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All ManualsRSeegaricshteArnindgDfoawvnolouardit.e points 39  
Traffic information on map—TMC  
What is TMC?  
TMC information on the map  
Congestion TMC icon  
TMC (Traffic Message Channel) is a technology  
for delivering real-time traffic information to  
drivers. The traffic information sent by a TMC  
radio station is received and analysed by the  
System. The System can inform you of where  
congestion exists, and how you can detour it.  
• You do not have to tune in to a special radio  
station to receive the TMC information.  
How to get TMC information  
• List of TMC icons ☞ [50]  
This unit can receive the TMC information  
provided by Trafficmaster and V-trafic. It can  
also receive free TMC information.  
• TMC icons and congestion lines are  
displayed on the map when the Traffic  
Display setting is activated (☞ [45]).  
• TMC icons are displayed on the map  
when its scale is between 30 m and  
2.0 km.  
• TMC is not available in some countries.  
• Congestion lines are displayed on the  
map when its scale is between 30 m and  
5.0 km.  
As the TMC information is transmitted  
by radio stations, JVC cannot assume  
responsibility for the completeness or  
accuracy of the information.  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Checking the TMC information  
How TMC information is reflected in  
navigation  
TMC  
1/2  
If Bypass Traffic is set to Manual Reroute  
(☞ [44]), [Reroute] appears on the screen when  
the TMC service informs the System of traffic  
accidents or congestion ahead on your route.  
While guided, select the area to see the  
information of.  
Along Route or All Information  
.
Reroute  
To check the information and decide whether  
to calculate a detour  
[Hold]  
To see detailed information  
Select an item on the list and press ¢.  
If Bypass Traffic is set to Auto Reroute  
,
the System automatically calculates a new route  
when TMC informs of an obstacle on your  
route.  
If Bypass Traffic is set to Off, the System  
does not take TMC information into account in  
calculating a route.  
You can also call up the TMC List through  
Information Menu ] TMC  
.
You can also see detailed information of a  
TMC icon on the map in the following way:  
Display a TMC icon at the centre of the map  
] Shortcut Menu ] [View Information]  
Traffic information on map—TMC 41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
☞ [12] for the detailed Menu operations.  
Navigation menu items  
Destination Menu  
Menu items  
Start guidance to a home. (Appears only while not guided.) ☞ [24]  
Cancels the guidance. (Appears only while guided.) ☞ [24, 26, 32]  
Home  
Cancel Guide  
Starts guidance to the place where you have started your last guidance.  
(Appears only while not guided.) ☞ [27]  
Return  
Calculate a new route avoiding the selected distance ahead. (Appears only  
while guided.) ☞ [37]  
Avoid Section  
1km  
,
3km  
,
5km  
,
10km  
,
15km (or 1mi  
,
3mi  
,
5mi  
,
10mi  
,
15mi *1  
)
Address  
POI  
Previous  
Vicinity  
Favourite  
Postcode  
Coordinates  
Search for a place using the database in the System. ☞ [27]  
• Arrange the order of via points.  
Route Edit  
• Save, load or delete routes. ☞ [36]  
Edit Save, Load, Delete  
,
*1 Depends on your setting of Measuring Units(☞ [46]).  
Information Menu  
Menu items  
You can see the information on your current position.  
Country, City, Street, Latitude, Longitude  
Current Position  
You can check the TMC information. ☞ [40]  
TMC  
Along Route*1, All Information  
Turns List*1  
Trip*1  
Destination*1  
You can see the list of turns on your route. ☞ [34]  
You can see the information on your route. ☞ [34]  
You can see the list of via points and the destination. ☞ [34]  
You can see the status of GPS reception.  
GPS  
*1 Selectable only while guided.  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Information Menu (continued)  
Menu items  
You can check the connection status.  
Learning Lv., Angle, GPS Antenna, Gyro, Speed Signal,  
Parking Brake, Reverse Signal, Illumination, Tel. Muting  
Connection  
You can check the model name, the version of the unit, and the version of  
the map database.  
Version  
Once the route is determined, you can simulate it on the map. ☞ [35]  
Simulation  
Setup Menu  
Menu items  
Selectable settings  
(Initial setting)  
Gender  
Volume  
Female, Male*1  
*1  
Adjust the volume of the voice guidance.  
Off  
,
01 to 50 (25)  
*1  
Select the guidance output channel.  
Output Channel  
Audio Mixing  
L-ch Only, R-ch Only, L-ch & R-ch  
You can turn down the volume of the AV source while voice  
*1  
guidance is produced.  
Muting: The AV source sound does not come out.  
Attenuation: The AV source sound is lowered.  
Normal: The AV source sound is not changed.  
Select the items to be displayed at turns.  
Guidance View  
• Next turn icon: Big  
Auto Magnification  
:
• Following turn icon: On  
• Progress bar to the turn: On  
• Next turn icon: Big  
Symbolic View  
:
• Following turn icon: Off  
• Progress bar to the turn: Off  
• Next turn icon: Small  
Simple View  
:
• Following turn icon: Off  
• Progress bar to the turn: Off  
*1 Press ENT to listen to a sample voice with the current setting.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals SearNchaAvnigdaDtoiownnlmoaedn. u items 43  
Setup Menu (continued)  
Menu items  
Selectable settings  
(Initial setting)  
Select the voice guidance output on an AV screen.  
• A small icon of the next turn is always displayed at the lower-  
right corner of the AV screen while guided, regardless of this  
setting. If you want to see the turn on map, press MAP to switch  
to the map screen.  
Interruption  
Off  
,
On  
Bypass Traffic  
Voice Cruise  
Off  
,
Auto Reroute Manual Reroute ☞ [41]  
,
When this function is activated, the System automatically increases  
the guidance volume level as the car speeds up.  
To obtain stronger effect, set the level to higher numbers.  
Off  
,
01 to 10 (05)  
Select the type of attention tone, which comes out before voice  
guidance.  
Off, Attention 1, Attention 2, Attention 3  
• Press ENT to listen to a sample sound.  
Attention Tone  
Priority  
Fastest: The System calculates the shortest journey time.  
Shortest: The System calculates the shortest route to the  
destination.  
• This setting is effective next time the System calculates a route.  
Check the boxes at the head of the options you want to be effective.  
• This setting is effective next time the System calculates a route.  
Avoid Motorway  
Avoid Ferry  
Avoid Toll Road  
Day Colour  
Select the colour for the day screen.  
Type 1, Type 2, Type 3  
Select the colour for the route.  
Route Colour  
Night Mode  
Colour 1, Colour 2, Colour 3  
Select the condition to switch the display to the night screen.  
Off: Cancels.  
Auto: Switches to the night screen when you turn on the  
headlights.  
Time: Switches to the day/night screen at set times.  
• When you choose Time, set when to switch the display colour on  
the following screen.  
Brightness*2  
Set the brightness of the screen.  
–15 to +15 (00)  
*2 This setting is shared with the Screen Controlsetting in AV Menu. (☞ [96]  
)
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup Menu (continued)  
Menu items  
Map View  
Auto Zoom  
Selectable settings  
North Up Heading Up  
(Initial setting)  
,
,
3D Map ☞ [23]  
Select how the zoom scale changes.  
Off: (Effective only while guided) Zoom into 30 m scale at turns  
if Guidance View is set to Auto Magnification. If else, the  
scale does not change at turns.  
Fit For Guidance: (Effective only while guided) When you  
approach turns, the scale changes gradually so that your current  
position and the turn is always displayed on the map at the same  
time.  
Fit For Speed: The scale changes gradually in accordance with  
the speed of your car; as you slow down, the map is zoomed in.  
Check the box at the head of each POI category to display its icons  
on the map.  
POI Icon  
Check the box at the head of each favourite group to display its  
icons on the map.  
Favourite Icon  
Car Tracks*3  
Display: Check the box to display the tracks of your car on the  
map.  
Record*4: Check the box to record the track of your car.  
Delete: Deletes the recorded tracks.  
Check the box to display the current/next street name on the  
monitor.  
Street Name  
Check the box to display the one-way icon on the map.  
Check the box to display the TMC icons on the map.  
One-Way  
Traffic Display  
*3 When you want the track of the current drive displayed, you need to check both Displayand Record.  
*4 The recorded tracks are deleted from old ones when the internal memory gets full.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals SearNchaAvnigdaDtoiownnlmoaedn. u items 45  
Setup Menu (continued)  
Menu items  
Selectable settings  
(Initial setting)  
Select the angle of the unit measured by the supplied gauge. (See  
also the Installation/Connection Manual.)  
Installation  
Angle  
1
2
3
4
: –5.0° to 1.0°  
: 1.0° to 6.0°  
: 6.0° to 14.0°  
: 14.0° to 32.0°  
• It is not recommended to install the main unit at an angle of  
more than 30˚; otherwise, the malfunction may result.  
• Guidance is canceled when you change this setting.  
Select whether to use WAAS and EGNOS to increase the accuracy  
WAAS/EGNOS  
of positioning.  
Off: Cancels.  
On: Activates.  
Language*5  
Select the language used for on-screen information and voice  
guidance.  
Dansk, Deutsch, English UK, English US, Español,  
Français, Italiano, Nederlands, Svenska  
Reset the calibration data in the following cases:  
• When you reinstall the unit to another car.  
Reset Calibration  
• When you change Installation Angle.(☞ above)  
• When you replace or rotate the tyres.  
Once this is carried out, the calibration data is cleared. Calibration  
starts when you exit from the menu. (☞ [9])  
• Guidance is canceled when you reset the calibration data.  
Select the measuring units for distance.  
Measuring Units  
Coordinates  
km / m mi / yd  
,
Select the measuring units for coordinate degrees.  
Deg / Min / Sec Deg / Milli / Micro  
,
If you find your current position displayed on a wrong place on the  
map, use this setting to correct your position.  
Adjust the position with 4¢5∞, then the direction with 5∞.  
Car Position  
*5 This setting is shared with the Languagesetting in AV Menu (☞ [90]).  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
POI around a place/route  
Initial settings  
• If no POI data exists for the selected area, POI  
not found. appears on the display. Press  
BACK until the main categories list appears.  
• POI search in Along Route is canceled if the  
guidance finishes or if rerouting starts before  
the search completes.  
• If you select On for Store Display Mode  
,
the system starts up in demonstration mode  
for shops, and the initial setup screen appears  
every time you turn on the unit after turning  
off and on the ignition switch. Select Off to  
obtain the full performance from the unit.  
By coordinates  
Basic operations  
• If the entered position is out of the database,  
Out of the map coverage. appears on the  
display. Enter again.  
• In a small scale, the map scrolling may stop  
when the map view approaches the border  
of the map coverage. Scrolling resumes in a  
larger scale when you keep scrolling the map.  
Basic navigation procedure  
• When you reach the area approximately  
within 30 m around the destination/via point,  
the Navigation System considers that you  
have reached your destination/via point.  
Searching for a place  
• While driving at a speed faster than  
10 km/h, you cannot select a destination.  
If you try to do the operation, the following  
screen appears, and you cannot continue the  
operation.  
How you are guided  
• If GPS signal reception is poor, navigation  
guidance may not be correct.  
• The System may not receive GPS signals in  
the following places...  
You cannot operate while  
driving. Operate again  
after stopping.  
– in a tunnel or parking lot in the building  
– under an overhead road  
– in a place surrounded by high buildings or  
• The search result is displayed in North Up  
view regardless of your map view setting.  
• The name you entered to search for a POI  
may be different from the name of the search  
result.  
by closely standing trees.  
• The position of your car may not be detected  
correctly in the following cases...  
– when running on a road close to the other  
one (e.g. a motorway and ordinary road  
running in parallel)  
From the list of POI  
• If no POI data exists for the selected city, POI  
not found. appears on the display. Press  
BACK until the city entry menu appears, then  
re-enter another city.  
– when turning at an almost straight fork in  
the road  
– when running on a gridiron road  
– after taking a ferry, etc.  
– when running on a steep mountain road  
– when running on a spiral road  
– when turning left or right after running  
on a long straight road  
– when running in a zigzag line on a broad  
road  
– when starting your car shortly after  
starting the engine  
– when running for the first time after  
installing the unit  
Additional information 47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
– when changing tyres or attaching chains  
on the tyres  
– when tyre slip occurs continuously and  
frequently  
– after running on areas other than a road  
(e.g. private lands or parking lots)  
– after running in underground or tower  
type parking lots  
– after rotating your car on a turntable  
– after frequent stops and starts in a  
congestion  
Arranging your route  
• Motorways are always used to calculate the  
route if the distance to the destination is over  
200 km.  
• If the destination cannot be reached without  
using motorways, ferries, or toll roads, they  
are used to calculate the route without respect  
to the Route Options settings.  
• A detour may not be calculated with Avoid  
Section depending on the route.  
Traffic information on map  
– when the accuracy of GPS is deteriorated  
intentionally  
– when running on a road constructed  
recently  
• When Bypass Traffic is set to Manual  
Reroute, the rerouting may be canceled  
while you are checking due to a change  
of traffic condition. The rerouting is also  
canceled if you do not confirm the rerouting  
in one minute.  
• The route calculated by the System is one of  
the possible routes to your destination. The  
route is not always the most appropriate one.  
• If a street name is not available in the  
database, Unnamed appears in place of the  
street name.  
• If no-exit roads (only entering the roundabout  
from the roads is allowed) exist on the  
roundabout, the no-exit roads can neither be  
shown in the route guidance on the display  
nor counted in the route guidance voice  
message.  
• The following phenomena may occur even if  
the System is working correctly...  
– It may guide to a closed road or to a route  
requiring U-turn.  
– It may not guide to your destination if  
there is only a narrow road or no road to  
your destination.  
– It may not avoid a congestion even  
if Bypass Traffic is set to Auto  
Reroute  
.
– It may show a different road name.  
– It may not ask you to turn at a junction  
even if you need to.  
– It may give a guidance different from the  
actual road condition.  
– It may give an incorrect distance  
information.  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
List of POI icons  
Pub/Bar  
Sports  
Business  
Convention/Conference Centre  
Office/Factory  
City/Town  
Sports Field  
Theatre  
Lodging  
Capital City  
Guest House  
Hotel/Motel  
National Capital  
Community  
Places  
Bank  
Border Crossing  
Industrial Park  
Sports Stadium  
Civic/Community Centre  
College Or University  
Hospital  
Shopping  
Book Shop  
Law Court  
Library  
Shopping Centre  
Vineyard  
Museum  
Police Station  
Post Office  
School  
Tourist  
Tourist Attraction  
Tourist Information  
Town Hall  
Travel  
Emergency  
Airport/Terminal  
Bus/Coach Station  
Car Park  
Medical Centre  
Pharmacy/Chemist  
Food  
Car Park  
Coffee Shop  
Restaurant  
Supermarket  
Ferry Terminal  
Metro/Tram Station  
Motorway Services  
Park & Ride  
Government  
County Council  
Embassy  
Leisure  
Railway Station  
Vehicle Services  
Auto Dealership-Used Cars  
Amusement Park  
Casino  
Car Dealer  
Car Hire  
Cinema  
Car Repair/Maintenance  
Motorcycle Dealer  
Petrol Station  
Historical Monument  
Marina  
Night Club  
Additional information 49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
List of TMC icons  
Traffic Jam  
Road works  
Road is blocked or closed  
Traffic lane closed  
Accident  
Condition  
Other Caution Event  
Information  
AV source operations in the map screen  
Source  
Auto search.  
Auto search.  
(No function)  
Tuner  
DAB  
Change services.  
Change titles/groups/folders.  
Change albums.  
Change folders.  
(No function)  
Disc  
Music server  
CD changer  
iPod/D. player  
Bluetooth Audio  
Change tracks.  
(No function)  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Radio  
52 Listening to the radio  
FM station automatic presetting  
—SSM (Strong-station Sequential Memory)  
Manual presetting  
Selecting preset stations  
When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to receive  
52  
52  
53  
53  
Tuning in to stations with sufficient signal strength 53  
54 RDS operations  
Searching for FM RDS programme—PTY Search  
Storing your favourite programme types  
PTY Standby Reception  
54  
54  
55  
55  
TA Standby Reception  
Tracing the same programme  
—Network-Tracking Reception  
Viewing RDS Radio Text  
56  
56  
56 DAB operations  
Presetting services  
56  
57  
57  
57  
58  
58  
Selecting preset services  
Viewing DLS information  
When surrounding sounds are noisy  
TA/PTY Standby Reception  
Announcement Standby Reception  
Tracing the same programme  
—Alternative Frequency Reception (DAB AF)  
58  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Listening to the radio  
* Only for RDS stations.  
Band  
Equalizer type ☞ [98]  
P
T
Y
FM1 Preset4 Classics  
Station name  
*
92.5 MHz  
PTY code*  
Select “TUNER.”  
Select the bands.  
Search for a station—Auto Search.  
• Manual Search: Press and hold either 4 or ¢ until Manual Search appears on  
the monitor, then press it repeatedly.  
•
lights up when receiving an FM stereo broadcast with sufficient signal strength.  
FM station automatic presetting  
—SSM (Strong-station Sequential  
Memory)  
Manual presetting  
You can preset six stations for each band.  
1
This function works only for FM bands.  
You can preset six stations for each band.  
2 Tune in to the station you want  
1
to preset.  
2
3 Display the Preset List.  
3
4
AV Menu  
Mode  
SSM  
FM1 Preset  
1 87.5 MHz  
2 88.3 MHz  
3 88.7 MHz  
4 91.5 MHz  
5 93.1 MHz  
6 95.3 MHz  
Store  
]
or  
]
[Hold]  
• For FM only: Each time you press and  
hold the button, you can change the  
bands.  
SSM appears on the display.  
Local FM stations with the strongest signals  
are searched and stored automatically in the  
FM band.  
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When an FM stereo broadcast is hard  
to receive  
4 Select a preset number.  
P
T
Y
1
2
AV Menu  
Mode  
Mono  
On  
[Hold]  
]
]
You can also access the Preset List through  
]
AV Menu  
]
List.  
3
Selecting preset stations  
lights up. Reception improves, but stereo  
effect will be lost.  
To restore stereo effect, select Off in step 2.  
On the remote:  
1
2 Select a preset number.  
P
Tuning in to stations with sufficient  
signal strength  
T
Y
This function works only for FM bands.  
Once you have activated this function (selected  
From the Preset List  
Local), it always works when searching for FM  
stations.  
1 Display the Preset List.  
FM1 Preset  
1 87.5 MHz  
Store  
1
2
2 88.3 MHz  
or  
AV Menu  
Mode  
DX/Local  
Local  
3 88.7 MHz  
4 91.5 MHz  
5 93.1 MHz  
]
6 95.3 MHz  
]
[Hold]  
]
• For FM only: Each time you press and  
hold the button, you can change the  
bands.  
3
lights up. Only stations with sufficient  
2 Select a preset number.  
signal strength will be detected.  
To tune in to all receivable stations again,  
select DX in step 2.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals SearchLAinstdeDnoinwgnlotoadt.he radio 53  
RDS operations  
The following features are available only for  
FM RDS stations.  
Storing your favourite programme  
types  
Searching for FM RDS programme—  
PTY Search  
You can store your favourite PTY codes into the  
PTY Preset List.  
PTY Mode  
1
PTY Search  
PTY Memory  
You can search for your favourite programmes  
being broadcast by selecting the PTY code for  
your favourite programmes.  
[Hold]  
PTY Mode  
1
PTY Search  
PTY Memory  
2
PTY Mode  
PTY Memory  
[Hold]  
]
3 Select a PTY code to be replaced  
with the new one.  
2
PTY Mode  
PTY Search  
PTY Memory  
1 Pop M  
2 Rock M  
3 Easy M  
4 Classics  
5 Affairs  
6 Varied  
]
]
PTY Preset List or  
PTY List  
• To select from the six preset PTY codes,  
select PTY Preset List  
.
• To select from all the PTY codes, select  
4 Select a PTY code to be stored  
PTY List  
.
into the List.  
PTY Search  
1 Pop M  
2 Rock M  
3 Easy M  
4 Classics  
5 Affairs  
6 Varied  
PTY Memory  
1/6  
P
T
Y
News  
Affairs  
Info  
Sports  
P
T
Y
P
T
Y
P
T
Y
P
T
Y
Educate  
Set  
3 Select a PTY code.  
Now Pop M is replaced with News  
.
• If there is a station broadcasting a  
programme of the same PTY code as you  
have selected, that station is tuned in.  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PTY Standby Reception  
TA Standby Reception  
PTY Standby Reception allows the unit to  
switch temporarily to your favourite PTY  
programme from any source other than AM.  
• If the DAB tuner is connected, Standby  
Reception also works to search for a DAB  
service.  
TA Standby Reception allows the unit to switch  
temporarily to Traffic Announcement (TA)  
from any source other than AM.  
• The volume changes to the preset TA volume  
level (☞ [93] TA Volume).  
• If the DAB tuner is connected, Standby  
Reception also works to search for a DAB  
service.  
To activate PTY Standby Reception  
1
To activate TA Standby Reception  
2
AV Menu  
Mode  
PTY Standby  
News  
either lights up or flashes.  
]
]
]
• If  
activated.  
• If  
lights up, TA Standby Reception is  
flashes, TA Standby Reception is not  
3
yet activated. (This occurs when you are  
listening to an FM station without the RDS  
signals required for TA Standby Reception.)  
To activate TA Standby Reception, tune in to  
another station (or DAB service) providing  
4 Select a PTY code you want.  
PTY Standby  
News  
1/6  
Affairs  
Info  
Sport  
these signals.  
remain lit.  
will stop flashing and  
Educate  
Set  
To deactivate the TA Standby Reception  
To deactivate the PTY Standby Reception  
Select Off in step 2.  
goes off.  
Available PTY codes:  
News, Affairs, Info, Sport, Educate, Drama,  
Culture, Science, Varied, Pop M, Rock M, Easy  
M, Light M, Classics, Other M, Weather, Finance,  
Children, Social, Religion, Phone In, Travel,  
Leisure, Jazz, Country, Nation M, Oldies, Folk M,  
Document  
RDS operations 55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DAB operations  
Tracing the same programme  
—Network-Tracking Reception  
When driving in an area where FM reception  
is not sufficient enough, this unit automatically  
tunes in to another FM RDS station of the  
same network, possibly broadcasting the same  
programme with stronger signals.  
Select “DAB.”  
Search for an ensemble.  
• Manual Search: Hold either 4  
or ¢ until Manual Search  
appears on the monitor, then press it  
repeatedly.  
Programme A broadcast in different frequency  
areas (01 – 05)  
Select a service (either  
primary or secondary) to  
listen to.  
Presetting services  
You can preset six DAB services (primary) for  
each band.  
When shipped from the factory, Network-  
Tracking Reception is activated.  
To change the Network-Tracking Reception  
1
setting, ☞ [93] AF Regional  
.
• When the DAB tuner is connected, ☞ [58]  
“Tracing the same programme—Alternative  
Frequency Reception (DAB AF)”.  
2 Select the service you want to  
preset.  
Viewing RDS Radio Text  
When the received RDS station sends RDS  
Radio Text,  
lights up.  
3 Call up the Preset List screen.  
To display the Radio Text  
DAB1 Preset  
1 HR1  
Store  
or  
2 No Serv.  
3 FFH  
4 HRH  
5 HRS  
6 No Serv.  
Each time you press DISP, the display changes  
as follows:  
Station name and frequency  
[Hold]  
• Each time you press and hold the button,  
you can change the DAB bands.  
=
Radio Text  
• It may take some time to display the Radio  
Text. While loading the text, Loading and a  
progress indicator are displayed.  
• You can also access the Preset List through  
AV Menu  
]
List.  
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
* To enjoy DAB, connect a DAB tuner (separately purchased) to the unit.  
Band  
Service Label  
P
R
G
DAB1 Preset4 Service1  
C
H
Ensemble label  
227.360 MHz 12C  
Channel number  
4 Select a preset number.  
Viewing DLS information  
When the received DAB service sends DLS  
(Dynamic Label Segment) information,  
lights up.  
[Hold]  
To display the DLS  
Selecting preset services  
Each time you press DISP, the display changes  
as follows:  
On the unit:  
After steps 1 and 3 of “Presetting services”...  
Service Label, Ensemble Label, frequency, and  
Channel number  
DAB1 Preset  
1 HR1  
Store  
=
Service Label, Ensemble Label, and PTY code  
Service Label and DLS information  
=
2 No Serv.  
3 FFH  
4 HRH  
5 HRS  
6 No Serv.  
When surrounding sounds are noisy  
Some services provide Dynamic Range Control  
(DRC) signals together with their regular  
programme signals. DRC will reinforce the low  
level sounds to improve your listening.  
On the remote:  
1
•
will light up while receiving a service  
with the DRC signals.  
2
Continued on the next page.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And DDowAnBlooadp.erations 57  
• If  
lights up, Announcement Standby  
flashes, Announcement Standby  
1
2
Reception is activated.  
• If  
AV Menu  
Mode  
D.Range Control  
Reception is not yet activated. To activate,  
tune in to another service providing the  
signal required for Announcement Standby  
]
]
Reception.  
remain lit.  
will stop flashing and  
]
DRC1 or DRC2 or DRC3  
• As the number increases, the effect  
becomes stronger.  
To deactivate the Announcement Standby  
Reception  
Select Off in step 2.  
3
TA/PTY Standby Reception  
Available announcement types  
Travel, Warning, News, Weather, Event,  
Special, Rad Inf, Sports, Finance  
• Operations are exactly the same as explained  
on page 55 for FM RDS stations.  
• You cannot store PTY codes separately for the  
DAB tuner and for the FM tuner.  
Tracing the same programme—  
Alternative Frequency Reception  
(DAB AF)  
Announcement Standby Reception  
Announcement Standby Reception allows the  
receiver to switch temporarily to your favourite  
service (announcement type).  
• While receiving a DAB service:  
When driving in an area where a service  
cannot be received, this unit automatically  
tunes in to another ensemble or FM RDS  
station, broadcasting the same programme.  
• While receiving an FM RDS station:  
When driving in an area where a DAB service  
is broadcasting the same programme as the  
FM RDS station is broadcasting, this unit  
automatically tunes in to the DAB service.  
Activating Announcement Standby Reception  
1
2
AV Menu  
Mode  
Announce Standby  
Travel  
]
]
]
3 Select an announcement type  
When shipped from the factory, Alternative  
Frequency Reception is activated.  
you want.  
To change the Alternative Frequency Reception  
Announce Standby  
Travel  
1/2  
setting, ☞ [93] DAB AF  
.
Warning  
News  
Weather  
Event  
Set  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Discs and HDD  
60 Disc operations  
Playable discs/files  
61  
64  
65  
65  
65  
68  
68  
Selecting playback modes  
Selecting tracks on the list  
Prohibiting disc ejection  
Remote operations  
Special functions for DVD Audio  
Operations using the on-screen bar  
70 Music server operations  
Selecting tracks using lists  
Selecting playback modes  
71  
71  
72  
75  
76  
Recording/copying tracks from a disc  
Editing the library  
Checking the remaining storage size  
77 CD changer operations  
Selecting playback modes  
78  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Disc operations  
The disc type is automatically detected, and  
playback starts automatically (for some  
discs: automatic start depends on its internal  
program).  
To insert a disc  
If a disc does not have any disc menu, all tracks  
in it will be played repeatedly until you change  
the source or eject the disc.  
To eject the disc  
Disc type  
Equalizer type ☞ [98]  
01 0:00:03  
Album Name  
Artist Name  
Track Name  
Stop playback. Start playback.  
Playback mode ☞ [64]  
Select “DISC.”  
Each time you press DISP, the display  
changes.  
When a disc contains different types of file  
(music, movie or still pictures), you need to  
select the file type to play back. (☞ [92] File  
For picture discs: playback picture  
information vehicle information (☞ [11]  
Video input* (☞ [82] (back to the  
beginning)  
For audio discs: disc information vehicle  
information Video input* (back to the  
beginning)  
=
disc  
Type  
)
=
)
=
)
=
If “ ” appears on the monitor, the unit  
cannot accept the operation you have tried to  
do.  
• In some cases, without showing “ ,”  
operations will not be accepted.  
=
=
=
*
Appears only when you have selected Videoor  
Camerafor Video Inputsetting (☞ [94]).  
• For discs except DVD and VCD: The control screen  
appears on the connected external monitor. (☞  
[102]  
)
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playable discs/files  
Disc type  
Recording format, file type, etc.  
Playable  
DVD Video  
DVD Audio  
DVD  
DVD-ROM  
DVD Video  
DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2  
JPEG  
MP3/WMA/WAV  
ASF  
DVD-VR, DVD+VR  
DVD side  
DVD Recordable/Rewritable  
(DVD-R*1/-RW, +R/+RW*2)  
• Compliant to UDF bridge  
format  
• DVD-RAM cannot be  
played.  
Dual Disc  
Non-DVD side  
Audio CD/CD Text (CD-DA), DTS-CD  
VCD (Video CD)  
CD-ROM  
CD/VCD  
CD-I (CD-I Ready)  
CD-DA  
MP3/WMA/WAV  
DivX/MPEG1/MPEG2  
JPEG  
CD Recordable/Rewritable  
(CD-R/-RW)  
• Compliant to ISO 9660  
level 1, level 2, Romeo,  
Joliet  
MPEG4  
*1 DVD-R recorded in multi-border format is also playable (except for dual layer discs).  
*2 It is possible to play back finalized +R/+RW (Video mode only) discs. However, the use of +R double layer disc is not  
recommended.  
• This unit is not compatible with Multiple  
Bit Rate (MBR: a file that contains the same  
DVD players and DVD Video discs have their  
content encoded at several different bit rates).  
own Region Code numbers. This unit can  
Note on Region Code:  
only play back DVD discs whose Region Code  
numbers include “2.”  
If you insert a DVD Video disc of an incorrect  
Region Code, Region Code Error appears  
on the monitor.  
Disc operations 61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CD  
*
Only for CD-Text. “No Name” appears  
for conventional CDs.  
DTS icon (only for DTS-CDs)  
Track no./Playing time  
01 0:00:03  
4
,
¢
Press: Select track  
Hold: Reverse/  
Disc Title*  
Artist Name*  
Track Name*  
forward search*1  
MP3, WMA, WAV  
*
Tag data will be shown instead of folder/  
file names when they are recorded and  
Tag Displayis set to On. ☞ [91]  
Audio format  
Folder no./File no./Playing time  
4
,
¢
Press: Select file  
Hold: Reverse/  
forward search*1  
01  
01 0:00:03  
Folder Name*  
File Name.mp3*  
∞
,
5
Press: Select folder  
Hold: Display Folder  
List  
DivX, MPEG  
Folder no./File no./Playing time  
File type  
4
,
¢
Press: Select file  
Hold: Reverse/  
forward search*2  
01  
01 0:00:03  
Folder Name  
File Name.avi  
∞
,
5
Press: Select folder  
Hold: Display Folder  
List  
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVD Video  
Title no./Chapter no./Playing time Audio format  
4
,
¢
Press: Select  
chapter  
Hold: Reverse/  
T
C
01  
01 0:00:03  
forward search*1  
∞
Press: Select title  
,
5
DVD Audio  
Group no./Track no./Playing time Audio format  
BONUS indicator ☞ [68]  
B.S.P indicator ☞ [68]  
4
,
¢
Press: Select track  
Hold: Reverse/  
G
01  
01 0:00:03  
forward search*1  
∞
Press: Select group  
,
5
VCD  
Track no./Playing time PBC indicator: lights up when PBC is in use. ☞ [67]  
01 0:00:03  
4
,
¢
Press: Select track  
Hold: Reverse/  
forward search*1  
*1 Search speed: x2  
]
x10  
*2 Search speed:  
¡
1
] ¡  
2
Disc operations 63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JPEG  
Folder no.  
File no.  
4
Press: Select file  
,
¢
01  
01  
Folder Name  
File Name.jpg  
∞
,
5
Press: Select folder  
Hold: Display Folder  
List  
Selecting playback modes  
You can use only one of the following playback  
Disc type  
Repeat  
modes—Intro/Repeat/Random.  
Ex. To select Track Repeat  
Chapter  
:
Repeats current chapter  
1
2
Title  
:
Repeats current title  
AV Menu  
Mode  
Repeat  
Track  
Track  
:
]
Repeats current track  
]
Track  
:
]
Repeats current track  
3
Folder  
:
Repeats current folder  
When one of the playback modes is selected, the  
corresponding indicator lights up on the disc  
information screen.  
Folder  
:
Repeats current folder  
To cancel, select Off in step 2.  
Disc type  
Intro  
Repeat  
Random  
Track  
Plays the first 15 seconds  
of each track (for VCD:  
PBC not in use)  
:
Track  
:
Disc:  
Repeats current track  
(for VCD: PBC not in  
use)  
Randomly plays all tracks  
(for VCD: PBC not in  
use)  
Track  
Plays the first 15 seconds  
of each track  
:
Track  
Repeats current track  
Folder  
Repeats all tracks of the  
current folder  
:
Folder  
:
Randomly plays all tracks  
of current folder, then  
tracks of next folders  
:
Folder  
:
Plays the first 15 seconds  
of the first track of each  
folder  
Disc  
:
Randomly plays all tracks  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Selecting tracks on the list  
Prohibiting disc ejection  
If a disc includes folders, you can display the  
Folder/Track Lists, then start playback.  
1
1 Display the Folder List.  
[Hold]  
Eject  
Folder List  
My Best  
1/4  
Emergency Eject  
No Eject  
Cinema  
or  
My Best2  
Pops  
Favourites  
020315  
Set  
[Hold]  
2 Select No Eject  
.
2 Select a folder, then a track.  
• If you press ENT while a folder is selected, all  
tracks in the selected folder are played back.  
To cancel the prohibition, select Eject OK in  
step 2.  
You can also access the Folder List through  
AV Menu  
]
List.  
Remote operations  
Common operations  
• Change the source.  
• Turn off the AV function if  
pressed and held.  
AV/OFF  
Switch to the map screen.  
MAP/POS  
Start playing/pause.  
(For JPEG: Slide show)  
ENT 6  
Stop playing.  
BACK/BAND  
MENU  
Call up AV Menu.  
Adjust the volume.  
VOL +/–  
ATT  
DISP  
Attenuate/restore the sound.  
Change the display. ☞ [11]  
Display the on-screen bar.  
[68]  
☞
OSD  
Change the aspect ratio of the  
playback pictures.  
ASPECT  
Disc operations 65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Press: Select a chapter.  
Press and hold: Reverse/forward search*1.  
Press: Select a track.  
Press and hold: Reverse/forward search*1.  
4/¢  
Select a title.  
Select a group.  
∞/5  
Chapter  
=
Title  
=
Off  
Track  
=
Group  
=
Off  
DIRECT  
(☞ below  
)
Reverse/forward search*2  
Slow motion*3 during pause. (No sound can Reverse/forward search*2  
be heard.)  
1/¡  
Select audio language.  
Select subtitle language.  
Select a view angle.  
—
—
Press: Select a track.  
Press and hold: Reverse/forward search*1  
4/¢  
—
Select a folder.  
∞/5  
Track  
=
Off  
File  
=
Folder  
=
Off  
DIRECT  
(☞ below  
)
Reverse/forward search*2  
1/¡  
Selecting an item with number keys  
You can select a chapter/title/group/folder/  
track by inputting its number.  
2 Input the title number.  
Ex.: To select a title of a DVD Video.  
1 [twice]  
On the playback screen:  
• To correct a misentry, press DIRECT to  
clear the entry and input again.  
appears on the screen.  
– –  
TITLE  
On the disc information screen:  
The title number lights up in grey.  
3
• Each time you press  
selectable item changes. See the table  
above.  
, the  
66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Press: Select a track.  
Press and hold: Reverse/forward Press and hold: Reverse/forward Press: Select a track.  
search*4. (No sound can be heard.) search*1. (No sound can be heard.)  
Press: Select a track.  
Select a folder.  
Track Folder  
—
Select a folder.  
=
=
Off  
Track  
=
Off  
File  
=
Folder  
=
Off  
Reverse/forward search*2  
Reverse/forward search*5 (No  
sound can be heard.)  
Forward slow motion*3 during  
pause. (No sound can be heard.)  
—
Select audio language. (Only for  
DivX.)  
Select audio channel.  
—
Select subtitle language. (Only  
for DivX.)  
—
—
—
—
—
*1 Search speed: x2  
*2 Search speed: x2  
*3 Slow motion speed: 1/32  
]
]
x10  
x5  
*4 Search speed:  
*5 Search speed:  
¡
¡
1
1
] ¡  
2
]
x10  
]
]
1/16  
x20  
]
]
1/8  
x60  
1/4  
] ¡  
2
] ¡3  
]
]
1/2  
PBC playback  
Select an item on the menu.  
Menu driven operations  
(For DVD and DivX 6)  
1
or  
(only for DVD  
Video and DivX)  
2 Select an item you want  
to play.  
• To return to the previous menus, press  
.
To cancel PBC playback  
3
1
Quick skip  
2 Select a track.  
Return/advance the scenes by 5  
minutes.  
While playing...  
current playback position  
• To resume PBC, press  
/
.
Disc operations 67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Special functions for DVD Audio  
Operations using the on-screen bar  
For DVD/VCD/DivX/MPEG/JPEG discs, you  
can check the disc information and use some  
functions through the on-screen bar.  
Playing back a bonus group  
If a DVD Audio including a “bonus group”  
is detected,  
lights up on the disc  
1 Display the on-screen bar.  
information screen.  
[twice]  
1 Select the bonus group.  
• When you press OSD once, the  
information bar appears. When you press  
it again, the operation bar spreads out  
below.  
• The bonus group is usually recorded as  
the last group.  
2 Enter the key number.  
2 Select an item.  
• ☞ next column “To enter numbers”  
• “Key number” (a kind of password) for  
the bonus group is not open to public.  
The way of getting the key number  
depends on the disc.  
3 Make a selection.  
3 Follow the interactive  
instructions shown on the  
monitor.  
If pop-up menu appears...  
Selecting browsable still pictures  
When a disc including browsable still pictures  
• For entering time/numbers, see below.  
is detected,  
lights up on the disc  
To remove the on-screen bar  
information screen.  
When disc shows the BSP selecting icons such  
To enter numbers  
as @ or # on the screen...  
1 Select a number.  
1 Select an item you want to  
display.  
2 Move to the next digit.  
2
3 Repeat steps 1 and 2.  
4
• To correct a misentry, use ¤.  
• It is not necessarily required to enter trailing  
zeros.  
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Information  
Operation  
T02-C03 TOTAL 1:25:58  
C. RPT  
CHAP  
DVD-V  
TIME  
TITLE  
RPT  
1
Disc type  
Pause  
Stop  
2
Audio signal format (for DVD)  
PBC (for VCD)  
Playback mode  
7
Operation icons  
3
TIME  
Change time indication (☞ 5)  
*
T. RPT Title Repeat/Track Repeat  
C. RPT Chapter Repeat  
F. RPT Folder Repeat  
D. RND Disc Random  
T. INT  
Playback information  
Time Search (Enter the elapsed  
playing time of the current title  
or of the disc.)  
Title Search (by its number)  
Group Search (by its number)  
Chapter Search (by its number)  
Track Search (by its number)  
*
*
*
TITLE  
GROUP  
CHAP  
TRACK  
*
Track Intro  
4
Current title/chapter  
T02-C03  
Current group/track  
Current track  
G02-T03  
*
RPT  
INT  
Repeat play  
Intro play  
Random play  
Change the audio language or  
audio channel  
TRACK 01  
F001-T001  
F001-F001  
*
Current folder/track  
Current folder/file  
*
RND  
5
Time indication  
Change the subtitle language or  
hide the subtitle.  
Change the view angle  
Elapsed playing time of the disc  
TOTAL  
T. REM  
Remaining title/group time (for  
DVD)  
Remaining disc time (for others)  
Elapsed playing time of the  
current chapter/track  
Remaining time of the current  
chapter/track  
PAGE 1/15 Change the B.S.P (for DVD  
Audio) (The numbers in the  
indicator show the current page/  
total page number.)  
TIME  
REM  
*
☞ [64]  
6
Playback status  
Play  
Reverse/forward search  
Reverse/forward slow-motion  
Disc operations 69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Music server operations  
The built-in HDD works not only as storage for navigation data, but as a music server, where you  
can record CD tracks and music files (MP3, WMA and WAV files).  
The recorded tracks are categorized into genres and albums.  
You can make 99 genres in the music server, and 99 albums in each genre. Each album can contain  
999 tracks.  
Track 1  
Album 1  
Genre 1  
Track 2  
Track 3  
Track 1  
Track 2  
Album 2  
Genre 2  
File type/Compression mode  
Equalizer type ☞ [98]  
Genre no./Album no./Track no./Play time  
01 01 01 0:00:03  
Genre Name  
Album Name  
Track Name  
Playback mode ☞ [71]  
Select “HDD.”  
The last selected track starts playing from the beginning.  
Select the track.  
Change the track.  
Change the album.  
70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Selecting tracks using lists  
Selecting playback modes  
You can use only one of the following playback  
1 Call up the Genre List.  
modes—Intro/Repeat/Random.  
Ex. To select Track Repeat  
Genre List  
60’s  
1
or  
Jazz  
Drive  
2
AV Menu  
Mode  
Repeat  
Track  
Favourites  
Classical  
80’s  
]
[Hold]  
]
2 Select a genre, then an album.  
]
3
When one of the playback modes is selected,  
the corresponding indicator lights up on the  
monitor.  
• Repeat the same procedure to select the  
album.  
To cancel, select Off in step 2.  
Track  
:
Intro  
3 Select a track to play back.  
Plays the first 15 seconds  
of all tracks in the current  
album  
Album  
:
Plays the first 15 seconds  
of the first tracks of each  
album in the current genre  
• If you press ENT while a genre or an  
album is selected, all tracks in the selected  
genre or album are played back.  
Genre  
Plays the first 15 seconds of  
the first tracks of each genre  
:
Track  
Repeats current track  
Album  
Repeats all tracks of the  
current album  
Genre  
:
Repeat  
Random  
You can also access the Genre List through  
AV Menu  
]
List.  
:
:
Repeats all tracks of the  
current genre  
Album  
Randomly plays all tracks of  
the current album  
:
Genre  
:
Randomly plays all tracks of  
the current genre  
All  
:
Randomly plays all tracks in  
the music server  
Music server operations 71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notes on the name of new genres and  
albums  
Recording/copying tracks from a disc  
• You can record tracks of audio CDs into the  
• If you want to make a new genre or a new  
album for the tracks to be recorded/copied,  
select [New Genre] or [New Album]. To  
name the new genre/album, press and hold  
DISP. You can also name it later through  
Title Entry (☞ [75] “Changing the titles”).  
• If you do not specify a genre name or  
album name on recording/copying, they are  
assigned as follows.  
HDD. Record appears in AV Menu  
.
• You can copy music files (MP3, WMA, WAV)  
into the HDD. Copy appears in AV Menu  
.
Preparation:  
Insert the disc to record/copy, and select DISC  
as the source.  
– For audio CDs, the genre name and  
album name are assigned automatically  
using the recording date and time.  
– For music files, the genre name is  
assigned automatically using the  
recording date and time. The original  
folder name and file name are used as  
the album name and the track name.  
• While recording an audio CD, you cannot  
listen to the tracks being recorded with the  
map screen displayed.  
• While copying music files, you cannot listen  
to them.  
• You cannot change the source while  
recording or copying tracks. If you want to  
interrupt the recording and enjoy another  
source, cancel the recording/copying (☞  
below).  
To record the current track  
When the recording/copying is finished  
Completed is displayed, and playback  
resumes.  
1
2
AV Menu  
Record  
Current Track  
]
To cancel recording/copying  
While recording or copying...  
]
3 Start recording.  
You can also cancel recording/copying  
Recording... appears.  
• The track is recorded in the High  
Quality mode. (☞ next page)  
through AV Menu  
]
Record  
/
Copy  
]
Cancel  
.
• When you record a track for the first  
time with this function, a new genre and  
a new album is automatically created for  
the track. Other tracks recorded with  
this function are recorded into the same  
album until you turn off the ignition  
switch or edit the library.  
72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To record all the tracks in a disc  
To record selected tracks  
1
1
2
AV Menu  
Record  
Select All  
2
AV Menu  
Record  
Select Track  
]
]
]
]
3 Select the genre and album to  
3 Select the tracks to record.  
record the tracks into.  
Select Track  
Select All  
Track 1  
1/3  
Select Genre  
[New Genre]  
Jazz  
1/2  
Track 2  
Track 3  
Drive  
Track 4  
Check  
Favourites  
Classical  
[34/99]  
• Checkbox operations ☞ [105]  
Number of albums in the selected genre  
• Repeat the same procedure to select the  
album.  
4
5 Select the genre and album to  
record the tracks into.  
4 Select a compression mode.  
Compress  
Select Genre  
[New Genre]  
Jazz  
1/2  
High Quality  
Normal Quality  
Drive  
Favourites  
Classical  
[34/99]  
Record  
High Quality: High quality lossless  
recording (LLC).  
Normal Quality: More compressed  
recording, so data size becomes smaller  
(BSC).  
Number of albums in the selected genre  
• Repeat the same procedure to select the  
album.  
6 Select a compression mode.  
Compress  
5 Start recording.  
High Quality  
Normal Quality  
Record  
Recording... appears.  
High Quality: High quality lossless  
recording (LLC).  
Normal Quality: More compressed  
recording, so data size becomes smaller  
(BSC).  
7 Start recording.  
Recording... appears.  
Music server operations 73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To copy the current track  
To copy selected tracks  
1
1
2
AV Menu  
Copy  
Current Track  
2
AV Menu  
Copy  
Select Track  
]
]
]
]
3 Start copying.  
3 Select the tracks to copy.  
Select Track  
Select All  
Track 1  
1/3  
Track 2  
Track 3  
Track 4  
Copying... appears.  
• When you copy a track for the first time  
with this function, a new genre and a  
new album is automatically created for  
the track. Other tracks copied with this  
function are copied into the same album  
until you turn off the ignition switch or  
edit the library.  
Check  
• Checkbox operations ☞ [105]  
4
5 Select the genre to copy the  
tracks into.  
To copy all the tracks in a folder  
1 Select the target folder.  
2
Select Genre  
[New Genre]  
Jazz  
1/2  
Drive  
Favourites  
Classical  
[34/99]  
3
AV Menu  
Copy  
Select All  
Number of albums in the selected genre  
]
]
6 Select the album to copy the  
4 Select the genre to copy the  
tracks into.  
tracks into.  
Select Genre  
[New Genre]  
Jazz  
1/2  
Drive  
Favourites  
Classical  
[34/99]  
Copying... appears, and copying starts.  
Number of albums in the selected genre  
5 Select the album to copy the  
tracks into.  
To resume the interrupted recording/copying  
If have turned off the power, switched off the  
car ignition switch, or detached the control  
panel while recording/copying, you can resume  
the last recording/copying.  
• If you eject the disc or edit the library of the  
music sever, Continue mode is canceled.  
• You cannot use Continue if you have  
canceled recording/copying manually.  
Copying... appears, and copying starts.  
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
2
6 Select Store to finish editing.  
• You cannot edit the tag data of tracks.  
AV Menu  
Record or Copy  
Continue  
]
]
Moving tracks between albums/Moving  
albums between genres  
3 Start recording/copying.  
Ex. To move tracks between albums  
• Select the album which the target tracks  
belong to.  
Recording.../Copying... appears.  
1
2
Editing the library  
AV Menu  
Edit  
Move  
Track  
• Library editing is possible only when HDD is  
selected as the source.  
]
]
]
Changing the titles  
You can change the names of genres, albums  
and tracks in the HDD.  
Ex. To change the name of a track  
3 Check the tracks to move.  
Move Track  
Select All  
Track 1  
1/2  
1
Track 2  
Track 3  
Track 4  
2
AV Menu  
Title Entry  
Check  
]
• Checkbox operations ☞ [105]  
3 Select a genre, then an album.  
4
5 Select the album to move the  
tracks into.  
Move to  
1/2  
[New Album]  
Album 1  
Album 2  
Album 3  
Album 4  
Playback of the selected item starts.  
• Repeat the same procedure to select the  
album.  
[15/999]  
Move  
4 Select a track to edit.  
Number of tracks in the selected album  
Over the Rainbow  
6 Move the selected tracks.  
A confirmation message appears. Press ENT  
to confirm the operation. Press BACK to  
cancel.  
Del More Store  
5 Enter the name.  
• Inputting characters ☞ [105]  
• You can use up to 32 characters for the  
name of tracks, albums, or genres.  
Music server operations 75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Rearranging the order of tracks, albums and  
genres  
Ex. To rearrange the order of tracks in an  
album  
Deleting tracks, albums, or genres  
Ex. To delete tracks  
• Select the album which the target tracks  
belong to.  
• Select the album which the target tracks  
belong to.  
1
2
AV Menu  
Edit  
Delete  
Track  
1
2
]
AV Menu  
Edit  
Sort  
Track  
]
]
]
]
3 Check the tracks to delete.  
]
Delete Track  
Select All  
Track 1  
1/2  
3 Select the track to move.  
Sort Track  
Track 1  
Track 2  
Track 3  
Track 4  
Track 5  
1/2  
Track 2  
Track 3  
Track 4  
Delete  
Select  
• Checkbox operations ☞ [105]  
Select  
4 Delete the selected tracks.  
4 Move the selected track.  
Sort Track  
Track 2  
Track 3  
Track 1  
Track 4  
Track 5  
1/2  
[Hold]  
A confirmation message appears. Press ENT  
to confirm the operation. Press BACK to  
cancel.  
Sort  
A confirmation message appears. Press ENT  
to confirm the operation. Press BACK to  
cancel.  
• To rearrange more tracks, repeat steps 1 to 4.  
Checking the remaining storage size  
1
2
AV Menu  
Edit  
HDD Free Area  
]
]
Edit  
Delete  
Move  
Sort  
HDD Free Area  
[
]
80.5% 20.0GB  
Exit  
Free space of the music server  
76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CD changer operations  
It is recommended to use a JVC MP3-compatible CD changer with your unit.  
• You can play only CDs (CD-DA) and MP3 discs.  
Preparation:  
Make sure Changer is selected for the external input setting. (☞ [94])  
Disc no./Track no./Playing time  
Equalizer type ☞ [98]  
01  
01 0:00:03  
Disc Title*  
Artist Name*  
Current Track*  
*
“No Name” appears for  
conventional CDs.  
Playback mode ☞ [78]  
Select “CD-CH.”  
To select tracks  
Playback starts automatically.  
Press: Select track  
Hold: Reverse/forward  
search  
Display the Disc List.  
Disc List  
MP3 Disc  
1/2  
Press: Select folder (MP3  
only)  
Hold: Display the Disc List  
Disc 02  
Disc 03  
or  
Disc 04  
Disc 05  
Disc 06  
[Hold]  
On the remote:  
To select a disc  
• Each time you hold the button,  
you can display the other list of the  
remaining discs.  
or  
Select a disc to start  
playing.  
: Select folder  
(MP3 only)  
: Select track  
CD changer operations 77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Selecting playback modes  
You can use only one of the following playback  
modes—Intro/Repeat/Random.  
Ex. To select Track Repeat  
3
1
2
When one of the playback modes is selected,  
the corresponding indicator lights up on the  
monitor.  
AV Menu  
Mode  
Repeat  
To cancel, select Off in step 2.  
]
]
]
Track  
Disc type  
Intro  
Repeat  
Random  
Track  
Plays the first 15 seconds  
of each track  
:
Track  
Repeats current track  
:
Disc:  
Randomly plays all tracks  
of the current disc  
:
Randomly plays all tracks  
of all loaded discs  
Disc  
:
Disc  
:
Repeats all tracks of the All  
Plays the first 15 seconds  
of the first track of all  
loaded discs  
current disc  
Track  
Plays the first 15 seconds  
of each track  
:
Track  
Repeats current track  
Folder  
Repeats all tracks of the  
current folder  
:
Folder  
:
Randomly plays all tracks  
of current folder, then  
tracks of next folders  
:
Folder  
:
Plays the first 15 seconds  
of the first track of each  
folder  
Disc  
:
Randomly plays all tracks  
Disc  
:
of the current disc  
Repeats all tracks of the  
Disc  
:
current disc  
All  
:
Plays the first 15 seconds  
of the first track of all  
loaded discs  
Randomly plays all tracks  
of all loaded discs  
• You can also access the Disc List through AV Menu  
• While playing an MP3 disc, you can select and start playing a track in the disc using the Lists.  
]
List.  
Disc List  
MP3 Disc  
1/2  
Folder List  
My Best  
Cinema  
Pops  
1/2  
Track List  
Song011.mp3  
1/2  
Disc 02  
Disc 03  
Disc 04  
Disc 05  
Disc 06  
Song012.mp3  
Song013.mp3  
Song014.mp3  
Song015.mp3  
Song016.mp3  
My Best2  
Favourite Song  
Cinema2  
78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other functions  
80 iPod/D. player operations  
Selecting a track from the player’s menu  
Selecting playback modes  
80  
80  
81 Playing other external  
components  
External input  
Video input  
81  
82  
83 Using Bluetooth® devices  
—Mobile phone/audio player  
Menu operation for Bluetooth devices  
Registering a Bluetooth device  
Using the Bluetooth mobile phone  
Using the Bluetooth audio player  
Phone Menu  
83  
83  
85  
87  
88  
90 AV Menu items  
98 Sound equalization  
Selecting an equalizer type  
Storing your own adjustment  
98  
98  
99 Additional Information  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
iPod/D. player operations  
For Apple iPod and JVC D. player, it is required to connect the interface adapter (KS-PD100 for  
iPod or KS-PD500 for D. player) to the CD changer jack on the rear.  
Preparation:  
Make sure Changer is selected for the external input setting. (☞ [94])  
01  
0:00:03  
Album Name  
Artist Name  
Track Name  
Playback mode  
☞ below  
Pause/Resume  
Select “iPod” or “D. PLAYER.”  
Playback starts automatically.  
Equalizer type ☞ [98]  
Select a track.  
Selecting playback modes  
Selecting a track from the player’s  
menu  
1
1 Enter the player’s menu.  
2
AV Menu  
Mode  
Repeat or Random  
]
]
appears.  
• This mode will be canceled if no  
Repeat One  
:
operations are done for about 5 seconds.  
Functions the same as “Repeat  
One” or “Repeat Mode = One.”  
2 Select the desired menu item.  
3 Confirm the selection.  
All  
:
Functions the same as “Repeat  
All” or “Repeat Mode = All.”  
Random Song  
/On:  
Functions the same as “Shuffle  
Songs” or “Random Play =  
On.”  
Album  
Functions the same as “Shuffle  
Albums” of the iPod.  
4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to select a  
track.  
:
• When a track is selected finally, playback  
starts.  
• To return to the previous menu...  
To cancel, select Off in step 2.  
• iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.,  
registered in the U.S. and other countries.  
80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playing other external components  
External input  
You can connect an external component to the CD changer jack on the rear using the Line Input  
Adapter—KS-U57 (not supplied) or AUX Input Adapter—KS-U58 (not supplied).  
Preparation:  
Make sure Ext Input is selected for the external input setting. (☞ [94])  
AV Input  
Equalizer type ☞ [98]  
Select “EXT-IN.”  
Turn on the connected component and start playing the  
source.  
Assigning title to the external input  
4 Assign a title.  
• Inputting characters ☞ [105]  
1 Select EXT-IN as the source.  
2
• You can use up to 16 characters.  
5 Select Store  
.
3
AV Menu  
Title Entry  
• While driving at a speed greater than 10 km/h,  
operations of inputting are prohibited.  
]
Del More Store  
DownloadiPfroomd/WDw. pwl.aSyoemraonpuaelrsa.ctoiomn. sA/ll PMlaanyuianlgs SoetahrecrheAxntderDnoawlnclooamd.ponents 81  
Video input  
You can connect an external component to the VIDEO IN plug.  
Preparation:  
When connecting a video component  
Make sure Ext Input is selected for the external input setting, and Video for the video input  
setting. (☞ [94])  
• You cannot view the video picture when the parking brake is not engaged.  
When connecting a camera  
Make sure Camera is selected for the video input setting. (☞ [94])  
Each time you press DISP, the display switches as follows:  
AV screen  
screen)  
=
Vehicle information (☞ [11]  
)
=
Video picture or camera picture  
=
(Back to the AV  
For video components:  
Turn on the connected component and start playing.  
To switch to the camera view automatically  
You can set the unit to automatically display  
the camera view when the car is put into reverse  
gear or when the car slows down.  
☞ [94] Interlock  
To reverse the camera picture  
☞ [94] Horizontal and Vertical  
82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Bluetooth® devices—Mobile phone/audio player  
For Bluetooth operations, it is required to connect the Bluetooth Adapter (KS-BTA200) to the CD  
changer jack on the rear.  
• Refer also to the instructions supplied with the Bluetooth Adapter and the Bluetooth device.  
• Refer to the list (included in the box) to see the countries where you may use the Bluetooth®  
function.  
Menu operation for Bluetooth devices  
Registering a Bluetooth device  
AV Menu  
Mode  
2/2  
Mode  
Dial  
1/2  
1/2  
AV screen:  
Message  
Open  
Search  
=
Bluetooth Audio  
Special Device  
Phone Menu  
Mode  
Mode  
Map screen/AV  
screen: other sources  
than Bluetooth Audio  
Dial  
Message  
Open  
Search  
Special Device  
List  
[Hold]  
Using the Bluetooth mobile phone  
Phone Menu  
Mode  
Bluetooth Phone  
Map screen/  
AV screen  
P902i  
List  
[Hold]  
10:35  
Registering a Bluetooth device  
Preparation:  
Operate the device to turn on its Bluetooth  
function.  
Registration (Pairing) methods  
• Use Phone Menu to register a device as a  
mobile phone.  
• Use AV Menu to register a device as an  
audio player.  
To use a Bluetooth device through the unit  
(“Bluetooth Phone” and “Bluetooth Audio”) for  
the first time, you need to establish Bluetooth  
wireless connection between the unit and the  
device.  
• Once the connection is established, it is  
registered in the unit even if you reset your  
unit. Up to five devices can be registered in  
total.  
Make the unit ready to establish  
a new Bluetooth connection.  
Connection is established by  
operating the Bluetooth device.  
Open  
Make the unit ready to establish  
a new Bluetooth connection.  
Connection is established by  
operating this unit.  
Search  
• Only one device for Bluetooth Phone and one  
for Bluetooth Audio can be connected at a  
time.  
Using Bluetooth devices 83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Searching for available devices  
To register another device after you have  
registered a device, make sure New Device  
is selected. (☞ [85])  
1
Mode  
Search  
]
Searching...  
Registering using Open  
The unit searches for available devices and  
displays the list of them. (If no available  
device is detected, Device Unfound  
appears.)  
1
Mode  
Open  
]
0000  
2 Select a device you want to  
connect.  
Connect  
BS  
2 Enter a PIN (Personal  
*
Identification Number) code to  
the unit.  
3 Enter the specific PIN code of  
• Inputting characters ☞ [105]  
the device to the unit.  
• You can enter any number you like (1-  
• Inputting characters ☞ [105]  
• Refer to the instructions supplied with the  
device to check the PIN code.  
digit to 16-digit number).  
* Some devices have their own PIN code. Enter the  
specified PIN code to the unit.  
Connecting...  
3 Select Connect  
.
Open...  
4 Use the Bluetooth device to  
connect.  
4 Operate the target Bluetooth  
Now connection is established and you can  
use the device through the unit.  
device.  
Enter the same PIN code (as entered in the  
above step) on the device to be connected.  
Now connection is established and you can use  
the device through the unit.  
Connecting a special device  
The device remains registered even after  
you disconnect the device. Use Connect  
(or activate Auto Connect) to connect the  
same device from next time. (☞ [89])  
1
Mode  
]
Special Device  
The unit displays the list of the preset  
devices.  
2 Select a device you want to  
connect.  
3 Use Open (or Search) to  
connect.  
84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting/disconnecting a registered device  
2 Select the method to make a  
call.  
1 On the Bluetooth Phone screen  
or the Bluetooth Audio screen,  
select a registered device you  
want to connect/disconnect.  
•
Redial: Shows the list of the phone  
numbers you have dialed. Go to the  
following step.  
•
•
Received Calls: Shows the list of the  
received calls. Go to the following step.  
Phonebook: Shows the phone book of  
the connected mobile phone. Go to the  
following step.  
• Each time you press 5 ∞, the  
registered device names (and New  
Device when a new device can be  
registered) appear in turn.  
•
•
Missed Calls: Shows the list of the  
missed calls. Go to the following step.  
Phone Number: Shows the phone  
number entry screen. = Input numbers  
and select Dial. (Inputting characters ☞  
[105])  
Voice (Only when the connected mobile  
phone has the voice recognition system):  
= Speak the name you want to call.  
2
Mode  
Connect or  
Disconnect  
]
• Select Connect to connect the selected  
device.  
•
• Select Disconnect to disconnect the  
selected device.  
3 Select the name/phone number  
You can set the unit to connect a Bluetooth  
device automatically when the unit is turned  
on. (☞ [89])  
you want to call.  
Deleting a registered device  
After step 1 above...  
Mode  
]
Delete Pair  
Yes  
]
Bluetooth icon  
lights up when the adapter is connected.*1  
• To cancel, select No  
.
Bluetooth Phone  
Using the Bluetooth mobile phone  
2 P902i  
Calling...  
Jack  
09845671234  
10:35  
Making a call  
You can make a call using one of the Dial  
Menu items.  
Status of the device*3  
Signal strength/Battery remainder  
*1 Blue: The device is connected.  
White: The device is not connected.  
Mobile phone  
Mobile phone with audio function  
*3 Appears only when the information comes from  
the device.  
1
Phone Menu  
Mode  
Dial  
]
]
Dial  
Redial  
1/2  
*2  
Received Calls  
Phonebook  
Missed Calls  
Phone Number  
[01234567890]  
Using Bluetooth devices 85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
On the unit:  
• You can also access the Dial menu by  
pressing PHONE on the remote controller.  
• You can also access the redial list by  
pressing and holding PHONE on the  
remote controller.  
• You can also access the voice calling screen  
by pressing and holding MENU while the  
Bluetooth Phone screen is displayed.  
1 Call up the preset list.  
or  
[Hold]  
To adjust the volume  
2 Select the preset number to call.  
• This adjustment does not affect the  
volume level of the other sources.  
• You can adjust the microphone  
volume level. ☞ [89]  
Dial Preset  
11122223333  
22233336666  
44455556666  
09845671234  
99988887777  
55566668888  
To end the call  
Press and hold MENU, DISP, BACK, ENT,  
5,  
∞,  
,
or TRAFFIC.  
You can also access the preset number list  
through Phone Menu  
]
List.  
Presetting the phone numbers  
You can preset up to six phone numbers.  
To dial to the number acquired in Navigation  
System  
1 Display the phone number you  
want to preset by using one of  
the Dial Menu items.  
1 Search for a POI or a favourite  
point which has telephone  
number information.  
2 Call up the preset list.  
[Hold]  
• To preset a phone number using Phone  
Number, select Store after inputting a  
phone number.  
2 Select [Call]  
.
3 Select a preset number.  
• You cannot make an  
international call through this  
function.  
Preset Memory  
11122223333  
22233336666  
44455556666  
09845671234  
99988887777  
55566668888  
Store  
[Hold]  
You can use the following buttons on the  
remote controller for the Bluetooth phone  
operations.  
ENT 6, PHONE: Answer the incoming  
To call a preset number  
On the remote:  
While the Bluetooth Phone screen is displayed...  
call.  
End the call.  
BACK:  
Number keys: Enter the phone number/PIN  
code.  
PHONE: Call up the redial list if pressed and  
held.  
86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When a call comes in...  
When an SMS comes in...  
Bluetooth Phone  
If the mobile phone is compatible with SMS  
(Short Message Service) and Message  
Info is set to Auto (☞ [89]), the unit rings  
and Receiving Message appears on the  
monitor to inform you of the arrival of the  
message.  
P902i  
Receiving Call  
Jack  
09845671234  
10:35  
Name and  
phone number  
(if acquired)  
The screen is automatically changed to  
Bluetooth Phone.  
When Auto Answer is activated  
The unit answers the incoming calls  
automatically. (☞ [89])  
• When Auto Answer is deactivated, press  
MENU, DISP, BACK, ENT,  
To read the message  
While Receiving Message is displayed...  
• You cannot edit or send a message through  
the unit.  
5
,
∞,  
,
or TRAFFIC to answer the incoming  
call.  
Using the Bluetooth audio player  
Equalizer type ☞ [98]  
Reverse/forward skip  
*1Connected device*2  
Play*3  
Bluetooth icon: lights up when the adapter is Stop playback.  
connected.  
*1  
Audio player  
Mobile phone with audio function  
Select “Bluetooth  
Audio.”  
*2 Each time you press 5 ∞, the registered device names (and  
New Devicewhen a new device can be registered) appear in  
turn.  
Start playback.  
*3 Indicates the button pressed. It may be different from the  
operation status.  
• ☞ [83] for connecting a new device.  
• ☞ [85] for connecting/disconnecting a  
registered device.  
You can use the following buttons on the  
remote controller for the Bluetooth audio  
operations.  
• ☞ [85] for deleting a registered device.  
ENT 6, BACK: Start/stop playback.  
4/¢: Reverse/forward skip  
VOL +/−: Adjust the volume.  
Number keys: Enter the PIN code.  
Using Bluetooth devices 87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Phone Menu  
Menu items  
Selectable settings  
(Initial setting)  
Select a phone number from the list of the phone numbers you have  
dialed.  
Redial  
Select a phone number from the list of the received calls.  
Received Calls  
Phonebook  
Select a name, then phone number from the phone book of the  
connected mobile phone.  
Select a phone number from the list of the missed calls.  
Enter the phone number.  
Missed Calls  
Phone Number  
Voice  
If the connected mobile phone has the voice recognition system, you  
can call by voice command.  
You can read a message from the following message histories.  
Unread: Messages you have not read.  
Read: Messages you have read.  
Message*2  
Unsent: Messages you have not sent.  
Sent: Messages you have sent.  
Only for New Device  
.
Make the unit ready to establish a new Bluetooth connection. Select  
this when establishing a Bluetooth connection with a device for the  
first time, mainly from the device. ☞ [84]  
Open*3  
• Once the connection is established, it is registered in the unit. You  
can connect the unit and the device by using Connect (☞ [89])  
from the next time.  
Only for New Device  
.
Make the unit ready to establish a new Bluetooth connection. Select  
this when establishing a Bluetooth connection with a device for the  
first time, mainly from the unit. The unit searches for available new  
devices. ☞ [84]  
• Before starting a search, turn on the Bluetooth function of the  
device so that the unit can detect it.  
Search*3  
• Once the connection is established, it is registered in the unit. You  
can connect the unit and the device by using Connect (☞ [89])  
from the next time.  
Only for New Device  
.
Shows the list of Bluetooth devices which requires some special  
procedure to establish Bluetooth connection. Select a device you want  
to connect. ☞ [84]  
• After selecting the device, use Open or Search (☞ above) for  
connection.  
Special Device*3  
• Once the connection is established, it is registered in the unit. You  
can connect the unit and the device by using Connect (☞ [89])  
from the next time.  
88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Phone Menu (continued)  
Menu items  
Selectable settings  
(Initial setting)  
Only for the registered devices.  
After selecting a device from among the registered devices (☞ [85,  
87]), establish the connection with it. ☞ [85]  
Connect*3  
Only for the device being connected.  
Disconnect*3  
Disconnect the current device before connecting another device. ☞  
[85]  
Only for the registered devices.  
Delete Pair*3  
Auto Connect  
Delete the registered devices. ☞ [85]  
When the unit is turned on, the connection is established  
automatically with...  
Off: No Bluetooth device.  
Last: The last connected Bluetooth device.  
Order: The available registered Bluetooth device found at first.  
Auto Answer*4  
Message Info*4  
Only for the device being connected for “Bluetooth Phone.”  
Off: The unit does not answer the calls automatically. Answer the call  
manually.  
On: The unit answers the incoming calls automatically.  
Reject: The unit rejects all incoming calls.  
Only for the device being connected for “Bluetooth Phone.”  
Auto: The unit informs you of the arrival of a message by ringing and  
displaying Receiving Message. To read the message, press ENT  
(☞ [87]).  
Manual: The unit does not inform you of the arrival of a message.  
Only for the device being connected for “Bluetooth Phone.”  
Adjust microphone volume connected to the Bluetooth adapter.  
Microphone  
Level*4  
1
,
2
,
3
The Bluetooth software and hardware version is shown.  
Version  
*1 Selectable items vary depending on the connected device.  
*2 Selectable only when the device is compatible with SMS.  
*3 Also available in Modein AV Menufor Bluetooth Audio.  
*4 Not selectable for New Device.  
The Bluetooth word mark and logos are  
owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any  
use of such marks by Victor Company of  
Japan, Limited (JVC) is under licence. Other  
trademarks and trade names are those of their  
respective owners.  
Bluetooth Information:  
If you wish to receive more information about  
Bluetooth, visit our JVC web site.  
Using Bluetooth devices 89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AV Menu items  
☞ [12] for the detailed Menu operations.  
AV Menu  
Setup  
EQ  
1/2  
2/2  
Setup  
1/2  
Display  
Clock  
Disc  
Tuner  
Input  
Sound  
Screen Control  
Aspect  
AV Menu  
Setup  
Others  
2/2  
Mode  
List  
Record  
Edit  
Title Entry  
• The menu items shown may vary.  
Menu items  
Selectable settings  
(Initial setting)  
Language*1  
Dansk, Deutsch, English UK, English US,  
Español, Français, Italiano, Nederlands,  
Svenska  
Demonstration  
Wall Paper  
Off: Cancels.  
On: Activates the demonstration on the monitor.  
You can select the background picture of the monitor.  
Default, Digital, Midnight, Sunset, Gauges,  
Sunrise, Nucleus, Carbon, Tunnels, Orbit,  
Shadow, Forest  
Scroll  
Off: Cancels.  
Once: Scrolls the display information once.  
Auto: Repeats scrolling (5-second intervals).  
• Holding DISP scrolls the information regardless of this  
setting.  
*1 This setting is shared with the Languagesetting in Setup Menu (☞ [46]  
)
90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu items  
Selectable settings  
(Initial setting)  
Tag Display  
Off: Cancels.  
On: Shows the Tag data while playing MP3/WMA/WAV  
tracks on discs or on HDD.  
Dimmer  
Off: Cancels.  
On: Activates dimmer.  
*2  
Auto  
:
Dims the monitor when you turn on the headlights.  
Time Set: Set the time to switch the day/night screen.  
• When you choose Time Set, set the switching time on  
the following screen.  
Local Time Adjust  
Auto: The time zone and DST is adjusted automatically  
using RDS signal.  
Manual: Select the time zone and DST manually.  
Time Format  
Time Zone*3  
12Hours  
,
24Hours  
UTC UTC+1  
,
,
UTC+2  
(UTC: Coordinated Universal Time)  
DST (Daylight Saving  
Time)*3  
Activate this if your residential area is subject to DST.  
Off: Cancels.  
Auto: Automatically applies DST when necessary.  
Menu Language*5  
Select the initial disc menu language (☞ also [104]).  
(English)  
Audio Language*5  
Subtitle*5  
Select the initial audio language (☞ also [104]). (English  
Select the initial subtitle language or erase the subtitle (Off  
(☞ also [104]). (English  
)
)
)
Select the on-screen language used for the external monitor  
OSD Language  
connected to the VIDEO OUT plug. (English  
)
*2 The ILLUMINATION CONTROL lead connection is required. (  
☞
Installation/Connection Manual)  
*3 Adjustable only when Local Time Adjustis set to Manual.  
*4 Adjustable only while the source is set to DISC and playback is stopped.  
*5 After you change these settings, turn off then on the power so that your setting takes effect.  
AV Menu items 91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu items  
Selectable settings  
(Initial setting)  
Select the monitor type to watch a wide screen picture.  
16:9: Select when the aspect ratio of the external monitor  
is 16:9.  
Monitor Type  
16:9  
4:3 Letter Box  
4:3 Letter Box/4:3 Pan Scan: Select when the  
aspect ratio of the external monitor is 4:3. Refer to the  
illustrations on the left to see how the pictures are shown  
on the monitor.  
4:3 Pan Scan  
Select the position of the on-screen bar. ☞ [68]  
OSD Position  
1
2
: Higher position  
: Lower position  
Position 1 Position 2  
Select playback file type when a disc contains different  
types of files.  
File Type  
Audio: Plays back audio files.  
Still Picture: Plays back JPEG files.  
Video: Plays back DivX/MPEG files.  
Select the signal format to be emitted through the  
DIGITAL OUT (Optical) terminal on the rear. For details,  
☞ [106].  
D. Audio Output  
Off: No signal is output from the terminal.  
PCM Only: Select this when connecting an amplifier or a  
decoder incompatible with Dolby Digital, DTS or MPEG  
Audio, or connecting to a recording device.  
Dolby Digital/PCM: Select this when connecting an  
amplifier or a decoder compatible with Dolby Digital.  
Stream/PCM: Select this when connecting an amplifier  
or a decoder compatible with Dolby Digital, DTS, and  
MPEG Audio.  
When playing back a multi-channel DVD disc, this setting  
affects the signals reproduced through the LINE OUT jacks  
(and through the DIGITAL OUT terminal when PCM  
Only is selected for D. Audio Output).  
Down Mix  
Surround Compat.: Select this when you want to enjoy  
multichannel surround audio by connecting an amplifier  
compatible with Dolby Surround to this receiver.  
Stereo: Normally select this.  
92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu items  
Selectable settings  
(Initial setting)  
You can enjoy a powerful sound at a low volume level  
while playing Dolby Digital software.  
Auto: Select to apply the effect to multi-channel encoded  
software.  
D. Range Comp.  
On: Select to always use this function.  
This unit has its own Registration Code. Once you  
have played back a disc in which the Registration Code  
recorded, this unit’s Registration Code is overwritten for  
copyright protection.  
DivX Registration  
Select the format of video output according to the colour  
system of your external monitor.  
Video Output Format  
• The colour system of the unit’s display is also changed.  
Picture quality on the main unit’s display may deteriorate  
when you select PAL  
.
NTSC PAL  
,
When the received signals from the current station become  
weak...  
AF Regional  
AF: Switches to another station. The programme may  
differ from the one currently received (  
lights up).  
AF Regional: Switches to another station broadcasting  
the same programme. ( lights up.)  
Off: Cancels—not selectable when DAB AF is set to On  
☞ [56]  
.
TA Volume  
0
to 30 or 50*6. (15) ☞ [55]  
Programme Search  
Off: Cancels.  
On: Using the AF data, the receiver tunes in to another  
frequency broadcasting the same programme as the  
original preset RDS station is if the preset station signals  
are not sufficient.  
DAB AF*7  
Off, On. ☞ [58]  
IF Band Width  
Auto: Increases the tuner selectivity to reduce interference  
noises between adjacent stations. (Stereo effect may be  
lost.)  
Wide: Subject to the interference from adjacent stations,  
but sound quality will not be degraded and the stereo  
effect will remain.  
*6 Depends on the amplifier gain control.  
*7 Appears only when a DAB tuner is connected.  
AV Menu items 93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu items  
Selectable settings  
(Initial setting)  
External Input*8  
When connecting an external component to the CD  
changer jack on the rear.  
Changer: CD changer, iPod, or D. player.  
Ext Input: Any other than the above.  
• For connecting the DAB tuner or the Bluetooth Adapter,  
this setting is not required. It is automatically detected.  
Video Input*9  
You can determine the use of the VIDEO IN plug. ☞ [82]  
Off: Select if no component is connected. (Video input is  
skipped while changing the display with DISP key.)  
Video: Select when connecting an AV component such as  
VCR.  
Camera: Select when connecting a camera.  
Interlock  
Off: Cancels.  
Reverse: Automatically switch to the camera view when  
*10  
the gear is shifted into reverse.  
Low Speed: Automatically switch to the camera view  
*11  
when your car slows down.  
Horizontal adjustment is required according to how you  
would like to see the picture on the monitor. Vertical  
adjustment is required according to how you have installed  
your camera.  
Horizontal/  
Vertical  
Horizontal: Normal  
Horizontal: Reverse  
Vertical:  
Normal  
Vertical:  
Reverse  
Video Format*12  
Select the format of video input according to the colour  
system of the component connected to the VIDEO IN  
plug.  
NTSC PAL  
,
*8 Not selectable when the component connected to the CD changer jack is selected as the source.  
*9 Not selectable when “EXT-IN” is selected as the source.  
*10 Reverse lamp lead connection is required. ( Installation/Connection Manual)  
*11 Speed signal lead connection is required. ( Installation/Connection Manual)  
☞
☞
*12 Not selectable when Video Inputis set to Off.  
94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu items  
Selectable settings  
(Initial setting)  
Beep  
Off: Cancels.  
On: Activates the key-touch tone.  
You can mute the sound of the System (AV source sounds  
and voice guidance) while you talk on the mobile phone.  
Off: Cancels.  
Telephone Muting  
Muting1 Muting2: Select either one which mute the  
,
*13  
sounds while using the mobile phone.  
Select either of the two which indicates your gear direction  
correctly.  
Reverse Polarization  
GND Battery  
,
Connection*14  
EQ  
You can check the connection status.  
Flat, Hard Rock, R&B, Pop, Jazz, Dance Music,  
Country, Reggae, Classic, User 1, User 2,  
User 3 ☞ [98]  
Adjust fader—speaker output balance between the front  
and rear speakers. (00  
F06: front only  
Fader/Balance  
)
Fader/Balance  
R06: rear only  
F02  
• When using a two-speaker system, set the fader to the  
centre (00).  
L02  
Exit  
Adjust balance—speaker output balance between the left  
and right speakers. (00  
L06: left only  
)
R06: right only  
Adjust and store auto-adjustment volume level for each  
source, comparing to the FM volume level. The volume  
level will automatically increase or decrease when you  
change the source.  
Volume Adjust  
–12 to +12 (00)  
Adjust the settings below in the submenu:  
Subwoofer  
•
Phase: Subwoofer phase. Select either Normal or  
Reverse, which reproduces a better sound.  
•
Level: Subwoofer output level. 00 to 08 (04)  
*13 The TEL MUTING lead connection is required. (  
☞
Installation/Connection Manual)  
*14 This shows the same information as Connectionin the Information Menu (☞ [43]).  
AV Menu items 95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu items  
Selectable settings  
(Initial setting)  
High Pass Filter  
Through: Select when the subwoofer is not connected.  
On: Select when the subwoofer is connected.  
Adjust the crossover frequency between the front/rear  
speakers and the subwoofer.  
55 Hz, 85 Hz, 125 Hz  
Crossover  
You can change the maximum volume level of this  
receiver.  
Amplifier Gain  
Amplifier Off: Deactivates the built-in amplifier.  
Low Power: Volume 00 to 30 (Select this if the maximum  
power of the speakers is less than 50 W)  
High Power: Volume 00 to 50  
You can adjust the monitor to make it clear and legible.  
• While picture from VIDEO IN is displayed, you can  
adjust the playback picture of VIDEO IN (Picture  
[Video]).  
• While DISC is selected as the source and playback  
picture is displayed, you can adjust the playback picture  
of DISC (Picture [Disc]).  
Screen Control/  
Picture [Disc]/  
Picture [Video]  
• For other screens than above, Screen Control  
*15  
appears.  
Bright*16: Adjust if the picture is too bright or too dark.  
Screen Control  
–15 to +15 (00)  
Color Temp.: Adjust the colour temperature of the  
+03  
Exit  
picture—warmer or cooler. –15 to +15  
(
00  
)
Contrast: Adjust the contrast. –15 to +15  
(
00)  
Bright  
Tint: Adjust the tint if the human skin colour is unnatural.  
–15 to +15 (00)  
•
Tint is adjustable only for VIDEO IN signal in NTSC  
and discs in NTSC.  
*15 The settings of Screen Controlare also applied to the map screen and screens of Navigation Menus.  
*16 This setting in Screen Controlis shared with Brightnesssetting in SetupMenu (☞ [44]).  
96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu items  
Selectable settings  
(Initial setting)  
You can change the aspect ratio of the picture.  
Aspect ratio of incoming signal  
4:3 16:9  
Full  
:
For 16:9 original  
pictures  
Aspect [Disc]/  
Aspect [Video]  
Regular  
:
For 4:3 original  
pictures  
• For “DISC”: Aspect ratio is  
automatically selected to match  
to the incoming signals.  
Auto  
:
• For the other video sources:  
Aspect ratio is fixed to Full  
.
Mono  
Only for FM. (Off  
Only for FM. (DX  
,
On) ☞ [53]  
Local) ☞ [53]  
DX / Local  
SSM  
,
Only for FM. ☞ [52]  
Only for FM/DAB. ☞ [55, 58]  
PTY Standby  
D.(Dynamic) Range  
Control  
Only for DAB. (Off  
,
DRC1, DRC2, DRC3) ☞ [58]  
Only for DAB. ☞ [58]  
Announce Standby  
Intro/Repeat/Random  
Only for disc playback, music server, CD changer and  
iPod/D. player. ☞ [64, 71, 78, 80]  
The accessible lists differ depending on the sources.  
To record audio CDs into the music server. ☞ [72, 73]  
To copy music files into the music server. ☞ [74]  
To edit the tracks in the music server. ☞ [75]  
☞ [75, 81]  
List  
Record  
Copy  
Edit  
Title Entry  
*17 For the menu items in Modefor Bluetooth Audio, ☞ [88, 89]  
.
AV Menu items 97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sound equalization  
Selecting an equalizer type  
1
Storing your own adjustment  
You can store your adjustment into User 1  
,
User 2, and User 3  
.
2
AV Menu  
EQ  
1 Repeat steps 1 and 2 above, then  
]
in step 3...  
EQ - Flat  
Settings  
00  
EQ  
1/3  
Flat  
Hard Rock  
R&B  
Pop  
Jazz  
Frequency  
60 Hz  
Store  
Exit  
3 Select an equalizer type.  
2 Adjust.  
Select the frequency.  
Adjust the level.  
Preset equalizing values  
60 150 400  
1
2.4  
6
12  
Equalizer type  
Flat  
Hz Hz Hz kHz kHz kHz kHz  
00 00 00 00 00 00 00  
+03 +03 +01 00 00 +02 +01  
+03 +02 +02 00 +01 +01 +03  
00 +02 00 00 +01 +01 +02  
+03 +02 +01 +01 +01 +03 +02  
+04 +02 00 –02 –01 +01 +01  
+02 +01 00 00 00 +01 +02  
+03 00 00 +01 +02 +02 +03  
+02 +03 +01 00 00 +02 00  
00 00 00 00 00 00 00  
3 Store the setting into User 1  
,
User 2 or User 3  
.
Hard Rock  
R&B  
EQ - Store To  
User 1  
User 2  
User 3  
Pop  
Jazz  
Dance Music  
Country  
Reggae  
Classic  
User 1/2/3  
Store  
98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional Information  
General  
RDS operations  
• There is a time limit for some operations.  
In this case, if no further operation is done  
for a certain period, the current operation is  
canceled.  
• By pressing SRC or MAP on the unit, you  
can also turn on the power. The map screen  
is displayed at turn-on if you press MAP, and  
an AV screen if you press SRC. If the source is  
ready, playback starts.  
• TA Standby Reception and PTY Standby  
Reception will be cancelled temporarily in the  
following cases:  
– While recording a CD into the HDD.  
– While copying the disc contents into the  
HDD.  
– While editing the HDD contents.  
• If you want to know more about RDS, visit  
<http://www.rds.org.uk>.  
• You cannot select some sources if they are not  
ready.  
DAB operations  
– DAB/CD-CH/iPod/D. PLAYER: cannot  
be selected without connecting the target  
source component.  
– DISC: cannot be selected if a disc is not in  
the loading slot.  
– EXT-IN: cannot be selected without  
selecting Ext Input for the External  
Input setting. (☞ [94])  
• Only the primary DAB service can be preset  
even when you store a secondary service.  
Disc operations  
General  
• In this manual, words “track” and “file” are  
interchangeably used.  
• This unit can also play back 8 cm discs.  
• This unit can only play back audio CD  
(CD-DA) files if different type of files are  
recorded in the same disc.  
• On some discs, the actual operations may  
be different from what is explained in this  
manual.  
• This unit can display only one-byte  
characters. No other characters can be  
correctly displayed.  
• Reverse search stops automatically when it  
reaches the beginning of the disc. Playback  
resumes at normal speed.  
– Bluetooth Audio: cannot be selected if a  
Bluetooth adapter is not connected.  
• If you turn off the power while DISC is  
selected as the source, disc play will start  
automatically next time you turn on the  
power.  
• The voltage and the speed on the vehicle  
information screen may be different from the  
actual values.  
Listening to the radio  
Storing stations in memory  
• When SSM is over, all previously stored  
stations are erased and stations are stored  
newly.  
• No sound comes out during slow motion  
playback. When playing a VCD, reverse slow  
motion playback is prohibited.  
• When SSM is over, received stations are  
preset in No. 1 (lowest frequency) to No. 6  
(highest frequency), and preset station No. 1  
is tuned in.  
• When storing a station manually, a previously  
preset station is erased when a new station is  
stored in the same preset number.  
• When playing a DVD/VCD, no sound comes  
out during Search.  
• For some DVDs and VCDs, changing the  
subtitle language, audio language (or audio  
channel) without using the disc menu is  
prohibited.  
Sound equalization / Additional information 99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Inserting a disc  
• When a disc is inserted upside down, Disc  
Error appears on the monitor. Eject the disc.  
• For DVD-R/DVD-RW: This receiver can  
play only discs recorded in the DVD-Video  
format. (Discs recorded in the DVD-VR  
format cannot be played.)  
• DVD-RWs or CD-RWs may require a longer  
readout time since the reflectance of DVD-  
RW and CD-RW is lower than that of regular  
discs.  
• Do not use discs on which labels can be  
directly printed by an ink jet printer. Using  
these discs under high temperatures or high  
humidity may cause malfunctions or damages  
to discs.  
Ejecting a disc  
• If the ejected disc is not removed within  
15 seconds, the disc is automatically inserted  
again into the loading slot to protect it from  
dust.  
• If the control panel is left open for a while, it  
closes automatically.  
Changing the source  
• If you change the source, playback also stops  
without ejecting the disc.  
Next time you select “DISC” for the playback  
source, disc play starts from where it has been  
stopped previously.  
• When a disc has been loaded, selecting  
“DISC” for the playback source starts disc  
play.  
Playing Recordable/Rewritable discs  
• This unit can recognize a total of 3 500 files  
and 250 folders (a maximum of 999 files per  
folder).  
• If no playable files are recorded in a folder, the  
folder will not be recognized.  
• Use only “finalized” discs.  
• This unit can play back multi-session discs;  
however, unclosed sessions will be skipped  
while playing.  
• This unit may be unable to play back some  
discs or files due to their characteristics or  
recording conditions.  
Playing DivX files  
• This unit can play back DivX files with  
the extension code <.divx>, <.div>, <.avi>  
(regardless of the letter case—upper/lower).  
• This unit supports the DivX files whose  
resolution is 720 x 576 pixels or less.  
• This unit supports DivX 6.x, 5.x, 4.x, and 3.11.  
• Audio stream should conform to MP3 or  
Dolby Digital.  
• This unit does not support GMC (Global  
Motion Compression).  
• The file encoded in the interlaced scanning  
mode may not be played back correctly.  
• This unit can display a unique registration  
code—DivX Video On Demand (DRM—  
Digital Rights Management). For activation  
and more detail, visit <www.divx.com/vod>.  
• This unit can recognize a total 25 characters  
for file/folder names.  
100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playing MPEG files  
• This unit cannot play back the following files  
and skips them when playing back files:  
– MP3 files encoded with MP3i and  
MP3 PRO format.  
• This unit can play back MPEG files with the  
extension code <.mpg> or <.mpeg>.  
• The stream format should conform to MPEG  
system/program stream.  
• The file format should be MP@ML (Main  
Profile at Main Level)/SP@ML (Simple Profile  
at Main Level)/MP@LL (Main Profile at Low  
Level).  
– MP3 files encoded in an unappropriated  
format.  
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.  
– WMA files encoded with lossless,  
professional, and voice format.  
– WMA files which are not based upon  
Windows Media® Audio.  
• Audio streams should conform to MPEG1  
Audio Layer-2.  
– WMA DRM (Digital Rights  
Playing JPEG files  
• It is recommended that you record a file at  
640 x 480 resolution.  
• This unit can play back baseline JPEG files.  
Progressive JPEG files or lossless JPEG files  
cannot be played.  
Management).  
– Files which have the data such as AIFF,  
ATRAC3, etc.  
– WMA files encoded with MBR (Multiple  
Bit Rate) format.  
– AAC files.  
– OGG files.  
Playing MP3/WMA/WAV files  
• This unit can play back files with the  
extension code <.mp3>, <.wma>, or <.wav>  
(regardless of the letter case—upper/lower).  
• This unit can show ID3 Tag Version  
1.0/1.1/2.2/2.3/2.4 (for MP3). This unit can  
also show WAV Tag and WMA Tag.  
• This unit can play back the files meeting the  
conditions below:  
– Bit rate: MP3/WMA: 32 kbps - 320 kbps  
– Sampling frequency:  
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG1)  
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG2)  
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for WMA)  
44.1 kHz (for WAV)  
On-screen guide icons  
During play, the following guide icons may  
appear for a while on the monitor.  
Appears at the beginning of a scene  
containing multi-subtitle languages  
(for DVD only).  
Appears at the beginning of a scene  
containing multi-audio languages (for  
DVD only).  
Appears at the beginning of a scene  
containing multi-angle views (for DVD  
only).  
– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/ Level 2,  
Romeo, Joliet, Windows long file name  
• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR  
(variable bit rate).  
Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in  
elapsed time indication.  
Playback  
Pause  
Forward slow motion playback (for  
DVD and VCD only)  
Reverse slow motion playback (for  
DVD only)  
Forward search  
Reverse search  
Additional information 101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Music server operations  
Control screen  
• The following control screens appear only  
• Sound quality may deteriorate if you select  
Normal Quality for recording mode.  
• While recording, recorded sounds are  
reproduced from the speakers. When  
recording is stopped, CD original sounds are  
reproduced.  
on the external monitor.  
DivX/MPEG/JPEG/MP3/WMA/WAV  
T. RPT  
TIME 00:00:14  
Folder :  
2 / 3  
Track : 6 / 14 (Total 41)  
• You cannot change the source while recording  
or copying tracks.  
01 Music  
02 Music  
03 Music  
Cloudy.mp3  
Fair.mp3  
Fog.mp3  
• This system uses SCMS (Serial Copy  
Management System) which allows only  
first-generation digital copies to be made of  
premastered software such as regular CDs. If  
you try to record from a duplicated CD-R/  
-RW, SCMS Cannot Copy may appear on  
the display then recording will be cancelled.  
• Text data in the CD Text cannot be recorded  
into the HDD.  
Hail.wma  
Indian summer.mp3  
Rain.mp3  
Shower.mp3  
Snow.mp3  
Thunder.wma  
Typhoon.mp3  
Wind.mp3  
Track Information  
Album  
Weather  
Artist  
Robert M. Smith  
Title  
Winter sky.mp3  
Rain  
1
2
3
4
5
Current folder (highlighted bar)  
Current folder number/total folder number  
Folder list  
Selected playback mode  
Elapsed playing time of the current track (not  
displayed for JPEG)  
• Play time indication may advance unstably  
on the monitor while recording. This is not a  
malfunction of this unit.  
• You cannot edit the Tag data of tracks in the  
6
7
Operation status  
Current track number/total number of tracks  
in the current folder (total number of tracks  
on the disc)  
Track information (only for MP3/WMA/WAV)  
Track list  
Current track (highlighted)  
HDD.  
• While the System is moving, rearranging or  
deleting items in the library, no sound comes  
out, and you cannot change the playback  
source.  
• When you move, rearrange or delete items in  
the llibrary, the playback mode is canceled.  
8
9
p
CD  
TIME  
00:14  
T. RPT  
Track : 6 / 14  
Cloudy  
Fair  
Fog  
Hail  
Indian summer  
Rain  
Shower  
Snow  
Thunder  
Typhoon  
Wind  
Track Information  
Album  
Four seasons  
Artist  
Robert M. Smith  
Title  
Winter sky  
Rain  
1
2
3
4
Selected playback mode  
Elapsed playing time of the current track  
Operation status  
Current track number/total number of tracks  
on the disc  
Track information  
5
6
7
Track list  
Current track (highlighted bar)  
102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
iPod/D. player operations  
Using Bluetooth devices  
General  
• When you turn on this unit, the iPod or  
D. player is charged through this unit.  
• The text information may not be displayed  
correctly. This unit can display up to 40  
characters.  
• The items in the player’s top menu are as  
follows:  
• While driving, do not perform complicated  
operation such as dialing the numbers, using  
phone book, etc. When you perform these  
operations, stop your car in a safe place.  
• Some Bluetooth devices may not be connected  
to this unit depending on the Bluetooth  
version of the device.  
• This unit may not work for some Bluetooth  
devices.  
• Connecting condition may vary depending on  
circumstances around you.  
• When the unit is turned off, the device is  
disconnected.  
Icons for phone types  
• These icons indicate the phone type set on the  
device.  
For iPod:  
Playlists Ô Artists Ô Albums Ô Songs  
Ô Genres Ô Composers Ô (back to  
the beginning)  
For D. player:  
Playlist Ô Artist Ô Album Ô Genre  
Ô Track Ô (back to the beginning)  
Notice:  
When operating an iPod or a D. player, some  
operations may not be performed correctly  
or as intended. In this case, visit the following  
JVC web site:  
: Mobile phone  
: Household phone  
: Office  
For iPod users: <http://www.jvc.co.jp/  
english/car/support/ks-pd100/index.html>  
For D. player users: <http://www.jvc.co.jp/  
english/car/support/ks-pd500/index.html>  
: General  
: Other than above  
Warning messages for Bluetooth operations  
•
Connection Error : The device is registered  
but the connection has failed. Use Connect  
to connect the device again. (☞ [85])  
Error : Try the operation again. If Error  
appears again, check if the device supports the  
function you have tried.  
•
•
•
•
Device Unfound : No available Bluetooth  
device is detected by Search  
.
Loading : The unit is updating the phone  
book and/or a text message.  
Please Wait... : The unit is preparing to  
use the Bluetooth function. If the message  
does not disappear, turn off and turn on the  
unit, then connect the device again (or reset  
the unit).  
•
Reset 08 : Check the connection between  
the adapter and this unit.  
Additional information 103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
settings will not work as you set due to their  
internal disc programming.  
• When you select 16:9 for a picture whose  
aspect ratio is 4:3, the picture slightly changes  
due to the process for converting the picture  
width.  
• Even if 4:3 Pan Scan is selected, the screen  
size may become 4:3 Letter Box for some  
discs.  
AV Menu items  
• If you change the Amplifier Gain setting  
from High Power to Low Power while the  
volume level is set higher than 30, the unit  
automatically changes the volume level to  
Volume 30  
.
• After you change any of Menu Language  
Audio Language  
off then on the power, and re-insert the disc  
(or insert another disc) so that your setting  
takes effect.  
• When the language you have selected is not  
recorded on a disc, the original language is  
/
/Subtitle settings, turn  
• When you change the DAB AF setting from  
Off to On, the AF Regional setting changes  
to AF if it has been set to Off  
.
automatically used as the initial language. In  
addition, for some discs, the initial languages  
Language codes (for DVD/DivX language selection)  
Code Language  
Code Language  
Code Language  
Code Language  
Code Language  
Afar  
Persian  
Finnish  
Fiji  
Faroese  
Frisian  
Irish  
Scots Gaelic  
Galician  
Guarani  
Gujarati  
Hausa  
Greenlandic  
Cambodian  
Kannada  
Korean (KOR)  
Kashmiri  
Kurdish  
Kirghiz  
Latin  
Lingala  
Laothian  
Lithuanian  
Latvian, Lettish  
Malagasy  
Maori  
Macedonian  
Malayalam  
Mongolian  
Moldavian  
Marathi  
Malay (MAY)  
Maltese  
Burmese  
Nauru  
Nepali  
Norwegian  
Occitan  
(Afan) Oromo  
Oriya  
Panjabi  
Polish  
Pashto, Pushto  
Portuguese  
Quechua  
Rhaeto-Romance  
Kirundi  
Rumanian  
Kinyarwanda  
Sanskrit  
Sesotho  
Sundanese  
Swahili  
Tamil  
Telugu  
Tajik  
AA  
AB  
AF  
AM  
AR  
AS  
AY  
AZ  
BA  
BE  
BG  
BH  
BI  
BN  
BO  
BR  
CA  
CO  
CS  
CY  
DZ  
EL  
FA  
FI  
KL  
OC  
OM  
OR  
PA  
PL  
PS  
PT  
QU  
RM  
RN  
RO  
RW  
SA  
SD  
SG  
SH  
SI  
ST  
SU  
SW  
TA  
TE  
TG  
TH  
TI  
Abkhazian  
Afrikaans  
Ameharic  
Arabic  
Assamese  
Aymara  
Azerbaijani  
Bashkir  
Byelorussian  
Bulgarian  
Bihari  
Bislama  
Bengali, Bangla  
Tibetan  
Breton  
Catalan  
Corsican  
Czech  
Welsh  
Bhutani  
Greek  
Esperanto  
Estonian  
Basque  
KM  
KN  
KO  
KS  
KU  
KY  
LA  
LN  
LO  
LT  
LV  
MG  
MI  
MK  
ML  
MN  
MO  
MR  
MS  
MT  
MY  
NA  
NE  
NO  
FJ  
FO  
FY  
GA  
GD  
GL  
GN  
GU  
HA  
HI  
HR  
HU  
HY  
IA  
IE  
IK  
Thai  
Tigrinya  
Turkmen  
Tagalog  
Setswana  
Tonga  
Turkish  
Tsonga  
Tatar  
TK  
TL  
TN  
TO  
TR  
TS  
TT  
TW  
UK  
UR  
UZ  
VI  
VO  
WO  
XH  
YO  
ZU  
Hindi  
Croatian  
Hungarian  
Armenian  
Interlingua  
Interlingue  
Inupiak  
Indonesian  
Icelandic  
Hebrew  
Yiddish  
Javanese  
Georgian  
Kazakh  
Sindhi  
Sangho  
Serbo-Croatian  
Singhalese  
Slovak  
Slovenian  
Samoan  
Shona  
Somali  
Albanian  
Serbian  
Siswati  
Twi  
Ukrainian  
Urdu  
SK  
SL  
Uzbek  
IN  
IS  
Vietnamese  
Volapuk  
Wolof  
Xhosa  
Yoruba  
Zulu  
SM  
SN  
SO  
SQ  
SR  
SS  
IW  
JI  
JW  
KA  
KK  
EO  
ET  
EU  
104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Inputting characters  
Checkbox operations  
Ex.:  
Ex.:  
- Input Genre Name -  
Select Track  
Select All  
Track 1  
1/3  
Track 2  
Track 3  
Track 4  
Check  
Del More Store  
To select an item in the list  
Enter a space  
Move the cursor  
Display other keyboards  
Delete a character  
• Each time you press ENT, the checkbox  
alternates between checked (selected) and  
not checked (not selected).  
Select a character on the  
keyboard  
To select all the items in the list  
Select Select All and press ENT.  
• When you have selected all the items, the  
top item in the list changes to Deselect  
All. To remove all the item from  
selection, select Deselect All and press  
ENT.  
Enter the selected character  
To display other keyboards  
• Each time you press the button, the  
keyboard changes cyclically. By pressing  
and holding the button, you can change  
the keyboards in the reverse direction.  
Characters available for word entry  
In addition to the roman alphabet (A – Z, a – z),  
the following characters can be used to input  
various information.  
To delete all the characters  
Select Del and hold ENT.  
• While driving at a speed greater than 10 km/  
h, operations of inputting are prohibited.  
space  
Additional information 105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About sounds reproduced through the rear terminals  
• Through the analog terminals (Speaker out/LINE OUT):  
2-channel signal is emitted. When playing a multi-channel encoded disc, multi-channel signals are  
downmixed. (☞ [92] Down Mix.)  
• Through DIGITAL OUT (optical):  
Digital signals (Linear PCM, Dolby Digital, DTS, MPEG Audio) are emitted through this terminal.  
To reproduce multi-channel sounds such as Dolby Digital, DTS, and MPEG Audio, connect an  
amplifier or a decoder compatible with these multi-channel sources to this terminal, and set D.  
Audio Output correctly. (☞ below.)  
Output signals through the DIGITAL OUT terminal  
Output signals are different depending on the D. Audio Output setting (☞ [92]).  
D. Audio Output  
Dolby Digital/  
PCM Only  
Stream/PCM  
PCM  
Playback disc  
48 kHz, 16/20/24 bits  
Linear PCM  
48 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM*  
48 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM  
96 kHz, Linear PCM  
DVD  
Video  
48 kHz, 16 bits stereo  
Linear PCM  
48 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM  
48 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM  
with Dolby Digital  
Dolby Digital bitstream  
with DTS  
with MPEG Audio  
DTS bitstream  
MPEG bitstream  
44.1/88.2/176.4 kHz,  
16/20/24 bits Linear  
PCM  
44.1 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM  
48/96/192 kHz,  
16/20/24 bits Linear  
PCM  
DVD  
Audio  
48 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM  
48 kHz, 16 bits stereo  
Linear PCM  
with Dolby Digital  
with DTS  
Dolby Digital bitstream  
48 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM  
DTS bitstream  
44.1 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM  
48 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM  
48 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM  
48 kHz, 16 bits stereo  
Linear PCM  
Audio CD, Video CD  
Audio CD with DTS  
with Dolby Digital  
DTS bitstream  
Dolby Digital bitstream  
DivX  
with MPEG Audio  
MPEG  
MP3/WMA  
WAV  
32/44.1/48 kHz, 16 bits Linear PCM  
44.1/48 kHz, 16 bits Linear PCM  
32/44.1/48 kHz, 16 bits Linear PCM  
44.1 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM  
*
While playing some DVDs, digital signals may be emitted at 20 bits or 24 bits (at their original bit rate) through the  
DIGITAL OUT terminal if the discs are not copy-protected.  
106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Information  
108 Maintenance  
109 Troubleshooting  
117 Specifications  
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance  
How to clean the connectors  
Frequent detachment will deteriorate the  
connectors.  
To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe  
the connectors with a cotton swab or cloth  
moistened with alcohol, being careful not to  
damage the connectors.  
How to handle discs  
Centre  
holder  
When removing a disc from its  
case, press down the centre holder  
of the case and lift the disc out,  
holding it by the edges.  
• Always hold the disc by the  
edges. Do not touch its recording surface.  
When storing a disc into its case, gently insert  
the disc around the centre holder (with the  
printed surface facing up).  
• Make sure to store discs into the cases after  
use.  
To keep discs clean  
A dirty disc may not play correctly.  
If a disc does become dirty, wipe it  
with a soft cloth in a straight line  
from centre to edge.  
Connectors  
• Do not use any solvent (for  
example, conventional record cleaner, spray,  
thinner, benzine, etc.) to clean discs.  
Moisture condensation  
Moisture may condense on the lens inside the  
DVD/CD player in the following cases:  
• After starting the heater in the car.  
• If it becomes very humid inside the car.  
Should this occur, the DVD/CD player may  
malfunction. In this case, eject the disc and  
leave the unit turned on for a few hours until  
the moisture evaporates.  
To play new discs  
New discs may have some rough  
spots around the inner and outer  
edges. If such a disc is used, this  
unit may reject the disc.  
To remove these rough spots, rub  
the edges with a pencil or ball-point pen, etc.  
To clean the unit  
When the unit is very dirty, wipe with a  
well-wrung cloth dipped in a kitchen cleanser  
(neutral) thinned by water and then go over the  
same surface with a dry cloth.  
(Since there is the possibility of water drops  
getting inside of the unit, do not directly apply  
cleanser to the surface.)  
Do not use the following discs:  
Warped disc  
Sticker  
Sticker residue  
Stick-on label  
108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service  
centre.  
Symptoms  
Causes/Remedies  
Some operations are prohibited without the  
parking brake engaged. Park the car in a safe place  
before the operations.  
•
Parking Brake appears on the  
monitor.  
• Sound cannot be heard from the  
speakers.  
• Adjust the volume to the optimum level.  
• Check the cords and connections.  
• The monitor is not clear and legible for Sunshine from the windscreen may cause this  
watching the playback picture or the  
map.  
symptom. Adjust Bright and Contrast of  
Screen Control. (☞ [96]).  
The internal temperature is too low. Leave the  
power on, and wait until the internal temperature  
rises and the indication goes off.  
•
•
Low Temperature/HDD Warming  
Up appears and some functions do not  
work properly.  
Something is blocking the control panel  
movement. Remove the obstacle, then reset the  
unit (☞ [4]).  
• If this does not work, check if the installation  
has been correctly done.  
Push Reset appears on the display,  
and the control panel movement is  
freezed.  
• The unit does not work at all.  
Reset the unit (☞ [4]).  
• Cannot operate some functions of an  
AV source on the map screen.  
On the map screen, you can operate only some  
limited functions of the current source. Press SRC  
to display the AV screen and operate the source.  
• Cannot operate AV sources with the  
remote controller on the map screen.  
On the map screen, 4¢5∞ keys of the  
remote controller always works for scrolling the  
map.  
• Route calculation seems to have  
stopped.  
Route calculation may take long depending on the  
route. Wait for a while.  
• Navigation voice cannot be heard from Guidance voice level is set to the minimum level.  
the speakers.  
Adjust it to the optimum level. (☞ [43])  
• Voice guidance are not heard while  
viewing an AV screen.  
Interruption is set to Off. Set it to On to allow  
the voice guidance interrupt the AV source. (☞  
[44])  
• The voice guidance does not come out  
from the speaker on the driver’s side.  
Change the Output Channel setting. (☞ [43])  
• Cannot scroll the map to northeast, etc.  
To scroll to northeast, you need to press 5 and  
¢ at the same time.  
Maintenance / Troubleshooting 109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Symptoms  
Causes/Remedies  
• Navigation guidance is incorrect.  
Installation angle setting is not correct. Set it  
correctly. (☞ [46])  
• Navigation guidance is sometimes  
incorrect.  
Reversing signal/speed signal wires are not  
connected. Connect them correctly (☞  
Installation/Connection Manual—separate  
volume).  
• Navigation guidance is hard to listen to. Surround noise interferes. Increase the voice  
cruise level. (☞ [44])  
Failed to calculate the route. Select another  
destination/via point.  
•
•
Route Calculation Error. appears  
on the monitor.  
Valid information is not available in the database.  
Search for another place.  
City not found.  
not found. Valid information not  
found. Coordinate information  
,
Street/Centre  
,
,
not found. or Street not found.  
appears on the monitor.  
This is not a malfunction. The system may also  
search areas around the selected city/country.  
• A POI found using Category in the  
Destination Menu is not within the  
selected city/country.  
You tried to save a route in an existing name.  
Select another name.  
•
•
•
The route name already exists.  
appears on the monitor.  
Delete some routes and save the new one.  
No valid TMC information is available now.  
Check the connection information of the leads  
No space to store the new  
route. appears on the monitor.  
There are no valid traffic  
information. appears on the monitor.  
• The current position displayed on the  
map remains wrong for more than 30  
minutes.  
below. (☞ [43] Connection  
)
– GPS antenna  
– Speed signal lead  
– Reverse gear signal lead  
If any disconnection is found, connect the lead  
again.  
• If no problems are found with connections,  
reset the calibration data. (☞ [46] Reset  
Calibration  
)
• SSM automatic presetting does not  
work.  
Store stations manually (☞ [53]).  
• Static noise while listening to the radio. Connect the aerial firmly.  
110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Symptoms  
Causes/Remedies  
Move to an area with stronger signals.  
•
No DAB Signal appears on the  
monitor.  
Connect this unit and the DAB tuner correctly,  
then reset the unit (☞ [4]).  
•
Reset 08 appears on the monitor.  
• The DAB tuner does not work at all.  
Reconnect this unit and the DAB tuner correctly.  
Then, reset the unit (☞ [4]).  
Check the cords and connections.  
Eject the disc forcibly (☞ [4]).  
Unlock the disc (☞ [65]).  
•
Antenna Power NG appears on the  
monitor.  
• Disc can be neither recognized nor  
played.  
• Disc cannot be ejected.  
• Recordable/Rewritable discs cannot be • Insert a finalized disc.  
played back.  
• Tracks on the Recordable/Rewritable  
discs cannot be skipped.  
• Finalize the discs with the component which  
you used for recording.  
The format of the disc is supported.  
Insert the disc correctly again.  
•
•
•
Not Support appears on the monitor.  
Disc Error appears on the monitor.  
The player may have malfunctioned. Eject the disc  
forcibly.  
Eject Error or Loading Error  
appears on the monitor.  
• Sound and pictures are sometimes  
interrupted or distorted.  
• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.  
• Change the disc.  
• No playback picture appears on the  
monitor.  
Parking brake wire is not connected properly. (☞  
Installation/Connection Manual.)  
• No sound is heard while playing back a Some DVD Audios prohibit downmixed output.  
DVD Audio.  
When you play back such a disc, the unit plays  
back the right front and left front signals only.  
Region code is not correct (☞ [61]).  
•
Region Code Error appears on the  
monitor when you insert a DVD Video.  
Troubleshooting 111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Symptoms  
Causes/Remedies  
• Disc cannot be played back.  
• Change the disc.  
• Record the tracks using a compliant application  
in the appropriate discs (☞ [61]).  
• Add appropriate extension codes to the file  
names.  
• WMA track cannot be played back, and The track is copy-protected with DRM.  
skipped.  
• Noise is generated.  
The track played back is not a playable file. Skip to  
another file.  
• Tracks are not played back as you have Playback order may differ from the one played  
intended.  
back using other players.  
• A longer readout time is required.  
Readout time varies due to the complexity of the  
folder/file configuration. Do not use too many  
hierarchies and folders.  
• Elapsed playing time is not correct.  
This sometimes occurs during playback. This is  
caused by how the tracks are recorded.  
• Correct characters are not displayed  
(e.g. album name).  
This unit can only display alphabets (A – Z, a  
– z), numbers, and a limited number of symbols  
and some accented letters. Available characters ☞  
[105]  
Insert a disc that contains tracks of proper  
formats.  
•
No Files appears on the monitor.  
112  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Symptoms  
Causes/Remedies  
• Sound does not come out while  
copying music files.  
This is not a malfunction.  
• Sound does not come out in the map  
screen while recording a CD.  
This is not a malfunction.  
• Cannot change the source while  
recording/copying.  
This is not a malfunction. If you want to enjoy  
another source, cancel recording/copying and  
change the source.  
• Edited track name is not displayed.  
Tag information instead of the track name is  
displayed. Set Tag Display to Off to display the  
track name. (☞ [91])  
No track is stored in the HDD.  
•
•
No Music appears on the monitor.  
The selected item contains no tracks/albums.  
Select another.  
No Track or No Album appears on  
the monitor.  
The selected album is full. Select another album.  
•
•
Cannot record tracks over. or  
Cannot copy tracks over. appears  
on the monitor.  
The selected album cannot contain all the  
tracks you wanted to record/copy. Press ENT to  
continue recording/copying, or press BACK to  
select another album.  
Record only xx/XX tracks. or  
Copy only xx/XX tracks. appears  
on the monitor.  
The selected album/genre cannot contain all the  
items you wanted to move. Press ENT to continue  
moving the items, or press BACK to select  
another album/genre.  
•
Move only xx/XX tracks? or  
Move only xx/XX albums?  
appears on the monitor.  
The capacity of the target storage you have  
selected is already full. Delete the unwanted items  
in the target storage to make an enough space.  
•
•
HDD Full, Track Full, Album  
Full, or Genre Full appears on the  
monitor.  
Recording is failed due to the external influences  
such as vibration, shaking of the car. Try to record  
once more while driving on a paved road. If the  
trouble still persist, consult your dealer.  
Write Error/Read Error appears  
and CD recording is canceled.  
You have tried to copy non-original disc. Copy its  
original disc.  
•
•
•
SCMS Cannot Copy appears.  
The format of the track is not supported.  
Not Supported appears on the  
monitor.  
The selected track does not exist in the HDD.  
Not Playable appears on the  
monitor.  
Troubleshooting 113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Symptoms  
Causes/Remedies  
• Insert a disc into the magazine.  
• A disc is inserted upside down. Insert the disc  
correctly.  
•
No Disc appears on the monitor.  
Insert the magazine.  
•
•
•
No Magazine appears on the  
monitor.  
Disc does not include playable files. Replace the  
disc with playable files.  
Connect this unit and the CD changer correctly  
and press the reset button of the CD changer.  
No Files appears on the monitor.  
Reset 08 appears on the monitor.  
Press the reset button of the CD changer.  
Reset 01 Reset 07 appears on the  
•
–
monitor.  
• The CD changer does not work at all.  
Reset the unit (☞ [4]).  
• The iPod or D. player does not turn on • Check the connecting cable and its connection.  
or does not work.  
• Charge the battery.  
• For D. player: Update the firmware version.  
• The sound is distorted.  
Deactivate the equalizer either on this unit or the  
iPod/D. player.  
Check the connecting cable and its connection.  
•
Disconnect appears on the monitor.  
• For iPod: Playback stops.  
The headphones are disconnected during  
playback. Restart playback.  
• No sound can be heard when  
connecting an iPod nano.  
Disconnect the headphones from the iPod nano.  
• No sound can be heard.  
Disconnect the adapter from the D. player. Then,  
connect it again.  
•
•
•
•
ERROR 01 appears on the monitor  
when connecting a D. player.  
No tracks are stored. Import tracks to the iPod or  
D. player.  
No Files or No Track appears on  
the monitor.  
Disconnect the adapter from both this unit and  
iPod/D. player. Then, connect it again.  
Reset 01 Reset 07 appears on the  
–
monitor.  
Check the connection between the adapter and  
this unit.  
Reset 08 appears on the monitor.  
• The iPod’s or D. player’s controls do  
not work after disconnecting from this  
unit.  
Reset the iPod or D. player.  
114  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Symptoms  
Causes/Remedies  
• Bluetooth device does not detect the  
unit.  
This unit can be connected with one Bluetooth  
mobile phone and one Bluetooth audio device at a  
time. While connecting a device, this unit cannot  
be detected from another device. Disconnect  
currently connected device and search again.  
• The unit does not detect the Bluetooth • Check the Bluetooth setting of the device.  
device.  
• Search from the Bluetooth device. After the  
device detects the unit, select Open on the unit  
to connect the device. (☞ [84])  
• The unit does not make pairing with  
the Bluetooth device.  
• Enter the same PIN code for both the unit and  
target device.  
• Select the device name from Special Device  
,
then try to connect again. (☞ [84])  
• Echo or noise occurs.  
Adjust the microphone unit position.  
• Phone sound quality is poor.  
• Place the Bluetooth audio device nearer to the  
adapter.  
• Move the car to place where you can get a better  
signal reception.  
• The sound is interrupted or skipped  
during playback of a Bluetooth audio  
device.  
• Place the Bluetooth audio device nearer to the  
adapter.  
• Disconnect the device connected for “Bluetooth  
Phone.”  
• Turn off, then turn on the unit.  
• (When the sound is not yet restored,) connect  
the device again.  
• The connected audio device cannot be Check whether the connected audio device  
controlled.  
supports AVRCP (Audio Video Remote Control  
Profile).  
*
For Bluetooth operations, refer also to the instructions supplied with the Bluetooth Adapter.  
Troubleshooting 115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback sources  
Dolby Digital  
Compressed digital audio, developed by  
Dolby Laboratories, which enables multi-  
channel encode to create the realistic  
surround sound.  
Glossary  
Navigation System  
GPS  
Global Positioning System. By receiving the  
GPS signals from the satellites, the Navigation  
System determines the position of the car.  
DTS  
Compressed digital audio, developed by  
Digital Theater Systems, Inc., which enables  
multichannel like Dolby Digital. As the  
compression ratio is lower than for Dolby  
Digital, it provides wider dynamic range and  
better separation.  
Linear PCM  
Uncompressed digital audio, the same format  
used for CDs and most studio masters.  
POI  
Points of Interest. You can select your  
destinations by selecting from the  
categories—such as business centres,  
shopping centres.  
TMC  
Traffic Message Channel. Traffic messages  
transmitted by some VHF broadcasters via  
RDS signals. Using this data, the Navigation  
System informs you of road conditions.  
MPEG Audio  
Another compressed digital audio which also  
enables multi-channel encode to create the  
realistic surround sound.  
Via Point  
A location through which you reach your final  
destination. For this Navigation System, you  
can determine nine locations through which  
you can reach your final destination.  
On-screen guide  
While operating the built-in DVD/CD  
player, operation modes are displayed on the  
monitor. (☞ [102])  
UDF-Bridge Format  
A hybrid file system used to provide  
compatibility with ISO 9660 for accessing  
any type of files on the disc. (UDF stands for  
Universal Disk Format.)  
WMA  
Windows Media Audio. A compression  
process developed by Microsoft® for  
compressing audio data (i.e. music).  
116  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
L1, C/A code  
System & Service  
Global Positioning System  
Standard Positioning Service  
15-channel multi-channel reception system  
1 575.42 MHz  
Reception System  
Reception Frequency  
Sensitivity  
–130 dBm  
1/second, continuous  
Update Rate  
Polarization  
Right Handed Circular Polarization  
GPS Aerial  
Dimensions (approx.) 30.4 mm × 11.7 mm × 35.5 mm  
(W × H × D)  
Cable (approx.)  
5.0 m  
Attachment mat size  
(approx.)  
70 mm × 70 mm  
Front/Rear  
Front/Rear  
50 W per channel  
Maximum Power Output  
Continuous Power  
Output (RMS)  
20 W per channel into 4 Ω, 40 Hz to  
20 000 Hz at no more than 0.8% total  
harmonic distortion  
Load Impedance  
4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)  
Frequencies  
Level  
60 Hz, 150 Hz, 400 Hz, 1 kHz, 2.4 kHz,  
6 kHz, 12 kHz  
10 dB  
Equalizer Control Range  
70 dB  
Signal to Noise Ratio  
Audio output level  
Line-Out Level/  
Impedance  
2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)  
Output Impedance  
Signal wave length  
Output level  
1 kΩ  
660 nm  
–21 dBm to –15 dBm  
NTSC  
Digital (DIGITAL OUT:  
Optical)  
Colour system  
Video output (composite)  
Video input (composite)  
Other Terminals  
1 Vp-p/75 Ω  
1 Vp-p/75 Ω  
VIDEO IN, steering wheel remote input  
Input  
Output  
VIDEO OUT, LINE OUT (FRONT),  
LINE OUT (REAR), SUBWOOFER OUT  
Others  
CD changer  
Specifications 117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FM  
87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz  
Frequency Range  
FM Tuner  
AM  
(MW) 522 kHz to 1 620 kHz  
(LW) 144 kHz to 279 kHz  
Usable Sensitivity  
11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)  
16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)  
50 dB Quieting  
Sensitivity  
Alternate Channel  
Selectivity (400 kHz)  
65 dB  
Frequency Response  
Stereo Separation  
Capture Ratio  
Sensitivity  
40 Hz to 15 000 Hz  
40 dB  
1.5 dB  
20 μV  
MW Tuner  
Selectivity  
65 dB  
Sensitivity  
50 μV  
LW Tuner  
Non-contact optical pickup  
(semiconductor laser)  
Signal Detection System  
2 channels (stereo)  
16 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
Number of Channels  
Frequency Response  
DVD, fs=48 kHz/  
96 kHz  
DVD, fs=192 kHz  
VCD/CD  
16 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
16 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
96 dB  
Dynamic Range  
98 dB  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio  
Wow and Flutter  
Less than measurable limit  
Max. Resolution  
720 x 480 pixels (30 fps)  
720 x 576 pixels (25 fps)  
DivX  
Video  
Bit Rate  
32 Kbps – 320 Kbps  
Audio  
Sampling Frequency  
MPEG-1: 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz  
MPEG-2: 16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz  
Max. Resolution  
720 x 480 pixels (30 fps)  
720 x 576 pixels (25 fps)  
32 Kbps – 384 Kbps  
MPEG Video  
Video  
Audio  
Bit Rate  
Sampling Frequency  
MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3)  
WMA (Windows Media® Audio)  
32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz  
Max. Bit Rate: 320 Kbps  
Max. Bit Rate: 320 Kbps  
118  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
40 GB (Map data: 16 GB / Storage: 24 GB)  
HDD  
Max. Bit Rate: 320 kbps  
Max. Bit Rate: 320 kbps  
MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3)  
WMA (Windows Media® Audio)  
3.5 inch wide liquid crystal display  
Screen size  
224 640 pixels: 320 (horizontal) × 3 × 234 (vertical)  
TFT (Thin Film Transistor) active matrix format  
NTSC  
16:9 (wide)  
Number of Pixel  
Drive Method  
Colour System  
Aspect Ratio  
Operating Voltage  
DC 14.4 V (11 V to 16 V allowance)  
Negative ground  
Power Requirement  
Grounding System  
–10°C to +60°C  
0°C to +40°C  
–300 m to +3 000 m  
182 mm × 52 mm × 158 mm  
Allowable Storage Temperature  
Allowable Operating Temperature  
Allowable Operating Altitude  
Installation Size  
Dimensions (approx.)  
(W × H × D)  
Panel Size  
188 mm × 58 mm × 12 mm  
2.2 kg (excluding accessories)  
Mass (approx.)  
Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.  
• DivX, DivX Ultra Certified, and associated  
logos are trademarks of DivX, inc. and are  
used under license.  
• Microsoft and Windows Media are either  
registered trademarks or trademarks of  
Microsoft Corporation in the United States  
and/or other countries.  
• Official DivX® Ultra Certified product  
• “DVD Logo” is a trademark of DVD Format/  
Logo Licensing Corporation registered in the  
US, Japan and other countries.  
• Manufactured under license from Dolby  
Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol  
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.  
• Plays all versions of DivX® video (including  
DivX® 6) with enhanced playback of DivX®  
media files and the DivX® Media Format  
• “DTS” is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc.  
and “DTS 2.0 + Digital Out” is a trademark of  
DTS, Inc.  
Specifications 119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Having TROUBLE with operation?  
Please reset your unit  
Refer to page of How to reset your unit  
Haben Sie PROBLEME mit dem Betrieb?  
Bitte setzen Sie Ihr Gerät zurück  
Siehe Seite Zurücksetzen des Geräts  
Vous avez des PROBLÈMES de fonctionnement?  
Réinitialisez votre appareil  
Référez-vous à la page intitulée Comment réinitialiser votre appareil  
EN, GE, FR  
© 2007 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
0207NSMMDWJEIN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
KD-NX5000  
Installation/Connection Manual  
Einbau/Anschlußanleitung  
Manuel d’installation/raccordement  
0207NSMMDWJEIN  
EN, GE, FR  
©2007 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
LVT1628-004A  
[E]  
ENGLISH  
DEUTSCH  
FRANÇAIS  
This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical  
systems. If your vehicle does not have this system, a voltage inverter is  
required, which can be purchased at JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT  
dealers.  
Dieses Gerät ist für einen Betrieb in elektrischen Anlagen mit 12 V  
Gleichstrom und (–) Erdung ausgelegt. Verfügt Ihr Fahrzeug nicht  
über diese Anlage, ist ein Spannungsinverter erforderlich, der bei JVC  
Autoradiohändler erworben werden kann.  
Cet appareil est conçu pour fonctionner sur des sources de courant continu de  
12 V à masse NEGATIVE. Si votre véhicule n’offre pas ce type d’alimentation,  
il vous faut un convertisseur de tension, que vous pouvez acheter chez un  
revendeur d’autoradios JVC.  
WARNINGS  
• DO NOT install any unit in locations where:  
– it may obstruct the steering wheel and gearshift lever operations.  
– it may obstruct the operation of safety devices such as air bags.  
– it may obstruct visibility.  
• DO NOT operate the unit while driving. If you need to operate the unit  
while driving, be sure to look ahead carefully.  
• The driver must not watch the monitor while driving.  
• This unit has a built-in HDD, which is a device to read minute magnetic  
changes. The inside of the device is precision components, requiring you to  
notice the following when installing the unit:  
Install the unit at a place where the following conditions are satisfied:  
– Dry and neither too hot nor too cold—between 5°C and 35°C. If  
the temperature is too low, the HDD will not work. Wait until the  
temperature in the car becomes normal before operating the unit.  
– At an altitude between –300 m below sea level and +3000 m above sea  
level.  
WARNHINWEISE  
AVERTISSEMENTS  
• N’INSTALLEZ aucun appareil dans les endroits suivants où:  
– il peut gêner l’utilisation du volant ou du levier de vitesse.  
– il peut gêner le fonctionnement de dispositifs de sécurité tels que les coussins  
de sécurité.  
•
Wählen Sie für das Gerät KEINESFALLS einen Einbauort,wo folgendes gilt:  
– die Handhabung von Lenkrad und Schalthebel kann behindert werden.  
– die Funktion von Sicherheitseinrichtungen wie etwa Airbags kann  
behindert werden.  
– die Sicht kann behindert werden.  
– il peut gêner la visibilité.  
•
NICHT das Gerät beim Fahren bedienen. Wenn Sie das Gerät beim Fahren  
bedienen müssen,dürfen Sie nicht den Blick von der Straße nehmen.  
Der Fahrer darf während der Fahrt auf keinen Fall auf den Monitor sehen.  
Dieses Gerät hat ein eingebautes Festplattenlaufwerk, eine Vorrichtung die  
winzige magnetische Signale von Datenträgern liest. Im Inneren des Geräts  
befinden sich Präzisionsbauteile, auf die Sie beim Einbau des Geräts achten  
müssen:  
• NE manipulez pas l’appareil quand vous conduisez. Si vous devez commander  
l’appareil pendant que vous conduisez, assurez-vous de bien regarder devant  
vous.  
• Le conducteur ne doit pas regarder le moniteur lorsqu’il conduit.  
• Cet appareil contient un disque dur intégré, qui est dispositif permettant de  
lire les charges magnétiques minuscules. L’intérieur de l’appareil est composé  
de dispositifs de précision, vous demandant de prendre les précautions  
suivantes lors de l’installation de l’appareil:  
Installez l’appareil dans un endroit où les conditions suivantes sont satisfaites:  
– Sec et ni trop chaud ni trop froid—entre 5°C et 35°C.  
– À une altitude située entre –300 m au-dessous du niveau de la mer et  
+3 000 m au-dessus du niveau de la mer.  
– Avec une ventilation suffisante pour éviter tout échauffement interne de  
l’appareil.  
•
•
Das Gerät an einer Stelle einbauen,wo die folgenden Bedingungen erfüllt  
werden:  
– Trocken und nicht zu heiß oder kalt—zwischen 5 °C und 35 °C.  
– In einer Höhenlage zwischen –300 m unter dem Meeresspiegel und  
+3 000 m über dem Meeresspiegel.  
– With adequate ventilation to prevent internal heat buildup in the unit.  
– Mit angemessener Lüftung, um Hitzestau im Gerät zu vermeiden.  
Parts list for installation and connection  
Teileliste für den Einbau und Anschluß  
Liste des pièces pour l’installation et raccordement  
The following parts are provided for this unit. If anything is missing, contact Die folgenden Teile werden zusammen mit diesem Gerät geliefert. Falls etwas  
Les pièces suivantes sont fournies avec cet appareil. Si quelque chose manquait,  
contactez votre revendeur immédiatement.  
your dealer immediately.  
fehlt, wenden Sie sich sofort an Ihren Fachhändler.  
A / B  
C
Sleeve  
Halterung  
Manchon  
D
E
F
AV I/O cords  
AV I/O-Kabel  
Cordons entrée/sortie  
audio-vidéo  
G
Hard case/Control panel  
Etui/Schalttafel  
Trim plate  
Frontrahmen  
Plaque d’assemblage  
Power cord  
Stromkable  
Cordon d’alimentation  
Crimp connector  
Crimpanschluss  
Raccord à sertir  
Etui de transport/Panneau  
de commande  
H
J
Mounting bolt—  
M5 x 20 mm  
K
M
O
P/Q  
R
Washer (ø5)  
Unterlegscheibe (ø5)  
Rondelle (ø5)  
Rubber cushion  
Gummipuffer  
Amortisseur en  
caoutchouc  
Remote controller/Holder  
Fernbedienung/Halterung  
Télécommade/Support  
Batteries  
Batterien  
Piles  
GPS aerial/Attachment mat  
Measuring gauge  
Messschablone  
Gabarit de mesure  
GPS-Antenne/Anbringungsmatte  
Antenne GPS/Feuille de fixation  
Befestigungsschraube—  
M5 x 20 mm  
I
RM-RK250  
Boulon de montage—  
M5 x 20 mm  
R03(UM-4)/  
AAA(24F) x 2  
Lock nut (M5)  
Sicherungsmutter (M5)  
Ecrou d’arrêt (M5)  
L
Handles  
Griffe  
N
Double-sided adhesive tape  
Doppelseitiges Klebeband  
Ruban adhésif double face  
Poignées  
Required space for installation / Erforderlicher Platz für Einbau / Espace nécessaire  
pour l’installation  
Installing the remote controller/  
Installation der Fernbedienung/  
Installation de la télécommande  
Caution when installing / Vorsicht bei der  
Installation / Précautions lors de l’installation  
• You cannot install the unit on the  
car which has any obstacles in the  
diagonally shaded areas.  
3 mm  
6 mm  
Dashboard  
Fit the unit into the mounting sleeve  
by using four corners of the trim  
plate.  
• DO NOT press the panel (shaded  
in the illustration).  
Setzen Sie die Einheit in die  
Montagehalterung, indem Sie  
die vier Ecken des Frontrahmens  
verwenden.  
Armaturenbrett  
Tableau de bord  
Holder/Halterung/Support  
•
Sie können das Gerät nicht im Auto  
installieren, wenn die grau schraffierten  
Bereiche nicht frei sind.  
Trim plate is detached on this illustration  
for explanation.  
Die Deckplatte ist in dieser Zeichnung zur  
Erklärung angebracht.  
La plaque de garniture est montrée  
détachée sur cette illustration pour les  
besoins de l’explication.  
• Vous ne pouvez pas installer l’unité  
dans une voiture comportant des  
obstacles dans les zones ombrées sur  
l’illustration.  
•
Drücken Sie NICHT auf die Platte selber (in der Abbildung  
schraffiert).  
N
Control panel  
Schalttafel  
Remote controller  
Fernbedienung  
Télécommade  
Fixez l’appareil sur le manchon de montage en utilisant les  
quatre coins de la plaque de garniture.  
• NE POUSSEZ PAS sur le panneau (en gris sur l’illustration).  
Panneau de commande  
5 mm  
5 mm  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
• The fuse blows.  
FEHLERSUCHE  
• Die Sicherung brennt durch.  
EN CAS DE DIFFICULTES  
• Le fusible saute.  
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?  
* Les fils rouge et noir sont-ils racordés correctement?  
* Sind die roten und schwarzen Leitungen richtig angeschlossen?  
• Power cannot be turned on.  
* Is the yellow lead connected?  
• L’appareil ne peut pas être mise sous tension.  
* Le fil jaune est-elle raccordée?  
• Stromversorgung kann nicht eingeschaltet werden.  
* Ist die gelbe Leitung angeschlossen?  
• No sound from the speakers.  
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?  
• Pas de son des enceintes.  
* Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il court-circuité?  
• Kein Ton aus den Lautsprechern.  
* Ist die Lautsprecherausgangsleitung kurzgeschlossen?  
• Sound is distorted.  
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?  
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?  
• Le son est déformé.  
* Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il à la masse?  
* Les bornes “–” des enceintes gauche et droit sont-elles mises ensemble à la masse?  
• Ton verzerrt.  
* Ist die Lautsprecherausgangsleitung geerdet?  
* Sind die (–) Anschlußklemmen der linken und rechten Lautsprecher  
zusammen geerdet?  
• Noise interfere with sounds.  
• Interférence avec les sons.  
• Störgeräusche im Klang.  
* Ist die hintere Erdungsklemme mit kürzeren und dickeren Kabeln an das  
Fahrzeugchassis angeschlossen?  
• Wenn eine AV-Quelle ausgewählt wurde, wird während der  
Wiedergabe kein Bild angezeigt.  
* Ist die Leitung zur Feststellbremse sachgemäß angeschlossen?  
• Gerät wird heiß.  
* Ist die Lautsprecherausgangsleitung geerdet?  
* Sind die (–) Anschlußklemmen der linken und rechten Lautsprecher  
zusammen geerdet?  
• Diese Einheit funktioniert überhaupt nicht.  
* Haben Sie Ihre Einheit zurückgesetzt?  
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and  
thicker cords?  
* La prise arrière de mise à la terre est-elle connectée au châssis de la voiture  
avec un cordon court et épais?  
• No playback picture appears while an AV source is selected.  
* Is the parking brake lead properly connceted?  
• Aucune image de lecture n’apparaît lors de la sélection d’une  
source audio-vidéo.  
* Le fil de sortie du frein de stationnement est-il connecté correctement?  
• Unit becomes hot.  
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?  
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?  
• L’appareil devient chaud.  
* Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il à la masse?  
* Les bornes “–” des enceintes gauche et droit sont-elles mises ensemble à la masse?  
• This unit does not work at all.  
* Have you reset your unit?  
• Cet appareil ne fonctionne pas du tout.  
* Avez-vous réinitialisé votre appareil?  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
INSTALLATION (IN-DASH MOUNTING)  
EINBAU (IM ARMATURENBRETT)  
INSTALLATION (MONTAGE DANS LE TABLEAU  
DE BORD)  
The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any  
questions or require information regarding installation kits, consult your JVC  
IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer or a company supplying kits.  
• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a  
qualified technician.  
Die folgende Abbildung zeigt einen typischen Einbau. Bei irgendwelchen  
Fragen oder wenn Sie Informationen hinsichtlich des Einbausatzes brauchen,  
wenden Sie sich an ihren JVC Autoradiohändler oder ein Unternehmen das  
diese Einbausätze vertreibt.  
L’illustration suivante est un exemple d’installation typique. Si vous avez des  
questions ou avez besoin d’information sur des kits d’installation, consulter votre  
revendeur d’autoradios JVC ou une compagnie d’approvisionnement.  
• Si l’on n’est pas sûr de pouvoir installer correctement cet appareil, le faire  
installer par un technicien qualifié.  
•
Sind Sie sich über den richtigen Einbau des Geräts nicht sicher, lassen Sie es  
von einem qualifizierten Techniker einbauen.  
• Make sure not to block the fan on the rear panel to maintain proper  
ventilation when installed.  
•
Sicherstellen, dass nicht das Gebläse an der Rückseite verdeckt wird, um  
richtige Ventilation beim Einbau zu gewährleisten.  
• Lors de l’installation assurez-vous de ne pas bloquer le ventilateur à l’arrière  
afin de permettre une ventilation correcte.  
Do the required electrical connections.  
Nehmen Sie die erforderlichen elektrischen  
Anschlüsse vor.  
Réalisez les connexions électriques.  
Do not block the fan.  
Nicht das Gebläse blockieren.  
Ne bloquez pas le ventilateur.  
Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the sleeve firmly  
in place.  
Die geeigneten Zapfen biegen, um die  
Manschette sicher festzuhalten.  
Tordez les languettes appropriées pour maintenir le  
manchon en place.  
*1  
When you stand the unit, be careful not to damage the fuse on the rear.  
Beim Aufstellen des Geräts darauf achten, daß die Sicherung auf der Rückseite  
nicht beschädigt wird.  
*1  
*1  
Lorsque vous mettez l’appareil à la verticale, faire attention de ne pas endommager  
le fusible situé sur l’arrière.  
When installing the unit without using the sleeve / Beim Einbau des Geräts ohne Halterung / Lors de  
l’installation de l’appareil sans utiliser de manchon  
When using the optional stay / Beim Verwenden der Anker-  
Option / Lors de l’utilisation du hauban en option  
In a car having the “Required space for installation” (see page 1), first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.  
Fire wall  
In einem Fahrzeug wo der “Erforderlicher Platz für Einbau” (siehe Seite 1) vorhanden ist, bauen Sie zunächst das Autoradio aus und bauen an seiner  
Feuerwand  
Stelle die Einheit ein.  
Cloison  
Stay (option)  
Anker (Option)  
Dans une voiture possédant l’“Espace nécessaire pour l’installation” (voir page 1), retirez d’abord l’autoradio d’origine et installer cet appareil à sa  
place.  
Hauban (en option)  
*2  
Not included for this unit.  
Für diesen Receiver nicht mitgeliefert.  
Flat type screws—M5 x 8 mm*2  
Senkkopfschrauben—M5 x 8 mm*2  
Vis à tête plate—M5 x 8 mm*2  
*2  
*2  
Non fourni avec cet appareil.  
Dashboard  
Armaturenbrett  
Tableau de bord  
Bracket *2  
Konsole *2  
Support *2  
Flat type screws—M5 x 8 mm*2  
Senkkopfschrauben—M5 x 8 mm*2  
Vis à tête plate—M5 x 8 mm*2  
Screw (option)  
Schraube (Option)  
Vis (en option)  
Bracket *2  
Konsole *2  
Support *2  
Note  
:
:
:
When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm-long screws. If longer screws are used, they  
could damage the unit.  
Beim Anbringen des Gerät an der Konsole sicherstellen, daß 8 mm lange Schrauben verwendet werden. Werden längere  
Schrauben verwendet, können sie das Gerät beschädigen.  
Lors de l’installation de l’appareil sur le support de montage, s’assurer d’utiliser des vis d’une longueur de 8 mm. Si des vis plus  
longues sont utilisées, elles peuvent endommager l’appareil.  
Hinweis  
Remarque  
Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚ vertically and of less than 5˚ horizontally.  
Assembling the measuring gauge / Montage der Messschablone / Assemblage du  
gabarit de mesure  
• After installation, confirm the vertical angle of the unit using the supplied measuring gauge.  
Bauen Sie das Gerät ein einem Winkel von weniger als 30° senkrecht und weniger als 5° waagerecht ein.  
•
Nach dem Einbau bestätigen Sie den senkrechten Winkel des Geräts mit der mitgelieferten Messschablone.  
1
2
Installez l’appareil avec un angle vertical de moins de 30˚ et un angle horizontal de moins de 5˚.  
• Après l’installation, vérifiez l’angle vertical de l’appareil en utilisant le gabarit de mesure fourni.  
32  
˚
2
8˚  
2
3˚  
1
7˚  
-5  
˚
32  
˚
28˚  
23˚  
1
7˚  
30˚  
-5˚  
• Keep the gauge handy for the future use.  
Bewahren Sie die Schablone zur zukünftigen Verwendung auf.  
5˚  
•
• Conservez le gabarit à portée de main pour une utilisation future.  
Measuring the installation angle  
Messung des Einbauwinkels  
Mesure de l’angle d’installation  
1
BEFORE starting, make sure...  
• You have parked the car where it cannot be inclined. (It  
should be parked horizontally.)  
BEVOR Sie beginnen, stellen Sie sicher...  
AVANT de commencer, assurez-vous que...  
• Vous avez garé votre voiture dans un endroit où elle n’est  
pas inclinée. (Elle doit être garée horizontalement).  
•
Das Fahrzeug an ebener Stelle geparkt. (Es muss in  
waagerechter Position geparkt sein).  
1 Detach the control panel.  
2 Measure the angle.  
1 Nehmen Sie das Bedienfeld ab.  
2 Messen Sie den Winkel.  
1 Détachez le panneau de commande.  
2 Mesurez l’angle.  
• Attach the measuring gauge closely and flatly to the  
•
Die Messanzeige nahe und flach am Hauptgerät  
anschließen (am in der Abbildung links grau  
schraffierten Bereich).  
• Attachez le gabarit de mesure étroitement et à plat sur  
l’unité principale (partie ombrée sur l’illustration de  
gauche).  
2
main unit (to the portion shaded in the illustration on  
the left).  
3 Note your measured angle.  
1: –5.0 to 1.0˚  
3 Notieren Sie den Messwinkel.  
1: –5,0 bis 1,0˚  
3 Notez l’angle mesuré.  
1: –5,0 à 1,0˚  
:
:
:
:
1
2
3
4
2: 1.0 to 6.0˚  
2: 1,0 bis 6,0˚  
2: 1,0 à 6,0˚  
3: 6.0 to 14.0˚  
3: 6,0 bis 14,0˚  
4: 14,0 bis 32,0˚*  
3: 6,0 à 14,0˚  
4: 14.0 to 32.0˚*  
4: 14,0 à 32,0˚*  
*
*
*
It is not recommended to install the main unit at an  
Es wird davon abgeraten, das Gerät in einem Winkel  
von mehr als 30° einzubauen; andernfalls können  
Fehlfunktionen auftreten.  
Il n’est pas recommandé d’installer l’apareil avec un  
angle de plus de 30˚; sinon, cela peut entraîner un  
mauvais fonctionnement.  
angle of more than 30˚; otherwise, the malfunction  
may result.  
When you use the Navigation System for the first time after  
installation...  
Follow the procedure described on page 8 and 9 of the  
INSTRUCTIONS (separate volume).  
Bei der ersten Verwendung des Navigationssystems nach  
dem Einbau...  
Befolgen Sie das Verfahren wie auf Seite 8 und 9 der  
BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG (getrennter Band) beschrieben.  
Quand vous utilisez l’autoradio pour la première fois après  
l’installation...  
Suivez la procédure décrite aux pages 8 et 9 du MANUEL  
D’INSTRUCTIONS (volume séparé).  
Measure this angle.  
Messen Sie diesen Winkel.  
Mesurez cet angle.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2
Removing the unit  
Ausbau des Geräts  
Retrait de l’appareil  
Before removing the unit, release the rear section.  
Vor dem Ausbau des Geräts den hinteren Teil freigeben.  
Avant de retirer l’appareil, libérer la section arrière.  
Insert the two handles, then pull them as illustrated  
so that the unit can be removed.  
Die beiden Handgriffe einsetzen und dann ziehen  
wie in der Abbildung gezeigt, so daß das Gerät  
entfernt werden kann.  
Insérez les deux poignées, puis tirez de la façon  
illustrée de façon à retirer l’appareil.  
Installing the GPS aerial  
• People who use pacemakers should avoid a physical contact with  
the magnetic aerial and should not handle it themselves. This causes  
malfunctions of the pacemakers.  
• Keep the magnetic aerial away from the storage media such as disks, credit  
cards; otherwise, its data will be collapsed.  
• The aerial should be attached so firmly that it cannot be detached in the  
event of a collision or sudden braking.  
Installieren der GPS-Antenne  
Installation de l’antenne GPS  
• Les personnes utilisant un stimulateur cardiaque doivent éviter tout contact  
physique avec l’antenne magnétique et ne doivent pas la manipuler elles-  
même. Cela pourrait entraîner un dysfonctionnement du stimulateur  
cardiaque.  
• Tenez l’antenne magnétique à distance des supports de mémoire tels que les  
disques, les cartes de crédit; sinon, les données pourraient être corrompues.  
• L’antenne doit être fixée suffisamment solidement pour qu’elle ne puisse pas se  
détacher en cas de choc ou de coup de frein brutal.  
•
•
•
Personen mit Herzschrittmachern müssen physischen Kontakt mit der  
Magnetantenne vermeiden und sollten diese nicht selber handhaben.  
Dadurch können Fehlfunktionen bei Herzschrittmachern verursacht werden.  
Halten sie die Magnetantenne von Speichermedien wie Disketten oder  
Kreditkarten fern; andernfalls können darauf befindliche Daten zerstört  
werden.  
Die Antenn muss fest angebacht werden, damit sie sich bei plötzlichem  
Bremsen nicht lösen kann.  
Å Inside the car  
Å Im Fahrzeug  
Å À l’intérieur de la voiture  
Beneath a non-metallised* window, fix the  
attachment mat (Q) on the dashboard, then place  
the aerial (P) on the mat.  
Unter einem nicht-metallisierten* Fenster  
bringen Sie die Anbringungsmatte (Q) auf dem  
Armaturenbrett an und setzen dann die Antenne  
(P) auf die Matte.  
Derrière une fenêtre non métallisée*, fixez la feuille  
de fixation (Q) sur le tableau de bord, puis placez  
l’antenne (P) sur la feuille.  
P
• Make sure that the aerial is not covered by any  
components and parts of the car and it can  
receive the signals from all directions.  
• Assurez-vous que l’antenne n’est recouverte  
par aucun composant ou aucune partie de la  
voiture et peut recevoir les signaux de toutes les  
directions.  
•
Stellen Sie sicher, dass die Antenne nicht von  
Komponenten oder Fahrzeugteilen verdeckt ist  
und Signale aus allen Richtungen empfangen kann.  
*
The windows with screen aerial, windscreen  
*
*
heating or thermally insulated screens will  
interfere with GPS reception, and will degrade  
the reliability of the Navigation System.  
Fenster mit Scheibenantennen,  
Les vitres avec une antenne incrustée,  
Scheibenheizdrähten oder thermisch  
isolierte Scheiben können den GPS-  
Empfang stören und die Zuverlässigkeit des  
Navigationssystems beeinträchtigen.  
les chauffages de pare-brise ou les écrans  
d’isolation thermique interfèrent avec la  
réception GPS et réduisent la fiabilité du  
système de navigation.  
Q
ı Outside the car  
ı Außerhalb des Fahrzeugs  
ı À l’extérieur de la voiture  
Fix the aerial (P) to a pre-washed, flat, metallic  
surface.  
Befestigen Sie die Antenne (P) an einer  
gesäuberten, flachen metallische Oberfläche.  
Fixez l’antenne (P) sur une surface métallique  
plate.  
P
• Wire the aerial cord so as not to allow the rain  
to leak in.  
•
Verdrahten Sie das Antennenkabel so, dass kein  
Regenwasser eindringen kann.  
• Câblez le cordon d’antenne de façon à empêcher  
la pluie de pénétrer à l’intérieur.  
• The aerial magnetically attached will be used  
even at a speed of 180 km/h (maximum). The  
aerial must be specially secured for higher  
speeds.  
• Detach the aerial before you wash the car with  
the car-wash facilities.  
•
Die magnetisch angebrachte Antenne kann  
auch auch bei einer Geschwindigkeit von  
180 km/h verwendet werden (Maximum). Für  
höhere Geschwindigkeiten muss die Antenne  
speziell gesichert werden.  
• Une fois fixée, l’antenne magnétique ne se  
détachera pas même à une vitesse de  
180 km/h (maximum). L’antenne doit être fixée  
spécialement pour les vitesses plus élevées.  
• Détachez l’antenne avant de laver votre voiture  
dans un poste de lavage.  
•
Nehmen Sie die Antenne vor dem Waschen des  
Fahrzeugs in einer Wagenwäsche ab.  
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS  
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery’s  
negative terminal and make all electrical connections before installing the unit. Batterieanschluß abtrennen und alle elektrischen Anschlüsse herstellen, bevor  
• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after  
installation.  
ELEKTRISCHE ANSCHLÜSSE  
Zur Vermeidung von Kurzschlüssen empfehlen wir, daß Sie den negativen  
RACCORDEMENTS ELECTRIQUES  
Pour éviter tout court-circuit, nous vous recommandons de débrancher la borne  
négative de la batterie et d’effectuer tous les raccordements électriques avant  
d’installer l’appareil.  
das Gerät eingebaut wird.  
• Sicherstellen, daß das Gerät nach dem Einbau a Chassis des  
Fahrzeugs geerdet wird.  
• Assurez-vous de raccorder de nouveau la mise à la masse de cet  
appareil au châssis de la voiture après l’installation.  
Notes:  
Hinweise:  
Remarques:  
• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently,  
consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer.  
• It is recommended to connect to the speakers with maximum power of more  
than 50 W (both at the rear and at the front, with an impedance of 4 Ω to  
8 Ω). If the maximum power is less than 50 W, change “Amplifier Gain”  
setting to prevent the speakers from being damaged (see page 96 of the  
INSTRUCTIONS).  
• To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads with  
insulating tape.  
• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it when  
removing this unit.  
•
Die Sicherung mit einer der entsprechenden Nennleistung ersetzen. Brennt  
die Sicherung häufig durch, wenden Sie sich an ihren JVC Autoradiohändler.  
Es wird empfohlen, Lautsprecher mit einer Maximalleistung von mehr als  
50 W anzuschließen (sowohl hinten als auch vorne, mit einer Impedanz von  
4 Ω bis 8 Ω). Wenn die Maximalleistung weniger als 50 W beträgt, stellen  
Sie „Verstärkungsgrad“ anders ein, um Schäden an den Lautsprechern zu  
vermeiden (siehe Seite 96 der BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG).  
• Remplacer le fusible par un de la valeur précisée. Si le fusible saute souvent,  
consulter votre revendeur d’autoradios JVC.  
• Il est recommandé de connecter des enceintes avec une puissance de plus de  
50 W (les enceintes arrière et les enceintes avant, avec une impédance  
comprise entre 4 Ω et 8 Ω). Si la puissance maximum est inférieure à 50 W,  
changez “Gain amplific.” pour éviter d’endommager vos enceintes (voir page  
96 du MANUAL D’INSTRUCTIONS).  
• Pour éviter les court-circuits, couvrir les bornes des fils qui ne sont PAS  
UTILISÉS avec de la bande isolante.  
• Le dissipateur de chaleur devient très chaud après usage. Faire attention de ne  
pas le toucher en retirant cet appareil.  
•
•
•
Zur Vermeidung eines Kurzschlusses die Anschlußklemmen der NICHT  
VERWENDETEN Leitungen mit Isolierklebeband umwickeln.  
Das Abstrahlblech wird nach dem Gebrauch sehr heiß. Beim Ausbau des  
Geräts darauf achten, das Abstrahlblech nicht zu berühren.  
Heat sink  
Abstrahlblech  
Dissipateur de chaleur  
PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker  
connections:  
VORSICHTSMASSREGELN beim Anschließen der  
Stromversorgung und Lautsprecher:  
PRECAUTIONS sur l’alimentation et la connexion des  
enceintes:  
• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the car  
battery; otherwise, the unit will be seriously damaged.  
• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the speakers,  
check the speaker wiring in your car.  
• Die Lautsprecherleitungen des Netzkabels NICHT an der  
Autobatterie anschließen, da sonst das Gerät schwer beschädigt  
wird.  
• NE CONNECTEZ PAS les fils d’enceintes du cordon d’alimentation à  
la batterie; sinon, l’appareil serait sérieusement endommagé.  
• AVANT de connecter les fils d’enceintes du cordon d’alimentation aux  
enceintes, vérifiez le câblage des enceintes de votre voiture.  
•
VOR dem Anschließen der Lautsprecherleitungen des Spannunsgversorgu  
ngskabels an die Lautsprecher, die Lautsprecherverdrahtung in Ihrem Auto  
überprüfen.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
ENGLISH  
DEUTSCH  
FRANÇAIS  
If your car is equipped with the ISO connector / Wenn Ihr Fahrzeug mit dem ISO-Steckverbinder  
ausgestattet ist / Si votre voiture est équippée d’un connecteur ISO  
For some VW/Audi or Opel (Vauxhall) automobile / Bei bestimmten VW-/Audi- order Opel- (Vauxhall-) Fahrzeugen /  
Pour certaine voiture VW/Audi ou Opel (Vauxhall)  
A
• Connect the ISO connectors as illustrated.  
Schließen Sie die ISO-Steckverbinder an, wie in der Abbildung gezeigt.  
• Connectez les connecteurs ISO comme montré sur l’illustration.  
You may need to modify the wiring of  
the supplied power cord as illustrated.  
• Contact your authorized car dealer  
before installing this unit.  
Vous aurrez peut-être besoin de modifier  
le câblage du cordon d’alimentation  
fourni comme montré sur l’illustration.  
• Contactez votre revendeur automobile  
autorisé avant d’installer ce appareil.  
Es kann erforderlich sein, die  
Verdrahtung des mitgelieferten  
Stromkabels zu modifizieren, wie in der  
Abbildung gezeigt.  
•
•
Wenden Sie sich vor dem Einbau  
dieser Einheit an Ihre Auto-  
Fachwerkstatt.  
REVERSE GEAR SIGNAL  
Purple with white stripe/Lila mit weißem Streifen/Violet  
avec bande blanche  
Original wiring / Originalverdrahtung / Câblage original  
Modified wiring 1 / Modifizierte Verdrahtung 1 / Câblage  
modifié 1  
SPEED SIGNAL  
Pink/Rosa/Rose  
KD-NX5000  
*
Choking coil  
Drosselspule  
Bobine d’arrêt  
Y:Yellow  
Gelb  
Jaune  
R:Red  
Rot  
Rouge  
ISO connector  
ISO-Steckverbinder  
Connecteur ISO  
View from the lead side  
Von der Kabelseite aus gesehen  
Vue à partir du côté des fils  
Use modified wiring 2 if the unit does not turn on.  
Verwenden Sie die modifizierte Verdrahtung 2, wenn die  
Einheit nicht einschaltet.  
Modified wiring 2 / Modifizierte Verdrahtung 2 / Câblage  
modifié 2  
Utilisez le montage modifié 2 si l’appareil ne se met pas sous  
tension.  
ISO connector of the supplied power cord  
ISO-Stecker des mitgelieferten Stromkabels  
Connecteur ISO pour le cordon d’alimentation fourni  
From the car body  
Von der Fahrzeugkarosserie  
De la carrosserie de la voiture  
Connections without using the ISO connectors / Anschlüsse ohne Verwendung der ISO-Steckverbinder / Connexions sans l’utilisation des connecteurs ISO  
B
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect  
Vor dem Anschließen: Die Verdrahtung im Fahrzeug sorgfältig überprüfen.  
Falsche Anschlüsse können ernsthafte Schäden am Gerät hervorrufen.  
Die Leiter des Stromkabels und die Leiter des Anschlusses im Fahrzeug können Le fil du cordon d’alimentation et ceux des connecteurs du châssis de la  
sich farblich unterscheiden.  
Avant de commencer la connexion: Vérifiez attentivement le câblage du  
connection may cause serious damage to this unit.  
The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body  
may be different in color.  
véhicule. Une connexion incorrecte peut endommager sérieusement l’appareil.  
voiture peuvent être différents en couleur.  
1 Cut the ISO connector.  
1 Schneiden Sie den ISO-Steckverbinder auf.  
1 Coupez le connecteur ISO.  
2 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order  
2 Die farbigen Adern des Stromkabels in der Reihenfolge  
2 Connectez les fils colorés du cordon d’alimentation dans l’ordre  
specified in the illustration below.  
anschließen, wie in der Abbildung unten gezeigt.  
spécifié sur l’illustration ci-dessous.  
3 Connect the aerial cord and the GPS aerial.  
4 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.  
3 Schließen Sie Antennenkabel und GPS-Antenne an.  
4 Die Kabelbäume am Gerät anschließen.  
3 Connectez le cordon d’antenne et l’antenne GPS.  
4 Finalement, connectez le faisceau de fils à l’appareil.  
GPS aerial  
GPS-Antenne  
Antenne GPS  
REVERSE GEAR SIGNAL (see diagram / siehe Schaltplan / voir le diagramme  
SPEED SIGNAL (see diagram / siehe Schaltplan / voir le diagramme  
)
)
Radio aerial  
VIDEO OUT (see diagram / siehe Schaltplan / voir le diagramme  
VIDEO IN (see diagram / siehe Schaltplan / voir le diagramme  
OE REMOTE  
)
Radioantenne  
Antenne radio  
)
DIGITAL OUT (see diagram  
/ siehe Schaltplan / voir le  
diagramme  
)
Steering wheel remote input/Lenkrad-Fernbedienungseingang/Entrée de  
la télécommande de volant (see diagram / siehe Schaltplan / voir le  
diagramme  
)
Rear ground terminal  
Hintere Erdungscan-  
schlußklemme  
15 A fuse  
15 A Sicherung  
Fusible 15 A  
Borne arrière de masse  
*1  
*1  
*1  
Not included for this unit  
Nicht für diese Einheit mitgeliefert  
To an external component (see diagram and  
)
N’est pas fourni avec cet appareil  
Zu einer externen Komponente (siehe Schaltplan  
Black  
Schwarz  
Noir  
Ignition switch  
Zündschalter  
und  
Pour connecter un appareil extérieur (voir le  
diagramme et  
)
To metallic body or chassis of the car  
)
Interrupteur d’allumage  
Zur metallenen Karosserie oder zum Fahrwerk des Autos  
Vers corps métallique ou châssis de la voiture  
Yellow *2  
Gelb *2  
To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery (bypassing  
the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)  
Jaune *2  
Zur einer stromführenden Anschlußklemme im Sicherungsblock zum  
Anschließen an die Autobatterie (Umgehen des Zündschalters) (konstant 12 V)  
A une borne sous tension du porte-fusible connectée à la batterie de la voiture  
(en dérivant l’interrupteur d’allumage) (12 V constant)  
LINE OUT (FRONT) (see diagram  
/
Red  
siehe Schaltplan / voir le diagramme  
Rot  
)
Fuse block  
Sicherungsblock  
Porte-fusible  
Rouge  
To an accessory terminal in the fuse block  
Zur einer Zubehöranschlußklemme im Sicherungsblock  
Vers borne accessoire du porte-fusible  
LINE OUT (REAR) (see diagram  
/
siehe Schaltplan / voir le diagramme  
Blue with white stripe  
)
Blau mit weißem Streifen  
Bleu avec bande blanche  
To the remote lead of other equipment or power aerial if any (200 mA max.)  
SUBWOOFER OUT (see diagram  
Zum Zusatzkabel des anderen Geräts oder der Motorantenne, sofern vorhanden (max. 200 mA)  
Au fil de télécommande de l’autre appareil ou à l’antenne automatique s’il y en a une (200 mA max.)  
/ siehe Schaltplan / voir le  
diagramme  
)
Orange with white stripe  
Orange mit weißem Streifen  
Orange avec bande blanche  
To car light control switch  
Zum Autobeleuchtungssteuerung-Schalter  
À l’interrupteur d’éclairage de la voiture  
*2  
Before checking the operation of this unit prior to  
installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise power  
cannot be turned on.  
Brown  
Braun  
Marrone  
To cellular phone system  
An Mobiltelefonsystem  
Al cellulare  
*2  
*2  
Vor der Überprüfung der Funktionsfähigkeit des Geräts vor  
dem Einbau, muß diese Leitung angeschlossen werden,  
da sonst die Stromversorgung nicht eingeschaltet werden  
kann.  
Light green  
Hellgrün  
Vert clair  
To parking brake (see diagram  
An Feststellbremse (siehe Schaltplan  
Au frein de stationnement (voir le diagramme  
)
Pour vérifier le fonctionnement de cet appareil avant  
installation, ce fil doit être raccordé, sinon l’appareil ne peut  
pas être mis sous tension.  
)
)
Gray with black stripe  
Grau mit schwarzem  
Streifen  
Purple  
Lila  
Violet  
White with black stripe  
White  
Weiß  
Blanc  
Gray  
Grau  
Gris  
Green with black stripe  
Green  
Grün  
Vert  
Purple with black stripe  
Lila mit schwarzem  
Streifen  
Grau mit schwarzem  
Streifen  
Grün mit schwarzem  
Streifen  
Gris avec bande noire  
Blanc avec bande noire  
Vert avec bande noire  
Violet avec bande noire  
Left speaker (rear)  
Right speaker (rear)  
Rechter Lautsprecher (hinten)  
Enceinte droit (arrière)  
Left speaker (front)  
Linker Lautsprecher (vorne)  
Enceinte gauche (avant)  
Right speaker (front)  
Rechter Lautsprecher (vorne)  
Enceinte droit (avant)  
Linker Lautsprecher (hinten)  
Enceinte gauche (arrière)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
Connecting the parking brake lead / Anschluss des Handbremsenkabels / Connexion du cordon de frein de stationnement  
C
Parking brake switch (inside the car)  
Connect the parking brake lead  
to the parking brake system built  
in the car.  
Handbremsenschalter (Fahrzeuginneres)  
Commutateur de frein de stationnement (intérieur de la voiture)  
Parking brake lead of the power cord (light green)  
Feststellbrems-Leitung des Stromkabels (hellgrün)  
Fil du frein de stationnement du cordon  
d’alimentation (vert clair)  
Anschluss des  
Handbremsenkabels an das  
im Fahrzeug eingebaute  
Handbremsensystem.  
Connectez le fil de frein de  
stationnement au système de  
frein de stationnement.  
*3  
Parking brake  
Handbremse  
To metallic body or chassis of the car  
Zur metallenen Karosserie oder zum Fahrwerk des  
Autos  
Frein de stationnement  
Vers corps métallique ou châssis de la voiture  
Connecting the reverse gear signal lead / Anschließen der Rückwärtsgangsignalleitung / Connexion du fil de signal de marche arrière  
D
Locate the reverse lamp lead in  
the trunk.  
Extension lead (not supplied)  
Verlängerungskabel (nicht mitgeliefert)  
Cordon rallonge (non fourni)  
Reverse lamp lead  
Rückfahrleuchtenleitung  
Fil des feux de recul  
Suchen Sie die  
KD-NX5000  
REVERSE GEAR SIGNAL  
Crimp connector (not supplied)  
Crimpanschluss (nicht mitgeliefert)  
Raccord à sertir (non fourni)  
Rückfahrleuchtenleitung im  
Kofferraum.  
Localisez le fil des feux de recul  
dans le coffre.  
*3  
Purple with white stripe  
Lila mit weißem Streifen  
Violet avec bande blanche  
To reverse lamp  
An Rückfahrleuchte  
Aux feux de recul  
To car battery  
Reverse lamps  
Rückfahrleuchte  
Feux de recul  
An Autobatterie  
À la batterie de la voiture  
Reverse lamp lead  
Rückfahrleuchtenleitung  
Fil des feux de recul  
Connecting the speed signal lead / Anschließen der  
Geschwindigkeitssignalleitung / Connexion du fil de signal de vitesse  
E
*3 Connecting the crimp connector / Anschließen des Crimpanschlusses / Connexion de la cosse sertie  
• Purchase the same type of crimp connector as the one supplied with this unit.  
•
Den gleichen Crimpanschluss-Typ verwenden wie der mit diesem Gerät gelieferte Crimpanschluss.  
• This connection is necessary to use the Navigation System.  
Diesre Anschluss ist zur Verwendung des Navigationssystems erforderlich.  
• Achetez une cosse à sertir de même type que celle fournie avec cette unité.  
•
• Cette connexion est nécessaire pour pouvoir utiliser le système de navigation.  
Crimp connector (not supplied)  
Crimpanschluss (nicht mitgeliefert)  
Raccord à sertir (non fourni)  
KD-NX5000  
Pink  
Rosa  
Rose  
*3  
Signal lead from the speedometer  
Contact the metallic part of the crimp to the wires inside.  
Pinch the crimp firmly.  
Extension lead (not supplied)  
Verlängerungskabel (nicht mitgeliefert)  
Cordon rallonge (non fourni)  
Signalleitung vom Geschwindigkeitsmesser  
Kontaktieren des Metallteils des Quetschverbinders mit den Kabeln im Inneren. Drücken Sie den  
Fil de signal de l’indicateur de vitesse  
Mettez en contact la partie métallique de la cosse à sertir et des fils intérieurs.  
Quetschverbinder fest zusammen.  
Pincez la cosse à sertir fermement.  
Connecting to the steering wheel remote controller / Anschluß an die Lenkradfernbedienung / Connexion de la télécommande de volant  
F
If your car is equipped with the steering wheel remote controller, you can operate this receiver using the  
controller. To do it, a JVC’s OE remote adapter (not supplied) which matches with your car is required. Consult  
your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer for details.  
Wenn Ihr Fahrzeug mit einer Lenkradferndienung ausgestattet ist, können Sie damit diesen Receiver steuern.  
Hierfür ist ein für Ihr Fahrzeug passender Radio-Lenkrad-Fernbedienungsadaption von JVC (nicht im Lieferumfang  
enthalten) erforderlich. Für weitere Einzelheiten wenden Sie sich an Ihren JVC Autoradiohändler.  
Si votre voiture est munie d’une télécommande de volant, vous pouvez commander cet autoradio en utilisant la  
télécommande. Pour le faire, un adaptateur pour télécommande au volant JVC (non fourni) correspondant à votre  
voiture est nécessaire. Consultez votre revendeur d’autoradio JVC pour les détails.  
OE remote adapter (not supplied)  
OE REMOTE  
Steering wheel remote input  
Lenkrad-Fernbedienungseingang  
Entrée de la télécommande de volant  
Radio-Lenkrad-Fernbedienungsadaption (nicht im Lieferumfang  
enthalten)  
Adaptateur pour télécommande au volant (non fourni)  
KD-NX5000  
Steering wheel remote controller (equipped in the car)  
Lenkradfernbedienung (im Fahrzeug installiert)  
Télécommande de volant (installée dans la voiture)  
Connecting the external amplifiers / Anschließen der externen Verstärker / Connexion d’amplificateurs extérieurs  
G
You can connect amplifiers to upgrade your car stereo system.  
• Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote lead of the  
other equipment so that it can be controlled through this unit.  
• Disconnect the speakers from this unit, and connect them to the  
amplifier. Leave the speaker leads of this unit unused.  
• You can switch off the built-in amplifier and send the audio signals only  
to the external amplifier(s) to get clear sounds and to prevent internal heat  
built-up inside the unit. See page 96 of the INSTRUCTIONS (separate  
volume).  
Vous pouvez connecter des amplificateurs pour améliorer votre système  
autoradio.  
• Connectez le fil de commande à distance (bleu avec bande blanche) au  
fil de commande à distance de l’autre appareil de façon qu’il puisse être  
commandé via cet appareil.  
• Déconnectez les enceintes de cet appareil et connectez-les à  
l’amplificateur. Laissez les fils d’enceintes de cet appareil inutilisés.  
Vous pouvez mettre hors service l’amplificateur intégré et envoyer les signaux  
audio uniquement vers un ou plusieurs amplificateurs extérieurs pour  
obtenir un son plus clair et éviter un échauffement interne de l’appareil.  
Référez-vous à la page 96 du MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS (volume séparé).  
Sie können einen Verstärker anschließen, um Ihre Autostereoanlage zu erweitern.  
•
•
•
Schließen Sie das Fernbedienungskabel (blau mit weißem Streifen) an das  
Fernbedienungskabel des anderen Geräts an, so daß es über dieses Gerät  
gesteuert werden kann.  
Die Lautsprecher von diesem Gerät abtrennen und am Verstärker  
anschließen. Die Lautsprecherleitungen dieses Geräts unbenutzt  
lassen.  
Sie können den eingebauten Verstärker abschalten und die Audiosignale  
nur zu dem(n) externen Verstärker(n) ausgeben, um scharfen Ton zu  
erhalten und Hitzestau in der Einheit zu vermeiden. Siehe Seite 96 der  
BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG (separate Druckschrift).  
•
• Guidance voice comes out only through the front speakers (and the front  
line out on the rear).  
• Le guidage vocal sort uniquement des enceintes avant (et la sortie de ligne  
avant sort à l’arrière).  
•
Führungsstimme kommt nur von den vorderen Lautsprechern (und dem  
vorderen Line-Ausgang hinten).  
Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)  
Y-Anschluß (für dieses Gerät nicht mitgeliefert)  
Connecteur Y (non fourni avec cet appareil)  
Remote lead (Blue with white stripe)  
Fernbedienungsleitung (Blau mit weißem  
Streifen)  
Fil d’alimentation à distance (Bleu avec  
bande blanche)  
Remote lead  
To the remote lead of other equipment or power aerial if any  
Zum Zusatzkabel des anderen Geräts oder der Motorantenne,  
sofern vorhanden  
Au fil de télécommande de l’autre appareil ou à l’antenne  
automatique s’il y en a une  
Fernbedienungsleitung  
Fil d’alimentation à  
distance  
Rear speakers  
Hintere Lautsprecher  
Enceintes arrière  
LINE OUT (REAR)  
*4  
JVC Amplifier  
Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)  
Einzelleitung (für dieses Gerät nicht mitgeliefert)  
JVC Verstärker  
*4  
KD-NX5000  
*5  
JVC Amplificateur  
*4  
*4  
*5  
Cordon de signal (non fourni avec cet appareil)  
Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic  
body or to the chassis of the car—to the place not  
coated with paint (if coated with paint, remove  
the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do  
so may cause damage to the unit.  
Verbinden Sie den Erdungsleiter mit der Karosserie  
oder dem Rahmen des Fahrzeugs. Die Kontaktstelle  
darf nicht lackiert sein (sollte die Kontaktstelle lackiert  
sein, entfernen Sie den Lack der Kontaktstelle, bevor  
Sie den Leiter befestigen). Wenn der Erdungsleiter  
nicht ordnungsgemäß angeschlossen wird, kann  
dieses Gerät beschädigt werden.  
Front speakers (see diagram  
Vordere Lautsprecher (siehe Schaltplan  
Enceintes avant (voir le diagramme  
)
)
Front speakers  
Vordere Lautsprecher  
Enceintes avant  
)
LINE OUT (FRONT)  
*5  
JVC Amplifier  
JVC Verstärker  
JVC Amplificateur  
*6  
*6  
*6  
*6  
*5  
*4  
*6  
*6  
Subwoofer  
Subwoofer  
Caisson de grave  
Cut the rear speaker leads of the car’s ISO connector and  
connect them to the amplifier.  
Schneiden Sie die hinteren Lautsprecherkabel des ISO-  
Steckverbinders des Fahrzeugs ab, und schließen diese an  
den Verstärker an.  
*5  
Attachez solidement le fil de mise à la masse au  
châssis métallique de la voiture—à un endroit qui  
n’est pas recouvert de peinture (s’il est recouvert  
de peinture, enlevez d’abord la peinture avant  
d’attacher le fil). L’appareil peut être endommagé si  
cela n’est pas fait correctement.  
SUBWOOFER OUT  
JVC Amplifier  
JVC Verstärker  
JVC Amplificateur  
*6  
Coupez les fils des enceintes arrière du connecteur ISO de la  
voiture et connectez-les à l’amplificateur.  
*5  
*4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
Connections for external component playback / Anschlüsse für externe Komponente / Connexions pour un appareil de lecture extérieur  
H
Video cord (not supplied)  
Videokabel (nicht mitgeliefert)  
Cordon vidéo (non fourni)  
VIDEO OUT  
VIDEO IN  
External monitor  
Externer Monitor  
Moniteur extérieur  
KD-NX5000  
DIGITAL OUT  
KS-U57  
See page 106 of the INSTRUCTIONS.  
Siehe Seite 106 der BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG.  
Voir page 106 du MANUEL  
(not supplied)  
(nicht mitgeliefert)  
(non fourni)  
D’INSTRUCTIONS.  
Camcorder, rear view camera, etc.  
• Set “External Input” to “Ext Input,” and “Video Input” to “Video”  
or “Camera” (see page 94 of the INSTRUCTIONS).  
Camcorder, Rückfahrkamera, usw.  
Audio/video control amplifier or the decoder compatible  
with the multichannel digital sources  
•
Den “Externen Eingang” auf “Ext. Eing.,” und “Video-Eingang”  
auf “Video” oder “Kamera” einstellen (siehe Seite 94 der  
BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG).  
Digital optical cable (not supplied)  
Optisches Digitalkabel (nicht mitgeliefert)  
Câble optique numérique (non fourni)  
Audio/Video-Verstärker oder mit Mehrkanalquellen  
kompatibler Decoder  
Amplificateur de commande audio/vidéo ou décodeur  
compatible avec les sources numériques multicanaux  
Caméscope, caméra de recul, etc.  
• Définir “Entrée ext.” sur “EntréeExt.” et “Entrée Vidéo” sur “Vidéo”  
ou “Caméra” (voir page 94 des MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS).  
Connecting other external components / Anschließen anderen externen Komponenten / Connexion d’un autre appareil extérieur  
I
You can connect external components in series as shown in the diagram  
below.  
Vous pouvez connecter des appareils extérieurs en série comme montré sur  
l’illustration cidessous.  
Sie können beide externe Komponenten in Reihe anschließen, wie in der  
Zeichnung unten gezeigt.  
• All the components, adapters or signal cords need to be purchased  
separately.  
• Tous les composants, adaptateurs ou cordons de signal doivent être achetés  
séparément.  
•
Alle Komponenten, Adapter oder Signalkabel müssen getrennt gekauft  
werden.  
CAUTION:  
ACHTUNG:  
PRECAUTION:  
Before connecting the external components, make sure that the unit is  
turned off.  
Vor dem Anschließen der externen Komponenten sicherstellen, dass  
das Gerät ausgeschaltet ist.  
Avant de connecter votre appareil extérieur, assurez-vous que l’autoradio  
est hors tension.  
•
•
To use JVC CD changer, Apple iPod or JVC D. player, set “External  
Input” to “Changer” (see page 94 of the INSTRUCTIONS).  
To use other external components via KS-U57/KS-U58, set “External  
Input” to “Ext Input” (see page 94 of the INSTRUCTIONS).  
•
Zur Verwendung eines JVC CD-Wechsler, Apple iPod oder JVC D. player  
stellen Sie “Externer Eingang” auf “Wechsler” (siehe Seite 94 der  
BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG).  
Zur Verwendung anderer externer Komponenten über KS-U57 oder  
KS-U58 stellen Sie “Externer Eingang” auf “Ext. Eing.” (siehe Seite 94  
der BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG).  
•
Pour utiliser un changeur de CD JVC, un iPod Apple ou le lecteur D.  
de JVC, réglez “Entrée ext.” sur “Changeur” (voir page 94 du MANUEL  
D’INSTRUCTION).  
Pour utiliser d’autres appareils extérieurs via le KS-U57 ou KS-U58,  
réglez “Entrée ext.” sur “EntréeExt.” (voir page 94 du MANUEL  
D’INSTRUCTION).  
•
•
Apple iPod  
JVC DAB tuner  
DAB-Tuner von JVC  
Tuner DAB JVC  
Apple iPod  
KS-PD100  
iPod Apple  
KS-BTA200  
or / oder / ou  
KD-NX5000  
JVC D. player  
JVC D. player  
KS-PD500  
Lecteur D. de JVC  
CD changer jack  
Buchse für CD-Wechsler  
Prise du changeur de CD  
or / oder / ou  
External component  
JVC CD changer  
CD-Wechsler von JVC  
Changeur de CD JVC  
Externe Komponente  
KS-BTA200  
KS-U57  
Appareil extérieur  
KD-NX5000  
or / oder / ou  
or / oder / ou  
CD changer jack  
External component  
JVC DAB tuner  
KS-U58  
Buchse für CD-Wechsler  
Externe Komponente  
DAB-Tuner von JVC  
Prise du changeur de CD  
Appareil extérieur  
Tuner DAB JVC  
iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and  
other countries.  
To disconnect the connector / Zum Abtrennen des Steckverbinder / Pour déconnecter le connecteur  
iPod ist ein Warenzeichen von Apple Computer, Inc., eingetragen in den  
USA und anderen Ländern.  
iPod est une marque de commerce d’Apple Computer, Inc., enregistrée  
aux États-Unis et dans les autres pays.  
Hold the connector top tightly (1), then pull it out (2).  
Halten Sie die Steckverbinder-Oberseite fest (1) und ziehen Sie ihn heraus (2).  
Tenez fermement le connecteur par-dessus (1) et tirez vers l’extérieur (2).  
External component / Externe Komponente / Appareil extérieur  
*7  
*7  
*7  
Line Input Adapter KS-U57 (separately purchased)  
Line-Eingangsadapter KS-U57 (getrennt gekauft)  
Adaptateur pour entrée de ligne KS-U57 (vendu séparément)  
*9  
KS-U57 *7  
or / oder / ou  
To KS-BTA200, JVC DAB tuner or  
*8  
*8  
*8  
Aux Input Adapter KS-U58 (separately purchased)  
Aux-Eingangsadapter KS-U58 (getrennt gekauft)  
KD-NX5000  
Zu KS-BTA200, JVC DAB-Tuner oder  
KD-NX5000  
KS-U58 *8  
Adaptateur pour entrée auxiliaire KS-U58 (vendu séparément)  
Au KS-BTA200, tuner DAB JVC ou  
KD-NX5000  
*9  
*9  
*9  
Signal cord (not supplied)  
Einzelleitung (nicht mitgeliefert)  
Cordon de signal (non fourni)  
3.5 mm stereo mini plug  
3,5-mm-Stereo-Ministecker  
Mini-fiche stéréo de 3,5 mm  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6

Intel Tablet CAP15ECS7TB User Manual
Jabra Bluetooth Headset SP200 User Manual
Jensen Portable Stereo System JBX100SR User Manual
Jotul Stove GF300 DV User Manual
JVC Satellite Radio TN User Manual
KitchenAid Cooktop KECC568GAL1 User Manual
KitchenAid Dishwasher KUDC10FXSS User Manual
KitchenAid Dishwasher KUDV25SH User Manual
Kompernass Cooktop SIKP 2000 A1 User Manual
Kompernass Paint Sprayer PFSPS150 User Manual